Historical Harpsichord Technique

Kosovske
Music
Yonit Lea Kosovske performs on

both modern and historical keyboard
instruments as a soloist and chamber
artist. She has produced several
solo CDs, the most recent of which
include La Gracieuse, French chaconnes,
passacailles, & preludes (La Douceur,
2010) and Keyboard Music of Girolamo
Frescobaldi (Focus, 2010). Kosovske
lives in Ireland, where she performs as a
freelance artist and teaches at the Irish
World Academy of Music and Dance at
the University of Limerick.
Front jacket illustration: The authors

harpsichord. Photograph by David
Kingsbury. Author photograph by
Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
HistoricalHTmec.indd 1
Webb Wiggins
Oberlin College
and Conservatory
INDIANA
University Press
Bloomington & Indianapolis

iupress.indiana.edu
1-800-842-6796
Publications of the
Early Music Institute
Paul Elliott, editor
Historical Harpsichord Technique
Well-conceived and
well-written, Historical
Harpsichord Technique
offers valuable information for all who have an
interest in developing
good harpsichord touch.
Indiana
Historical
Harpsichord
Technique
Developing La douceur du toucher
Yonit Lea Kosovske surveys early

music and writing about keyboard
performance with the aim of facilitating
the development of an expressive tone in
the modern player. Reviewing the work
of pedagogues and performers of the late
Renaissance through the late Baroque,
she gives special emphasis to la douceur
du toucher or sweetness of touch. Other
topics addressed include posture, early
pedagogy, exercises, articulation, and fingering patterns. Illustrated with musical
examples as well as photos of the author
at the keyboard, Historical Harpsichord
Technique can be used for individual
or group lessons and for amateurs and
professionals.
YonitLeaKosovske
5/25/11 3:27 PM
Publications of the Early Music Institute

Paul Elliott, editor

Developing
La douceur du toucher
Yonit Lea Kosovske
Indiana University Press

Bloomington & Indianapolis
This book is a publication of

Indiana University Press
601 North Morton Street
Bloomington, IN 47404-3797 USA
iupress.indiana.edu
Telephone orders800-842-6796
Fax orders812-855-7931
Orders by e-mail iuporder@indiana.edu
2011 by Yonit L. Kosovske
All rights reserved
No part of this book may be reproduced
or utilized in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the
publisher. The Association of American
University Presses Resolution on Permissions constitutes the only exception
to this prohibition.
American National Standard for Information SciencesPermanence of Paper

for Printed Library Materials, ANSI
Z39.48-1992.
Manufactured in the United States of
America
Library of Congress Catalogingin-Publication Data
Kosovske, Yonit Lea.
Historical harpsichord technique :
developing la douceur du toucher /
Yonit Lea Kosovske.
p. cm. (Publications of the Early
Music Institute)
Includes bibliographical references and
index.
ISBN 978-0-253-35647-5 (cloth : alk.
paper) 1. HarpsichordPerformance
History. I. Title.
ML651.K67 2011
786.419309dc22
2011002091
The paper used in this publication

meets the minimum requirements of the
1 2 3 4 5 16 15 14 13 12 11
To my teachers and students
Je ne connais de deffaut considrable dans un Matre de Clavecin, que celuy

de ne savoir pas poser la main de ses Ecoliers, & de leur faire un mauvais
usage de leurs doigts. Les mauvais principes, & les fausses regles quil peut
enseigner, sont des erreurs aises corriger quand on vient les reconnoter;
mais le deffaut de mal employer ses doigts, est celuy de tous qui se repare le
plus difficilement quand il est une fois contract: Il demeure souvent toute la
vie comme un obstacle ternel la perfection du jeu. Or ce deffaut ne nous
venant jamais que du Matre qui nous a commenc, il est important den
choisir un qui sache lviter.
I do not know of a greater flaw in a master of harpsichord than that of not
knowing how to form the hand of his students, and thereby causing them to
use their fingers poorly. The bad principles and false rules that can be taught
are easy mistakes to correct when they are recognized, but the fault of using
ones fingers poorly is the most difficult of all to correct once it is learned. It
often remains for ones entire life as a perpetual obstacle to the perfecting of
ones playing. Since this fault comes to us only from our earliest teacher, it is
important to choose a teacher who knows how to avoid making it.
Michel de Saint-Lambert,
Les principes du clavecin (1702), preface
Contents

Acknowledgments xi

I ntroduction La douceur du toucher 1
1 Preparing to Play 5

Beginning Lessons5

Selecting an Instrument6

Position at the Keyboard10

Posture13

Relaxation18

Arms and Elbows23

Wrists26

Curvature of the Hands and Fingers30
2 Touching the Instrument 40

Warm-up Exercises40

Touching the Keys47

Gravity52

Stroking the Keys55

Motion of the Hands and Wrists62

Dynamics64

Playing Different Keyboard Instruments66
3 Articulation 70

What Is Articulation?70

Ordinary Manner77
Legato 80

Slurs87

Arpeggios90

Staggered Playing93

Grace Notes and Trills94
Cantabile 99

Detached Playing101

Silences104

Agogic Accents107

Timing108
4 Fingering 111

Comfort and Context111

Strong and Weak Notes114

Use of the Thumb120

Contraction of the Hand130

Artistic Freedom133
Conclusion 136
Appendix: Brief Biographical Notes

on People Mentioned in the Text 137

Notes 149

Bibliography 185

Index 197
Acknowledgments
There are several people I wish to thank for helping to make the completion
of this book possible: my former professors at the Indiana University Jacobs
School of MusicElisabeth Wright, Dr. David Lasocki, Stanley Ritchie,
Nigel North, and Michael McCraw; the editorial staff at Indiana University
PressJane Behnken, Sarah Wyatt Swanson, Elaine Durham Otto, June
Silay, Angela Burtonand Ron Sheriff; my partner, Wolodymyr Smishkewych; and my parents, Howard Kosovske and Barbara Kosovske. I also
want to acknowledge the Cook Music Library and Wells Library at Indiana
University, in addition to numerous libraries that lent me books through
interlibrary loan; The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, 2nd ed.,
and Grove Music Online. All photographs of hands at the keyboard are of my
own, photographed by Wolodymyr Smishkewych with a Nikon D200 Digital
SLR camera. All musical examples were designed by Dr. Beth Garfinkel using Sibelius notation. The harpsichord in the pictures is my own instrument,
built in 1999 by Peter Tkach.
xi
Introduction
La douceur du toucher
In his Klavierschule (1789), Daniel Gottlob Trk remarks, That a beautiful

tone is a requisite for good execution I can presume as an established fact.
It is also known from experience that of two players, one is able to produce
a far more beautiful tone on the same instrument than the other.1 He then
asks, What is a beautiful tone? Early writers did not consider that everyone
played so beautifully, nor did they play in the same manner. Marin Mersenne,
writing in 1636, describes Jacques Champion de Chambonnires as having a
profound knowledge and a beautiful touch on the harpsichord.2 Chambonnires, often regarded today as the father of solo French harpsichord music,
was a legend by the 1630s because of his touch as well as the excellent quality of
his compositions. According to Jean Le Gallois in his Lettre to Mademoiselle
Regnault de Solier (1680), Chambonnires had knowledge and precision
and a delicacy of the hand that others did not have . . . a way of holding [the
hand] and a way of pressing down the fingers on the keys that was unknown
to the others.3 He declares that Chambonnires and Louis Couperin moved
listeners in different ways: Chambonnires touched the heart, while Couperin touched the ear.4 Similarly, we also read accounts of specific techniques
at the harpsichord, as we will explore later. Although there are only a small
number of extant firsthand descriptions of Johann Sebastian Bachs playing,
we gain insight from Johann Nikolaus Forkel, who says in his biography of
Bach that he played with such economy of muscular effort that the movement
of his fingers was barely noticeable.5
From these and other historical writings that I will highlight in more
detail, we learn that graceful playing requires an intimate connection with the
plucking action on the strings, which, in turn, necessitates overall relaxation.
1
In the opening section of his Lart de toucher le clavecin, Franois Couperin

provides a description of the manner in which the harpsichord should be
played. He uses the expression la douceur du toucher,6 which I translate as
the sweetness of touch. The seventeenth-century Dictionnaire de LAcadmie
franaise gives these translations for douceur:
Douceur: The quality of that which is sweet. It is used literally and figuratively in all the meanings of sweet [doux]. . . . The sweetness of sugar.
Doux, douce: It is also said of that which makes a pleasant impression on
all the other senses, and which has nothing sour, spicy, or disagreeable.
. . . sweet perfume, a sweet voice, a sweet harmony, a sweet flute, a sweet
murmur, the sweet murmur of the water, a sweet manner of speaking . . .
this is sweet to the touch.7
In this sense douceur is not just a sweet manner but also a gentle, delicate,
and suave way of playing. Suavity has an air of being polished, refined, highly
sophisticated, and in control of ones art.
Given the fact that not all music is of a sweet or gentle character, it is all
the more striking that Couperin assigns this gentle, sweet approach to playing
in general. In my opinion, this represents the truest definition of grace as it
relates to musicregardless of how difficult (or loud and boisterous) a piece is,
the technique involved must still be one that is performed gracefully, without
appearing stressed, tense, or challenged by the difficulty at hand.
In the following chapters I present excerpted literature that deals specifically with early keyboard techniques of the period 15651800 that will help
both performers and pedagogues of the harpsichord play beautifully by way
of a douceur du toucher. This book will illustrate what many early writings
teach us about this art of gentle and seemingly effortless playingthe core
of what constitutes good harpsichord technique. I encompass not only the
ways in which early methods discuss how players hold and move their fingers,
hands, and wrists, but also how they hold and move their arms, torso, head,
and feet.
A challenge in pursuing this research results from the fact that so many
of the Baroque (and early Classical) treatises pertaining to keyboard playing
do not limit their expertise to the harpsichord. Apart from the Frenchmen
Franois Couperin, Jean Denis, Jean-Philippe Rameau, and Michel de SaintLambert, many authors wrote more about playing other keyboard instrumentsfor example, Guillaume-Gabriel Nivers and Girolamo Diruta, both
church organists, and Toms de Sancta Maria, a priest who played organ and
Introduction
clavichord. Rameau, who was primarily a harpsichordist, states: The position

of the hand, which concerns mostly the clavesin [harpsichord], is no different
for the organ.8 Trk regards the clavichord as the true Klavier but says his
treatise is for all keyboard instruments, especially the organ, the harpsichord,
and the pianoforte.9
Late eighteenth-century method books published as the fortepiano was
gaining popularity often include multiple keyboard names in their titles. In
some cases, it seems clear that the word clavier (also spelled Klavier) itself
embraces all keyboards, whereas in others it refers to keyboard instruments
other than the piano. August Eberhard Mller revised Georg Simon Lhleins
Clavierschule (1765) as Klavier- und Fortepiano-Schule (1804). Mller also wrote
Kleines Elementarbuch for das Klavier oder Pianoforte (1815). Some instruction manuals state that their lessons are meant for both harpsichord and/or
piano, even well into the early nineteenth century. As late as 1790, Robert
Broderip wrote Plain and Easy Instructions for Young Performers on the Pianoforte or Harpsichord, and John Ross wrote A Complete Book of Instructions
for Beginners on the Harpsichord or Fortepiano (1795). We can deduce from
such titles that many aspects of playing are equally applicable to all keyboard
instruments. At the same time, we cannot ignore that other aspects do vary
considerably, the most obvious of them being finger weight as it pertains to
the different mechanics of a harpsichord and a piano: a plucked action vs. a
hammered one; or in the case of clavichord, where there is a tangent hitting
the string, the ability to manipulate intonation, produce dynamics, and create vibrato. And of course the harpsichord contrasts with the organ, which
produces sound by air traveling through pipes of varying lengths. Here I
have tried to select material specifically for the development of harpsichord
technique.
My research is based on both primary and secondary sources: treatises,
letters, interviews, journal articles, musical examples, and one iconographical
image. I also draw upon my own experience as a professional keyboardist and
teacher of modern and historical keyboards: harpsichord, fortepiano, modern
piano, and chamber organ.
This book is divided into four chapters, each consisting of several smaller
sections. Chapter 1 examines preliminary aspects of touching the harpsichord,
focusing on necessary preparations before one begins to delve into the repertory. These embrace various positions at the keyboard, starting with the body
and moving through the arms, elbows, and wrists to the hands and fingers.
Chapter 2 deals with different ways of touching the keys. It begins with a
discussion of warm-up exercises. Chapter 3 discusses various types of articulation. Chapter 4 focuses on issues related to fingering. All translations are my
own unless otherwise noted. Where I furnish my own translations, I include
the quoted material in its original language in the endnotes.
I hope to have provided the reader with historical tools that are helpful
in developing a personalized method of playing that will enhance the ability
to play beautifully upon the harpsichord. In addition to musical examples, I
incorporate photographs of my hands that portray some of the different techniques mentioned. By surveying and commenting on these early methods, I
do not intend to suggest that there is any one absolute way of playing. On the
contrary, I hope that the variety of methodologies included in these pages will
contribute to the individual sense of style of every performer and teacher, so
that he or she may explore the endless beauty of sounds at the harpsichord.
One achieves a beautiful tone by way of a sweet and delicate touch: la douceur
du toucher.
1
Preparing to Play
Beginning Lessons
Although the majority of keyboardists today begin their studies on the piano
and later specialize in organ, harpsichord, or clavichord, there is a growing
population of students who choose harpsichord from the start. We read from
at least three early sources that the best time to begin is before the age of ten.
Franois Couperin recommends: The appropriate age for children to begin
is six or seven years, not that that must exclude people who are older; but,
naturally, to mold and form the hands in the practice of the harpsichord, the
sooner the better.1 In Principes du clavecin (1756), Friedrich Wilhelm Marpurg
suggests a similar starting age, but adds that those who begin lessons at a later
age may also succeed:
The earlier one begins to play a keyboard instrument, the more certain one
will be of making progress: although experience sometimes shows that
many feeble persons who start late can become adept, whereas others who
have started early in childhood have remained behind. However, one cannot
always guarantee the success of the student before the age of six or seven.2
Michel de Saint-Lambert also advises an early start in his treatise Les

principes du clavecin (1702). He differs from Marpurg, however, in that he lacks
confidence in late learners finding success at the harpsichord:
With regard to the formation of the hand, there is no individual who cannot
develop it if one begins to train early. This formation is nothing more than a
great suppleness of the tendons that allows the fingers the freedom to move
5

subtly, childhood being the most appropriate time to acquire it. It is a wellknown fact that those who begin in their youth become skillful, and those
who begin late do not succeed. One cannot say exactly at what age it is too
late to begin, since the formation varies from person to person. . . . But the
best time for both to start is in childhood: that is to say, before ten, and even
from five or six.3
Fr. Pablo Nassarre takes into consideration the negative effect of menial
labor upon the hands. We read from his Esquela msica, segn la prtica moderna (1723):
It also occurs in some instances that at a young age, students tendons are
not as flexible. The students are occupied in menial labor, which makes the
tendons hard and inflexible, and for this reason it is very important that
those who are to be engaged in this discipline do not occupy themselves
in other disciplines which might make their hands calloused and impede
the mobility of their fingers, because anything that involves hard or heavy
objects, or touching impure or excessively cold or hot waters, [can] inflict the
humors upon the extremities, and this impedes the docility of the tendons.4
Jean-Philippe Rameau is one of the few writers to mention an appropriate

time to begin the study of continuo, the reading and playing from a figured
bass line:
One can not proceed effectively in beginning figured bass very young . . .
with the rules and numbers in current use it would be from ten or fifteen
years of age in order to succeed a little passably. But now that six months
can suffice for it when one reads music and can play easily on the harpsichord . . . wait only until the smallness of the hands no longer hinders more
rapid progress.5
Selecting an Instrument
Having daily access to a good harpsichord is of extreme importance when
learning to play the instrument. There is no single, perfect instrument out
there that will suit all the needs of anyone, no matter what the playing level.
The types and stylistic features of a harpsichord differ greatly, depending
on many variables. This applies to both original, historic instruments and
modern replicas. Not only does every builder have his or her own style of
constructing, but each instrument within any particular shop may feel and
sound different from a sister instrument built within the same year. In an
Preparing to Play
ideal world, each harpsichordist who is serious about playing would own multiple instruments, one for every style of musical repertory available to us: an
early Italian for Girolamo Frescobaldi, a later Italian for Domenico Scarlatti,
spinets and virginals for the various virginal pieces, early and later French or
Flemish single and double manuals, German keyboards, and so on. The wish
list is endless. The majority of players feel fortunate to bring home just one
harpsichord, whether it is rented, bought, or borrowed. Harpsichordists in
such a position often want a multipurpose instrumentan instrument on
which all the harpsichord repertory may be played. There are also the issues
of space and expense to take into consideration.
Most harpsichord repertory composed before the eighteenth century was
written for single-manual keyboards, as is evident from the number of those
instruments that survive. High and late Baroque periods saw the development of larger harpsichords by expanding the compass and often adding a
second manual.6 There are the obvious differences in appearance, ranging
from natural wood to ornately painted decorations of the body and lid of
the harpsichord. In addition, there is variation in the length of instruments,
the internal supports, depth, key dip, key size, and choice of materials used
for strings, keys, and other parts of the instrument. These factors all affect
the sound and touch of the instrument. When selecting an instrument, it is
imperative to research the history and different styles available.
Several eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century treatises mention the
importance of choosing a harpsichord appropriate for the beginning student.
Issues of key size and quilling are discussed. For students new to the harpsichord, the treatises recommend soft quilling and/or playing on only one set
of strings.7
Couperin cannot stress enough the importance of having soft quills for
the instruction of young beginners:
One should only use a spinet or a single manual harpsichord at first for the
very young, and either of them should be very lightly quilled, this point
being of infinite importance. Beautiful playing depends more on suppleness
and great freedom of the fingers than on force, so that if, at the beginning,
one allows a child to play on two [coupled] sets of strings, it will strain his
small hands to make the keys sound and will result in badly placed hands or
a harsh manner of playing. 8
Marpurg offers similar advice on regulating the quills for a beginner at

the harpsichord:

It is advantageous to exercise the fingers on the harpsichord right from
the beginning so that they will develop strength. However, a hard-quilled
keyboard is harmful to the tender hands of young persons. . . . This situation
results in coarse and hard playing and in quite misshapen positioning of the
hands. . . . This prevents the hands from acquiring playing that is round and
clear. Therefore, either the [plectra] should be very weakly quilled or only
one register should be engaged.9
Carl Philipp Emanuel Bach also mentions in his Versuch ber die wahre
Art das Clavier zu spielen that a harpsichord should be quilled lightly, but not
excessively. Here, he defines what constitutes successful quilling:
A good harpsichord must have uniform quilling in addition to a good tone.
. . . The tests of the quilling are neat, facile execution of embellishments, and
an equal, quick reaction of each key as the thumbnail sweeps over the entire
manual with a light, uniform pressure. The action of the harpsichord must
not be too light and effeminate; the keys must not fall too deep; the fingers
must meet resistance from them and be raised again by the jacks. On the
other hand, they must not be too difficult to depress.10
Nicol Pasquali states in The Art of Fingering (1758) that he teaches children not only on a lightly quilled harpsichord but also on specially made
spinets with narrow keys. The smallest spinet had an octave the size of an
average sixth. A slightly bigger spinet had an octave the size of a seventh.11
He reasons:
Thus they will be taught good fingering at first, and acquire a good habit
from their earliest lessons. Otherwise they must learn their lessons with
wrong fingers in their infancy, and then learn them over again with proper
fingers in their riper years, which, perhaps, may not be so easily done, and
is more than probable that a tincture of bad fingering will stick to them as
long as they live. This last assertion I can aver by the experience I have had
of some of my own scholars.12
There are also small keyboard instruments extant in various museums

and private instrument collections. Some are only two feet wide or less and
probably were intended for children. Among these small instruments is the
ottavino harpsichord.13
Rameau also encourages lightly quilled instruments for beginners, but
recommends that as they progress, the students move to keyboards with
stronger actions that have more heavily voiced quills:
Preparing to Play
One must ensure that the resistance of the keys does not adversely affect
the movement of the fingers, and so the harpsichord cannot be too soft,
but as the fingers develop in strength, one can play upon a less soft keyboard and arrive gradually at being able to press down the more resistant
keys.14
His reasoning is twofoldto teach the student to feel the plucking point
in the key depth as well as to develop finger independence:
One needs to try to acquire the necessary movement in the fingers and to
give to each of them its own particular movement before trying to develop its
strength . . . as at the outset one has difficulty in moving each finger independently, the extra effort in trying to depress the keys might result in ruining
the perfection of their movement.15
Although many of the aforementioned sources direct their comments

toward young students in particular, my experience as both a harpsichordist and a harpsichord teacher supports the practice of beginning students
of any age playing for many weeks, if not months, on only one manual with
just one set of eight-foot strings engaged. Having myself come from a strong
background in modern piano before learning the harpsichord, I was allowed
by my first harpsichord teacher to play only on one register (a single eight-foot
set of strings) for many months. From this experience, I learned to lighten
my touch and grow accustomed to a more delicate way of stroking the keys.
In contrast to a technique needed for the hammer mechanism of the piano,
I learned to feel the quill plucking the strings by playing slowly on a single
eight-foot set of strings.
Trk suggests a clavichord as a useful learning instrument:
At least in the beginning, the clavichord is unquestionably best suited for
learning, for on no other keyboard instrument is it possible to achieve finesse
in playing as well as on this one. If, in addition, a harpsichord or a good
pianoforte could be acquired later, the pupil would gain even more, for by
playing on these instruments, the fingers achieve more strength and elasticity. One must, however, not play on the harpsichord exclusively, because
execution might suffer. Whoever is not able to have both instruments should
choose the clavichord. The better the instrument, the greater the gain for the
pupil, for he will much rather practice on a good instrument and will learn
to play with more expression than he would by having to pound on a miserable old box, as is often the case.16
10
Regardless of ones level or commitment to harpsichord as a vocation or

avocation, it is worth the investment to procure a decent, if not a fantastic,
instrument that has an even touch with good repetition.17 In my opinion,
true progress on harpsichord touch cannot be obtained by practicing on keyboards other than a harpsichord, such as piano, organ, clavichord, or even
synthesizer. While the study of multiple keyboards may contribute to ones
musicianship, sensitivity, and versatility, nothing substitutes for the touch and
feel of the unique plucking action on a harpsichord itself.
Position at the Keyboard

A harpsichordists touch is dependent upon how one positions oneself at the
keyboard. Factors to take into consideration before one actually plays are the
distance between the torso and keys, the position of the body in relation to
the center of the keyboard, the height of the arms and hands, and the position
of the feet. Many writers in the eighteenth century concern themselves with
these very issues.
Regarding the distance between the torso and the keyboard, Trk gives
these measurements: The body must be approximately ten to fourteen inches
(Zoll) away from the keyboard. It is obvious that a person whose arms are still
quite short should be allowed to draw the chair a little closer.18
Couperins guidelines are shorter: The distance that an adult should be
from the harpsichord is about nine inches (pouces), measured from the waist;
and proportionately less so for younger people.19
Marpurgs recommended distance is also shorter than the dimensions
suggested by Trk. His guidelines are very flexible, however, allowing for a
comfortable position and proper form of the arm:
Reckoned from the middle of the body, the correct distance from the keyboard is between six to ten inches depending on whether a person has longer
or shorter arms. Yet, one should not be so far from the instrument that if
the hands do touch the outermost keys the body is drawn out of position, or
not so close that the elbows are thrust backwards so that the upper arm runs
downward in a perpendicular line.20
The appropriate distance differs from person to person and is based on

height and arm length as well as general comfort and personal preferences.
The instrument itself also plays a role, depending on how far the wood juts
out below the keys. Differences also exist in the extension of the number of
Preparing to Play
11
keysfrom around four octaves in the late seventeenth century to five or five
and a half octaves in the late eighteenth century. Composers wrote music accordingly; players may need to move farther away from the keys in order to
stretch their arms out wider. How far or close keyboardists sit also depends
on whether or not they will play on the upper manual, which is further away
than the bottom manual.
Where, then, should a harpsichordist sit? The advice of early method
books ranges from the general to the specific. The problem is exacerbated
by the fact that, unlike the majority of modern pianos (excluding the large
concert Bsendorfers),21 harpsichord keyboards do not have eighty-eight keys,
or any standard number of keys, should one even want to sit exactly across
from the middle of the keyboard. As previously stated, the span of keys on a
harpsichord ranges from four octaves to more than five.
Many pianists learn where middle C is during their very first lesson.
What is more, they are taught to center their bodies in front of this particular note or thereabouts. Why? Middle C is not really situated in the middle
of a piano. On a piano with eighty-eight keys, there are thirty-nine notes to
the left of middle C and forty-eight to the right of it. The modern notion of
middle C as the center of the keyboard is thus arbitrary. If one sits opposite
the true center of the piano, E/F above middle C, the left hand may play up
high more often and more easily. Franz Liszt had no fixed position at the
keyboard whatsoever.22
Regardless of the time period, authors from the late sixteenth century
to the late eighteenth century (and beyond) advocate a generally centered
position at the keyboard. Diruta, whose treatise is geared more toward the
organist, says the keyboardist must sit facing the middle of the keyboard.23
Nassarre also mentions that the keyboardist should sit in the middle of the
keyboard.24 Hartong teaches in his Clavier-Anweisung (1749), One cannot
comfortably fix the fingers unless the beginner sits at the right height and
length from the keyboard. Therefore, one sits in the middle of the keyboard.25
Couperin says, The center of the body and that of the keyboard should correspond with one another.26 Does this signify the waist and hip area? Corrette
says, It is necessary to place oneself opposite the middle of the harpsichord.27
Marpurg writes, One should sit directly opposite the middle of the keyboard,
because the left hand must be able to reach the furthest keys on the right
hand side, and the right hand must be able to reach the furthest keys on the
left hand side.28 Similarly, C. P. E. Bach explains, The performer must sit
at the middle of the keyboard, so he may strike [anschlagen] the highest and
12
lowest tones with equal ease.29 Trk teaches that one must sit exactly in front
of middle C so that the highest as well as the lowest notes may be comfortably reached.30 He is among the first writers to designate a specific note as a
positioning point in front of which the keyboardist should sit.
Nowadays, we seem to take this centered sitting position for granted,
but I find it interesting that the writers of many early method books feel the
need to mention it. As pedagogues, we should never assume the obvious with
beginning students. We should inquire about everything and know that there
are usually multiple opinions to be offered on an array of topics relating to
playing any instrument. If children are sitting on a long bench, they may not
instinctively position the body in a centered position. If so, the teacher may
find that place and redirect the student there.
It is equally important to sit at a proper height. This varies from player to
player and is subject to taste. Another factor is whether or not the harpsichord
has a single or double manual. If the upper manual is going to be played, the
harpsichordist needs to sit high enough to avoid tiring the arms.
Baroque treatises have much to say regarding how high one should sit.31 A
few mention the importance of finding the right kind of seat. Corrette affirms,
It is necessary to sit on a comfortable seat, such as a chair or stool, because
an armchair cramps the arms.32 Marpurgs instructions focus on finding a
height that does not exhaust the hands:
One must also sit at the proper height from the keyboard, not so high or
low that the palm of the hand is thrown into a slanted plane with the elbow.
In either case the hand will tire, not to mention [being thrown into] a poor
position.33
Small, portable harpsichords used to be put on tables. Some Flemish

instruments had high stands, and the player stood. Harpsichordists today
hardly ever stand while playing, unlike keyboardists in some other, more
popular genres, such as rock music, where they are often seen standing as they
play an assortment of electric keyboards. Harpsichordists should not sit too
high or too low. Many new harpsichords have the option of a matching chair
or bench, usually built to accommodate a person of average height, but chairs
may also be custom built. It is desirable to acquire an adjustable seat, either a
concert pianists bench or a rotating stool.
Since the majority of harpsichords do not have pedals, what should harpsichordists do with their feet when they are playing? Couperin comments
on children whose feet do not yet touch the ground: It will be necessary to
Preparing to Play
13
put something of suitable height under young peoples feet . . . so that their
feet are not dangling in the air and so they may keep their bodies properly
balanced.34
Marpurg writes similarly, If the feet of the young person do not reach the
floor, place a bench for balance and so that the body does not rock.35
Posture
After finding an appropriate, comfortable position at the keyboard, one proceeds to perfect the posture of the body. As Couperin points out, Because
one needs to play elegantly, we must begin with the position of the body.36
Many of the historical writings adhere to a posture that is at once upright and
stately as well as relaxed. Modern concerns, such as poor posture (a slumped
torso, a drooped head, etc.), are mentioned in these early treatises.
Diruta says that the keyboardist must not make gestures or movements
with his body, but must keep the body and head upright and graceful.37 John
Baptist Samber instructs us in his Manuductio ad organum (1704), Accustom oneself to sitting erect, not humped, in the middle of the keyboard.38
Franois-Hippolyte Barthlemons New Tutor (1800) remarks: Nothing can
look more awkward than to see a person leaning over the instrument with the
head hanging down, as if ashamed of what he was about.39 Nassarres first
rule for beginners concerns the position of the body:
To clarify the first rule I have mentioned, the position of the body should be
upright in the middle of the keyboard so one may depress all the keys with
the two hands [equally], without extending one arm more than the other. It
is important that the position be this way so that one minimizes the movement of each arm as it descends or ascends the range of the keyboard.40
Nassarre goes on to describe a way of holding the body that resembles

basic principles taught in yoga classes as well as in Alexander Technique.41
That is to say, when the torso and head are held straight, the posture allows
for the natural movement of the limbs and thus a fluid motion of energy. He
explains that the torso is the core from which the head and limbs are governed.
If the body is held in a lengthened and centered pose, without leaning, the
arms, hands, and fingers will respond naturally as well:
Aside from having the foundation of the body in the middle point of the
keyboard, it should also be perpendicular in position, without inclining it
forward, backward, nor to the sides, and holding the head in the same man-
14

ner, because it is the most natural posture for man, and it follows the same
posture as the body and that of the limbs; for in this manner, the hands
position on the keyboard should come naturally, and thus the movements of
the fingers will also be natural.42
Much like Nassarre, Rameau discusses the interconnectedness of the

limbs and joints in relation to their root:
The movement of the fingers begins at their root, that is to say, at the point
where they join the hand, and never anywhere else. That of the hand begins
at the wrist joint, while that of the forearm, if such a movement were necessary, begins at the elbow.43
For musicians of all ages, the following imagery is effective. Visualize a

tree, with its complex interconnectedness of small and large branches. Picture
a small breeze that comes alongonly the leaves rustle and smaller branches
blow in the wind. The roots, the trunk, and the heavier branches remain more
still. Now, imagine a stronger breeze. This time, the trunk sways slightly, and
then it returns to its upright position when the wind has stopped. We may
apply this imagery to our bodies when we play harpsichordthe trunk as
our torso, the branches as our arms, the twigs as our wrists and hands, and
the leaves as our fingers.
For many years, I have accompanied voice lessons on both harpsichord
and piano. In several of these lessons, I have heard instructors teach their
students to picture a string pulling upward from their head. This visualization assists in facilitating an elegant, healthy posture, both for standing and
for sitting at the harpsichord.
Starting with Diruta and continuing for several generations thereafter,
treatises make a point of mentioning unnecessary body movements and facial
grimaces as an obstacle to a poised, relaxed, and graceful posture. Forkel
describes J. S. Bachs calm posture: It is hardly necessary to say that other
limbs of his body took no part in his performance, as is the case with many
whose hands lack the requisite agility.44
In his Regole armoniche (1797), Vincenzo Manfredini describes what he
considers to be an appropriate amount of movement from the fingers and
limbs:
The best position of the hand consists in moving the fingers in a manner easy
and beautiful to see; namely, only the fingers should be active and not the
head, the arm, or another part of the body; because such a useless contor-
Preparing to Play
15
tion not only hurts the perfect execution of the notes, but is also revolting to
spectators of good taste.45
Nassarre lists the following rule:

All unnecessary movement in the other limbs should also be avoided. There
are some who move the body to the beat of the hands, others [who move] the
head, others who [collapse inward] their shoulders, and others who make
movements with the mouth. All of this goes against the natural posture
of man, who, governed by reason, should have all movements of the limbs
in harmony, because if it is to the contrary, it causes undue attention and
makes one subject to mockery.46
Marpurg has a rather detailed list of gestures to avoid:

One must also be watchful about expressions and gestures, so as not to
make faces, nod with the head, snort, make a wry mouth, gnash the teeth,
or do other such ridiculous things. In the absence of the teacher, a pupil
who habitually falls into such faults may place a mirror on the music rack
in order to correct himself by it.47
Couperin offers similar advice: Regarding facial grimaces, one may correct this by placing a mirror on the music stand of the spinet or harpsichord.48
I recommend using a mirror in the practice room as well as in the teaching
studio. Many voice studios follow this practice. Keyboardists (and other instrumentalists, for that matter) may benefit from doing this as well.49
C. P. E. Bach is similarly open about his admonition against inappropriate grimacing at the keyboard:
In playing, the fingers should be arched and the muscles [or tendons] relaxed
(mit gebogenen Fingern und schlaffen Nerven). The less these two conditions
are satisfied, the more attention must be given to them. Stiffness hampers all
movement, above all the constantly required rapid extension and contraction
of the hands. . . . If he understands the correct principles of fingering and has
not acquired the habit of making unnecessary gestures, he will play the most
difficult things in such a manner that the motion of his hands will barely be
noticeable; moreover, everything will sound as if it presents no obstacles to
him. Conversely, those who do not understand these principles will often
play the easiest things with great snorting, grimacing, and uncommon
awkwardness.50
On the other hand, Bach was a great master of dramatic, whimsical fantasias; his music reflected the concept of Sturm und Drang,51 so it comes as no
16
surprise that he does not advocate a performance devoid of facial expression

when it is befitting the character of the music:
A musician cannot move others unless he too is moved. . . . It is principally
in improvisations or fantasias that the keyboardist can best master the
feelings of his audience. Those who maintain that all of this can be accomplished without gesture will retract their words when, owing to their own
insensibility, they find themselves obliged to sit like a statue before their
instrument. Ugly grimaces are, of course, inappropriate and harmful; but fitting expressions help the listener to understand our meaning.52
Charles Burney describes C. P. E. Bachs performance on the clavichord:

He grew so animated and possessed, that he not only played, but looked like
one inspired. His eyes were fixed, his under lip fell, and drops of effervescence
distilled from his countenance.53
Trk allows for facial expression (within reason, of course):
In the introduction, warnings were already made against grimaces, etc.,
while playing; but if one succeeds in training oneself that the countenance
approximates the character of the composition in a decorous manner, or that
there is an appearance of being imbued with the effect appropriate in each
instance, this is at least not prejudicial to good execution. At the same time
I do not hold that such a pantomimic play in music contributes very much
to expression as was formerly maintained. Nevertheless, I also do not know
what significant objections could be raised if the player took on a cheerful
countenance for livelier affects, for tender affects an agreeable one, and for
serious ones a sedatein short, a sympathetic countenance. But certainly
not a peevish expression for a single difficult passage or for every note a
special movement of the mouth and the like.54
Lhlein gives the following advice in his Klavierschule:

Be on guard for all nods back and forth, in short, for all grimaces and mannerisms which are inappropriate. A teacher cannot be attentive enough,
because bad habits creep in this way and are difficult to give up. Often these
gestures make even a good player appear foolish.55
In Johann Matthesons Vollkommene Kapellmeister, he devotes a chapter to

the subject of gesturing in performance (Geberdenkunst), in which he says:
It would be desirable if those who could not demonstrate correct gestures
because of bad habits would at least not exhibit awkward or ill-mannered
ones, or indifferent and unconcerned facial expressions. . . . I have been
Preparing to Play
17
present at many, many Passions, Mourning and Burial music, which to my

greatest chagrin brought about much joking and laughter. . . . I have seen
very strange and unseemly attitudes of all sorts, which sometimes have not
the slightest relationship to the subject or to the words. If now and then one
still meets in this or that person with what the French call le bon air, then
it is unusually good fortune; that other attribute, however, which is called
le bon got, is sought for in vain, for the most part. . . . When the keyboard
player allows his mouth to writhe, wrinkles his forehead up and down, and
contorts his face to such a degree, would it not frighten little children?56
The aforesaid postural descriptions provide the foundation for certain

piano method books decades later, such as that by Dussek and Pleyel:
The player should avoid lowering his head, arching his back, and contracting
his chest from the shoulders; the latter must always be lowered and relaxed,
not only to preserve a correct bearing and proper grace but also for freedom
in breathing, which for health reasons, it is important not to constrain and
repress, even when playing the most difficult pieces.57
A few treatises are unique in their directions for the slight turning of the
torso and feet. Couperin teaches:
One should turn the body slightly to the right when at the harpsichord, the
knees not pressed too tightly together; the feet should be placed side by side,
but especially the right foot well out to the side.58
Marpurg also advocates this position:

When one is seated at the keyboard, the body should be turned a little
toward the right side. The knees should not be kept tightly together. The
feet should be placed beside each other, with the right one, especially, being
turned somewhat outward.59
Likewise, Corrette writes:

It is necessary to sit on a comfortable seat, such as a chair or stool without
armrests, which will bother the arms, placing yourself opposite the middle
of the keyboard, holding the body and head upright, the feet outward, the
shoulders straight and turned slightly away from the head toward the audience [to the right].60
The straight line of the spine allows for relaxed nerves and a good flow
of oxygen. Although a gently turned posture places a potential strain on
the equilibrium of the body by slightly misaligning the spine, it nonetheless
18
looks graceful and elegant. Advocating this position as part of harpsichord

technique might not be the best advice, but aesthetically and diplomatically it
turns the body toward the audience (or the king, if one happens to be playing
for the Royal Chapel).
Relaxation
Any excess tension in the body can negatively affect ones touch at the keyboard. More specifically, relaxation of the arms and hands is vital to achieving a gentle touch and to conveying expression on the harpsichord. Trapped
tension61 can manifest in many ways, such as raised or slouched shoulders,
flapping elbows, tight wrists that are held too high or too low, useless hand
or finger movements, and fingers that are rigidly spread out. It may also appear in other parts of the body, such as in a nervously tapping foot, a bobbing
torso or a stiff upper body, a clenched or wiggly jaw, a tongue that sticks out
of the mouth, noticeable singing, humming, or groaning, as well as in an array
of facial grimaces that have no connection to the drama of the music. It can
also appear as loud, heavy breathing or, even worse, breathing too quickly or
holding the breath altogether.
There are many possible reasons for such superfluous movements of the
body, such as a chair or bench that is too low, nervousness, anxiety, poor diet,
or poor health. It may take some players years to undo these habits; others,
just a few weeks. A teacher can only do harm to a students progress by not
fully addressing the issue of tension in the students technique.
Tension inhibits the proper flow of oxygen and blood throughout the
body, both of which are vital to clarity of thought and to obtaining a fluid,
graceful technique. Not only does physical tension affect the playing and
thus the music itself, but it can also cause fatigue or, worse, bodily harm to
the player in the form of various repetitive stress injuries, tendonitis, and
even nerve damage. Although this concept of relaxation as it pertains to early
keyboard playing may seem like a new idea, perhaps holistic and even New
Age, this principle is taught repeatedly in many treatises throughout the
seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
One of my first teachers told me, You shouldnt burn many calories
while playing the harpsichord.62 Motivated out of a wish for me to obtain
a relaxed technique with a delicate touch, her comment harkens back to the
organist Guillaume-Gabriel Nivers, who proclaims in his Livre dorgue (1665),
To play pleasantly, you must do it effortlessly. To play effortlessly, you must
Preparing to Play
19
do it comfortably.63 Even if it was an organist who made such a simple and

brilliant comment, the message rings clear for harpsichordists. Over and over
again, Baroque writers reiterate the need to avoid tightness in all aspects of
keyboard technique.
Johannes Speth, writing in the Wegweiser (1689), mentions only briefly
some guidelines for good hand technique. The remaining lessons, he says,
are up to each individual teacher: Instruction on how to achieve a proper
touch with the use of the fingers, which follows almost automatically from
the proper use of the hands, is for the sake of brevity left to the discretion of
the teaching masters. The Wegweiser tells us, In the beginning, a teaching
master is concerned with training the student to hold his body upright and to
keep his hands loose and his fingers neither too curved nor too stiff.64 And
from Marpurg we read:
Young beginning students tend (particularly with trills and mordents) to
tighten and force the muscles, with the intent of bringing out one [or another]
tone, no matter how lightly quilled the keys may be. Therefore one should see
to it from the first hour of instruction that they relax the muscles and leave
the fingers such freedom as if these had nothing to do with the task.65
Concerning the nature of teachers and students, Hartong says that a beginning student must bring to lessons flexible fingers, from which it is hoped
that they will become supple. . . . If one of these qualities is either lacking or
does not soon appear, then the student may as well give up instruction.66
Couperin is a little more hopeful about rectifying the problems of people
who hold tension in their fingers. He proposes that they pull and stretch their
fingers gently to help facilitate flexibility:
People who begin late, or who have been badly taught, need to be careful; for
as the tendons may have become toughened, or they may have developed bad
habits, they should loosen up their fingers, or get someone else to do it for
them, before sitting down at the harpsichord; that is to say, to stretch or pull
their fingers in all directions; that, moreover, will awaken their energy, and
they will find much greater flexibility.67
Writing as early as 1597, Diruta states:

Because many organists have accustomed the hand to these defects from the
beginning, their playing rarely makes the sounds [armonia] that they should;
whereas had they accustomed the hand to lightness and suppleness, we
would have seen them play things [well], no matter how difficult.68
20
He also tells us that the fingers should not stiffen . . . nor strike the keys.69
He offers a visual image to describe a relaxed hand position:
I will give you an example in order to explain how to hold the hand lightly
and pliantly over the keyboard: when one slaps angrily, one applies great
force. But when one wants to fondle and pet, as we do when caressing a
child, one keeps the hand light without applying force.70
Some thirty years later, Mersenne differentiates between a light touch

and fast fingers. He remarks on playing with ease and without force in order
to produce a sweeter tone on the harpsichord:
Beautiful touch on the harpsichord . . . consists of holding both hands together on the keyboard in such a way that they are not forced, nor deformed
[constrained], and that their harmonious [orderly] movement gives as much
pleasure as the sound of the strings. But it must be noted that lightness of
the hand is very different from speed, for many have a very fast hand, which
is, nonetheless, quite heavy, as is shown by the hardness and roughness
of their playing. Now those who have that lightness of hand can be called
Absolute Masters of their hands and fingers, with which they press as little
as they want on the keys, in order to sweeten the sound of the spinet, as one
does on the lute.71
In Trait de laccord de lespinette (1650) Jean Denis avers that a harpsichordist will never play well with a forced and tense technique:
It is wonderful to behold a person who plays well and gracefully, and whose
hand is correctly positioned. But one must be very careful not to play with
either force or tension, for he who is tense or strained in his hands or in his
body will never play well. That is why the masters who teach should carefully consider the ability of the person who is being taught: whether he is
capable of playing according to the rules, and whether his fingers can do so.72
In a section titled Relaxation and Avoidance of Heaviness and Extra

Movement in Hernando de Cabezns Obras de msica para tecla (1578) we
read:
And thanks to this, the player is not embarrassed like other musicians, nor
hindered by the instrument, nor does he lose control of his speech, gesture,
or movement when playing, but, on the contrary, he remains seated with
calm, authority, and control, moving only the hands while playing, without
fatigue or heaviness.73
Preparing to Play
21
Trk attaches great importance to the natural relationship between relaxation and finger control. He describes hand and body positions that allow
players to use their hands and fingers in an unconstrained manner:
If the three longer fingers are held extended, the [tendons] will be subjected
to tension at the same time and as a result, it will not be possible to play with
the necessary ease. Only when executing large skips and wide stretches is
it necessary and therefore permissible to hold the three longer fingers in an
extended position.74
Here he alludes to the momentary motion of stretching the middle fingers for the sake of a large interval, but the fingers return to their unstretched,
naturally curved, and relaxed position as soon as possible. His words recall
C. P. E. Bachs description about the rapid extension and contraction of the
hands, which I include under the section Contraction of the Hand in chapter 4.
Trk also advises students who are serious about their music-making to
avoid activities that might harm their hands in any way, either by toughening
up the skin or by exhausting the muscles. He reflects ideas shared by Nassarre and Saint-Lambert, who emphasize the need to care for the hands and
refrain from anything that will cause the muscles to become tight or the skin
to become rough. Although Trk specifically mentions the clavichord in the
following quote, it is undoubtedly just as applicable to the harpsichord, which
he also played:
Those persons, particularly males, who wish to learn to play the clavichord,
should by no means occupy themselves in work that would make the fingers
stiff. Since this is not to be avoided in the case of all music students, one
must at least inform them in advance that they cannot become very facile
players. Whoever wants to make music, and particularly the playing of the
clavichord, his chief occupation must omit such work by all means, because
it is not possible to achieve necessary facility with stiff fingers.75
Couperin remarks similarly on the importance of refraining from harsh

physical labor:
Men who want to attain a certain degree of perfection should never do any
rough work with their hands. Womens hands, on the contrary, are generally better. I have already stated that suppleness of the tendons contributes
much more to good playing than force; my proof is evident in the difference
22

between the hands of women and those of men, and furthermore, the left
hand of men, which is used less in working, is usually the more supple at the
harpsichord.76
I have also made a general observation that, among both male and female
harpsichordists, the left hand tends to be more supple than the right hand. I
attribute this to the fact that the majority of them are right-handedthus,
their left hand actually uses fewer muscles in daily life. Even if their left hand
is weaker in overall strength, the fingers have more liberty and flexibility. I can
speak only from an overall perspective that is purely subjective and without
scientific foundation. Contrary to this idea, my own hands reflect the opposite
situationmy right hand can play fast passages much more easily and clearly
than my left hand, and I am right-handed.
Saint-Lambert comments: There is nothing freer in harpsichord playing
than the position of the fingers. In that respect, each person seeks only his
comfort and elegance. 77 Comfort requires the appropriate balance between
relaxation and the development of the necessary muscles involved in playing.
He tells us: Regarding the aptitude of the hand, there is no one who cannot
have it, if he begins to practice early in life. This aptitude is nothing other than
a great suppleness in the tendons, which leaves the fingers free to move subtly. 78 He describes the harpsichord as being extremely easy to play, not at all
tiring for those who play it, and not requiring, as do some other instruments,
a constrained posture that very often is not becoming to modest persons. This
is what has given it such a sovereign position that all persons of distinction
now want to learn how to play it. 79
Jean-Jacques Rousseau speaks in general about the need to maintain a
relaxed, natural position, with a remark on the appropriate position of the
thumbs: Place the two hands on the keyboard in such a way that you have a
completely unhindered position, for which one must usually exclude the right
hand thumb, because the two thumbs poised on the keyboard, specifically
on the white [diatonic] keys, would put the arms in a strained and awkward
position.80
Placing two thumbs simultaneously on one note seems rather unnatural,
but one assumes that comments like his come from witnessing such behavior.
Some teachers might also give such finger exercises to beginners, placing their
thumbs together on middle C for five-note warm-ups in contrary motion.
These students could make the mistake of assuming this position in actual
pieces, which is a pity, because it rubs the thumbs together forcefully, causing
Preparing to Play
23
undue strain. Not only are the thumbs crowded, but the pressure from the
two pushing against each other forces the other fingers and the hand itself to
turn unnaturally outward.
We can extract from Francesco Gasparinis continuo treatise Larmonico
pratico al cimbalo (1708), in which he says, Be sure to place the hands carefully
so that each finger assumes a natural position, not forced or twisted, or too
straight, but poised on the keys, relaxed, supple, and with appropriate readiness.81 Manfredini summarizes the delicate way of playing even more simply:
The best position of the hand consists in moving the finger in a manner easy
and beautiful to see.82
In all of these instances in which relaxation is mentioned in relation to
posture and technique, it is important to remember that we are talking about
the avoidance of unnecessary tension. Obviously, if any part of the body were
completely relaxed, we would not be sitting up or holding our hands up on
the keyboard. Totally at rest, the hands would fall of their own accord onto
the keys. Gasparini expresses the concept of poise and readiness, which
clearly conveys the appropriate amount of muscular preparedness needed to
play. The hand, relaxed and poised, becomes a fixed point that supplies stability for the freedom of the fingers.
Arms and Elbows

In this section, I share descriptions from several historical treatises that discuss arm and elbow positions at the keyboard. The authors tend to favor one
of two anglesforearms that are either slanted slightly downward or parallel
with the keys. Of those that advocate a parallel pose, some describe a ninetydegree angle of the upper arm and forearm, whereas others have a wider
opening at the inner part of the elbow. Some authors are less clear in their
descriptions. Few recommend a forearm lower than the keyboard itself, except
for some very early treatises, namely Sancta Maria in his Libro llamado arte
de taer fantasia (1565), but his treatise is primarily for clavichord, a keyboard
instrument demanding a completely different touch and technique from the
harpsichord. Sancta Marias hand posture will be discussed more fully in my
section devoted to wrists. The only other author to promote a low elbow position is Rameau, a century and a half later, but even then, he allows the forearm
to be lower than the hand only when the harpsichordist has progressed to a
more advanced level of playing.
24
Some authors prefer the elbows to be held close to the body, whereas
others want them slightly away from the torso, swinging freely.
Diruta is among the earliest writers to advocate that the elbow, arm,
and wrist be parallel. The wrists are held higher than the keyboard with the
middle fingers drawn inward in order for the hand to arch itself naturally. In
a section How the Arm Must Guide the Hand, he states:
Without a doubt, this is the most important piece of advice. If you have ever
noticed those who have poorly trained hands, it appears that they are lame,
since one sees only those fingers that touch the keys, the other fingers being
hidden. They also hold the arm so low that it ends up beneath the level of the
keyboard, and the hands seem to be hanging from the keys. Everything goes
wrong for them because the hand is not guided by the arm as it ought to be.
Therefore, it is no wonder that such performers, in addition to the exhaustion they suffer in playing, never give a successful performance. 83
Corrette also rules in favor of parallel elbows, writing in Les amusemens

du Parnasse (1749):
The elbows and wrists should be level with the keyboard, but it is necessary
for the sake of gracefulness that the elbows [hang] beside the body in an easy
manner. One may move them when it is necessary to cover large intervals on
the keyboard, principally in the pieces where one crosses the hands. 84
Johann Samuel Petris Anleitung (1767) promotes an arm position with elbows and palms in a straight, horizontal line.85 Pasquali also prefers a parallel
position but allows room for alterations of the pose, apparent in his choice of
the word thereabout. The elbows of the performer should be in a line parallel
with the keys of the instrument or thereabout.86 Saint-Lambert is included
among the proponents of this parallel posture: The wrist should be parallel
with the elbow, depending on the seat that one chooses.87
An anonymous author gives the following explanation in New Instructions for Playing the Harpsichord, Piano-forte, or Spinnet (1798):
Let the elbows be parallel with the keys of the harpsichord when playing.
. . . To give brilliance to the fingers when they play, keep the arms and
wrists rather stiff [emphasis mine], except moving them to the right or left
part of the keys of the harpsichord, as the Lesson may require; but they
must not be lifted up and down at the motion of the fingers, and the part
of the arms above the elbows must be kept nearly close to the sides of the
body. 88
Preparing to Play
25
If this author truly intends for the arms and wrists to be kept stiff, surely this
is poor advice. However, if we interpret stiff to mean firm or supported, not
flopping around, then this is sound advice.
Manfredini reasons that higher elbows allow for an easier reach of the
extreme parts of the fingerboard. To play well, he writes, one needs to sit
in a manner so that the elbow is a little higher or at least at the level of the
keyboard, so as to be able to play high and low notes easily.89 Samber remarks:
The hands and arms should be free from the body.90 J. C. Bach and F. P.
Ricci advise: Sit at the proper height, so that the elbows and the wrist be a
little higher than the level of the keyboard, and so that the hand falls as of its
own accord on the keys.91 C. P. E. Bach says, When the performer is in the
correct position with respect to his height, his forearms are suspended slightly
above the fingerboard.92 Lhlein follows in this tradition:
The seating must be arranged so that the elbow lies in a natural position,
somewhat higher than the keyboard.93 If the keyboard player sits too low so
that the elbow is lower than the keys, then playing is difficult. In this low
position, proper circulation of the blood in the hand will be obstructed.94
Trk specifically recommends a high elbow position several inches

higher than the hands.95
One must sit neither too high nor too low, but in such a way that the elbow
is noticeably higherthat is, by several inchesthan the hand. Should the
clavichord frame be too high, particularly for younger personsas is usually
the casethen the seat of the chair should be raised. For if the hands are
held as high or higher than the elbow while playing, it is very tiring, and
inhibits the use of the necessary strength, because in this case the [tendons]
become tense (the arms must not be pressed to the body but neither must
they be too far away from it).96
Hartong, in his section Concerning the application or the fixing of the

fingers, says the following:
[Sit him] just far enough away from it so that when his hands are on the
keys, the upper arm is not perpendicular to the keyboard, but, rather, the
elbows are somewhat nearer to the keyboard than the upper arms. Thus he
will have his hands very free, and they will not become cramped when moved
in any direction, which can occur when he sits nearer to the keyboard. . . .
Further, when one sits him high enough so that his hands rest somewhat
lower than his elbows, the hands do not become tired.97
26
Couperin tells us: To be seated at the correct height, the under-surface

of the elbows, wrists and fingers should all be on one level [with the keyboard]:
therefore a chair must be chosen which will allow this rule to be observed.98
Rameau promotes a position in which the elbows are higher than the
keyboard:
The elbows must be above the level of the keyboard so that the hand falls
[on it] as though of its own accord; and they are never too high, so that
the thumb and little finger can be placed on the edge of the keys. At the
same time as the thumb and little finger are placed on the edge of the keys,
the elbows must fall comfortably to the [players] sides, in their natural
positiona position which should be observed firmly and moved only when
absolutely necessary, as when one is obliged to move the hand from one end
of the keyboard to the other. This natural position of the elbows, together
with correct placement of the thumb and little finger, facilitates the position
of everyone, regardless of size, in relation to the harpsichord, leaving only
the seat to be adjusted as needed.99
Rameaus preface to his Pices de clavecin (1724) provides a full description

of postures and movements needed for supple fingers. He later allows for a
lower position of the arm and elbow in relation to the keyboard:
When it is felt that the hand has been developed, the height of the bench
may be gradually lowered until the elbows are slightly below the level of
the keyboard, causing the hands to be as though they were glued to the
keyboard, allowing the players touch the utmost amount of contact.100
Placing the elbows lower than the keyboard is perplexing, but in conjunction
with so many of his other comments, it seems that he is merely advocating
for constant contact with the quill and the string (as much as is possible from
touching the key).
Wrists
A woman sitting at the harpsichord appears on the title page of Parthenia, or
the Maydenhead, the first collection of music published for the virginals.101
She has piqued my curiosity for many years and was part of my motivation for writing this book. In particular, I am fascinated by the position of
Figure 1.1. Title page of Parthenia, or the Maydenhead.
This item is reproduced by permission of the Huntington Library, San Marino, Calif.
28
her hands. Her left wrist is turned slightly outward while her fourth and
fifth fingers hang away from the keys. In contrast, the right hand is turned
inward toward the thumb while the outer fingers fly upward. The palms of
her hands seem to glide along the keyboard in a horizontal motion. Her left
hand suggests that she is playing with paired fingerings. Her right hand is
using the thumb. The positions of her wrists, hands, and fingers are nothing like the hand positions depicted in nearly all treatises with their still,
rounded curvature of the hand and parallel (or nearly parallel) alignment
of the fingers. Nevertheless, everything about her, from her fingers to her
wrists, arms, and blissful expression, suggests a playing style that is delicate,
graceful, and relaxed.102
A supple wrist is imperative for a delicacy of touch at the harpsichord.
Treatises discuss wrist position in relation to how high they are situated and
to what angle they should be turned, if any. Saint-Lambert explains, Hold
ones hands straight on the keyboard, that is to say, leaning neither inward
[toward the thumb] nor outward.103 If indeed he favors an unturned wrist,
surely he means only for a starting position, not necessarily what happens
during movement.
Georg Friedrich Wolf, on the other hand, describes a position in his
Unterricht im Klavierspielen (1789) that has the hands turned outwards,104
presumably toward the little finger. Wolf s Unterricht is late enough in the
eighteenth century for us to know it has piano as its primary focus, but we
cannot assume that it does not include harpsichord as well.
Rameau is partial to a turned wrist that leans slightly in toward the
thumb:
The hand must also be parallel with the keyboard. . . . One must slightly lift
the side of the hand that is near the little finger with a simple movement of
the wrist, and without the hand losing any of its suppleness. This last position is a bit difficult for beginners, because of the little turn of the wrist . . .
but without this turn, the little finger would not touch the key perpendicularly, and would have neither the same strength nor the same lightness of
touch as the other fingers.105
Elsewhere he says:
The wrist joint must always be supple. This suppleness, which is then spread
to the fingers, gives them all the ease of movement and all the lightness necessary; and the hand, which by this means is, so to speak, as if dead, serves
merely as a support for the fingers that are connected to it and as a way of
Preparing to Play
29
transmitting them to those parts of the keyboard that they cannot reach
solely by their own movement.106
Rameau describes a fixed elbow position, allowing the forearms and a

flexible wrist to move about the keyboard in various directions:
The performance of the various batteries [arpeggiated sections, sometimes
involving hand crossing] and roulements [running scale passages] depends
first and foremost upon the agility of the wrist, this being achieved by soft,
light movements, keeping the elbow joint as a fixed point when the particular batterie reaches beyond the span of the hand.107
Were the whole arm to move up and down the keyboard without a fixed
elbow position, the result would be a stiffening of the wrist. In Rameaus Code
de musique pratique (1760), he says, In every position, in the largest leaps, the
hand follows the fingers, the wrist joint [follows] the hand, the elbow [follows]
the wrist; and never should the shoulder interfere.108 This contrasts with
Diruta, who says that the arm guides the hand.109 With Rameau, the smaller
components guide the larger ones, starting with the fingers and moving outwards through the hand, wrist, and arm.
Pasquali describes an even plane between the wrist and third knuckle.
The upper part of the wrist should be in a line pretty much parallel with
the highest knuckle of the middle finger.110 This corresponds to Denis, who
elaborates on this position:
There are some masters who have their pupils place their hands in such a
way that the wrist is lower than the hand, which is very bad, and properly
speaking, a vice, because the hand no longer possesses strength. Others
make one hold the wrist higher than the hand, which is a fault because the
fingers then resemble sticks, straight and stiff. For the proper position of the
hand, the wrist and the hand must be at the same height; in other words, the
wrist must be at the same height as the large knuckle of the fingers.111
Marpurg also favors a wrist held parallel to the keys. He specifies a flat
plane between the underside of the wrist and the tips of the fingers:
One must sit at the proper height, not so high or low that the palm of the
hand is thrown into a slanted plane with the elbow; the lower part of the
elbow, the underside of the wrist, and the downward curving fingertips will
form a horizontal or straight line. One should allow the rounded hands
to pass over the manual at equal heights without the wrist either jutting
upward or dropping downward.112
30
Curvature of the Hands and Fingers

As early as 1565, Sancta Marias treatise Arte de taer fantasia gives a detailed
description of hand position at the keyboard.113 Sancta Maria was not a noted
performer but a priest who happened to write a treatise that focused on the
clavichord. Nonetheless I include his teachings here for historical purposes,
as they are among the first detailed descriptions of hand technique, even if it is
one that I do not advocate for playing the harpsichord (or any other keyboard
instrument, for that matter). He dedicates seven chapters to technique, from
which the following paragraphs are excerpted:
The hands should be held like a hook, like a cats paws, not hunchbacked,
but the knuckles where the fingers join must be kept low so that the fingers
are higher than the hand and are arched. Thus fingers are flexed and can
better strike the keys . . . just as the more taut a bow the better, so too the
more flexed the fingers the better, and the notes will sound louder, fuller,
and brighter . . . it imparts brilliance and sparkle, quite different and distinct
than anything without this hand position. Keep hands compact: fingers
two through five should be held together, holding two and three close (this
is easier on the right hand) to achieve smooth and sweet playing. Keep the
thumb low, much lower, but curved inward and from the second joint to
the tip kept under the palm. One must curl fingers one and five to have a
good hand position. One cannot play with fingers strewn about [esparcidos].
Fingers two through four should be kept over the keys at all times. The index
finger is held higher than the others.114
Sancta Marias recommended posture remains a historical oddity. The

thumb and little finger are drawn inward under the palm. The wrists are stiff
and bent. The elbows are low, causing the hands and fingers to grow tired. The
index finger is held out and above the other fingers. If Sancta Maria had a low
bench and the elbows were below the keyboard, it is possible that by bending
the hand backwards, some of the tension could be released. One may also
develop strong and dexterous fingers (index through ring finger) in this position; such finger strength may have been needed for pressing the keys of the
organs and clavichords available to Sancta Maria.115 He contradicts himself
just a few paragraphs later in his treatise when, in his discussion of various
conditions needed to play the keys correctly, he advises:
The third condition, which is to press the keys well, consists of six things.
The first is to touch the keys well with the pads of the fingers, in such a
way that the nails do not reach or hit the keys at all [very much?], which is
Preparing to Play
31
accomplished by lowering the wrists, and extending the fingers from the
middle joint forward, because by playing in this way, the notes sound completely, sweetly, and softly. The reason for this is that, since flesh is a soft
thing, it touches with sweetness and softness. Furthermore, one can play
cleanly, since because the fingers sit upon the keys they cannot slide off or
escape anywhere. Otherwise, when you play with the nails, two grave errors
are committed, [and the notes are] faint and without spirit [lifeless].116
In this latter description, the hand would be shaped less like a cats paw
and held more naturally in a casually arched position. Even though he is writing about the clavichord, his advocacy for playing below the actual fingertip is
well suited to a proper hand position for the harpsichord. As for the infamous
description of the cats paw, the imagery quickly disappears in treatises
around the turn of the seventeenth century. Even when C. P. E. Bach or Trk
address the clavichord two centuries later, they include nothing even remotely
similar to the posture described by Sancta Maria. Diruta, writing only a few
decades after Sancta Maria, criticizes his cats-paw hand position:
If you have ever noticed, those who have poorly trained the hand appear
crippled: they hold the arm so low that it is below the keyboard and the
hands seem to hang on the keys, and then one can only see the fingers which
touch the keysthe others hiding. All this happens to them because the
hand is not guided by the arm as it should be. Thus it is no wonder that
though they labor to play, nothing they do turns out well. If I could draw
a hand to show you this, you would easily understand how it ought to be
guided by the arm, and also how the hand is to be cupped and the fingers
curved. . . . To cup the hand it is necessary to pull back the fingers somewhat, and so at the same time the hand is cupped and the fingers curved; and
the hand should be brought over the keyboard thus.117
Diruta warns against straightening the fingers or curving the thumb and
little finger inward excessively. He advocates a natural curvature:
The fingers should be together on the keys and therefore rather curved:
in addition, the hand should be light and supple on the keyboard, because
otherwise the fingers cannot move with agility and promptness.118
Dirutas hand position is anything but forced or tense. On the contrary, he

is in favor of a delicately held and flexible arch, as we recall from his quotation
comparing a good hand curvature to the way in which one caresses a child.119
Nassarre describes an arched hand position that forms a natural curve,
with the fingers touching the keys with the fleshy part (yema, lit. yolk) of
32
the fingertips, which helps one avoid a perpendicular finger position. In many
ways, Nassarres hand position (intended more for organists) as described in
his eighteenth-century treatise is similar to his sixteenth-century Spanish
predecessor, especially when they condemn vertical fingers and the touching
of the fingernails upon the keys. In pursuit of a natural manner of playing, Na
ssarre advises against any motions that seem forced or violent. He describes a
proportionate curvature of the fingers, each one being unequal in length:
The first step needed to demonstrate the music on an organ is the posture
of the hands (for the position of the body is its foundation). As I said in the
eleventh chapter, the fingers should be slightly arched, not so much that one
presses with the nails on the keys nor with the fullness of the pad because
either manner causes great difficulty in performance.120
We can infer from his description that he promotes a natural curvature,

one in which the fingers are neither completely perpendicular nor totally flat.
Nassarre continues, drawing attention to the differences of finger size:
Since the fingers of the hands are unequal [in size], it is important that the
posture be proportional with all of them, so that in the moment that one
moves each one, the movement will be natural, not strained. If the position of
the hand is such that the fingers were to be overly arched and pressing with
the nails, it should be noted that, since the third finger is longer than the others, it will necessarily be more arched; and when one needs to move it from
one key to take it to another, it will need a greater movement by having to
extend it more than the others, mathematically speaking, and the movement
will be forced by being disproportionate. It is the same with all the other
fingersthe movements are unequal, each acting in accordance with its own
length. From this one can infer that with such a hand position all the movements will be unnatural, and this is the cause of poor performing in those
who make a habit of such a hand position. When the shape of the hands
has the fingers arched too little or not at all, the key is pressed down with
more area of the finger pad, and because of the same inequality [of length]
of the fingers, the movements will be unbalanced and more unnatural. . . .
These unnatural and uneven movements produce certain effects of tardiness
and clumsiness. For this reason they should not be arched too much or too
little, but rather arched partway, because by having the posture of the hand
in balance with all the fingers, seeing that they are unequal in length, each
finger should come closer together [curving inward, so that] each finger plays
with the tip of the fleshy part [not the tip of the finger itself] equally. . . . This
manner has three outcomes: the first, that all [fingers] play in the same way,
uniformly using the fingertips; second, that they play with equal pressure.
Preparing to Play
33
Figure 1.2. Hand resting on a key in a relaxed position with an unforced,

rounded curvature. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
. . . The third effect is that all the movements will be natural and unforced,
so that by means of less effort and flexible tendons, one attains agility of the
fingers. For all of the reasons mentioned, it is important that organ masters
take care when they teach. [It is also important] that those who learn are
responsible for their proper hand postures. For if they were to err in this, it
would be the same as if the foundation of a building should fail.121
Nassarres elaborate style of writing is unclear at times, but what is certain

is his advocacy for a natural hand position that takes into consideration the different lengths of the fingers. For this reason his description does not champion
a parallel line among the fingers. Although he is writing about organ technique,
his condemnation of playing at the very fingertips is most appropriate to playing the harpsichord. Again, the ability to feel the connection to the quill and
the point at which it is about to pluck the strings is achieved through a relaxed
hand, which enables the fingers to play between the fleshy part and the very tip
of the finger. Note also that he cares to mention that it is the responsibility of
both the teacher and the student to ensure a proper hand position.
In figure 1.2, I offer one possibility of what a natural curvature of the
hand might look like. In this photograph, I placed my hand randomly on
34
the keyboard without giving specific thought to how I would round out my
hand.
G. F. Wolf (1789) is brief in his depiction of the hands shape: The hand
must be held round so that the thumb and little finger are not too short.122
The latter part of his statement suggests a drawing back of the middle fingers
that is slightly more forced to make them draw nearer to the outer fingers. He
could possibly mean that if the hand were to be held too flat, the two outer fingers would be too far from the keys or would be touching just the outer edges
of the keys. His wording is nonetheless too ambiguous to decipher fully.
C. P. E. Bach, who is meticulous in some areas of his Versuch, is not so
particular in his description of a correct hand profile. However, his admonition of an uncurved hand is clear: Those who play with flat, extended fingers
suffer from a disadvantage. . . . They are too far removed from the thumb,
which should always remain as close as possible to the hand [the other fingers].123 We learn of his own hand position from Forkel, who gives a detailed
hand description and claims that he possessed, at least to some degree, his
fathers keyboard technique.124
As a keyboardist, Bach the elder was admired by all who had the good
fortune to hear him and was the envy of the virtuosi of his day. We do not
know whether or not his particular method of playing greatly differed from
that of his contemporaries and predecessors. Nor is there evidence describing
the differences in his technique on harpsichord, clavichord, and organ. So far,
no one has attempted to explain in what the difference consisted other than
his seemingly immobile, perfect hand with fingers drawn in parallel to one
another and that he played perpendicular to the keyboard, but even that
is disputable, as we do not know at which point the perpendicularity began.
Observations of his technique could be a description of his fingers when he
was in mid-motion, peeling his fingers back toward the palms of his hands.
Depending on whether he was at rest position or in motion, the curvature of
his fingers could have appeared more or less arched as well as vertical. Forkel
describes his hand position in this way:
Bach placed his hand on the [keyboard] so that his fingers were bent and
their extremities poised perpendicularly over the keys in a plane parallel to
them. Consequently, none of his fingers was remote from the note it intended to strike, and was ready instantly to execute every command. Observe
the consequences of this position. First of all, the fingers cannot fall or (as so
often happens) be thrown upon the notes, but are placed upon them in full
control of the force they may be called on to exert. In the second place, since
Preparing to Play
35
the force communicated to the note needs to be maintained with uniform

pressure, the finger should not be released perpendicularly from the key, but
can be withdrawn [drawn back] gently and gradually toward the palm of the
hand. In the third place, when passing from one note to another, a sliding
action instinctively instructs the next fingers regarding the amount of force
exerted by its predecessor, so that the tone is equally regulated and the notes
are equally distinct. In other words, the touch is neither too long nor too
short, as Carl Philipp Emanuel complains, but is just what it ought to be.125
According to Sebastian Bachs manner of placing the hand on the keys, the
five fingers are bent so that their tips come into a straight line and thus fit the
keys, which lie in a plane surface under them, so that no single finger has to
be drawn nearer when it is wanted, but every one already hovers over the key
which it may have to press down. What follows from his manner of holding
the hand is that no finger must fall upon its key, or (as so often happens) be
thrown on it, but only needs to be placed upon it with a certain consciousness of the internal power and command over the motion. . . . the holding of
the fingers bent renders all their motions easy. There can therefore be none
of the chopping, thumping, and stumbling, which is so common in persons
who play with their fingers stretched out or not sufficiently bent.126
Trks description of how to form the fingers depicts only a small curvature of the middle fingers and straight outer fingers. Like C. P. E. Bach, he also
condemns straight middle fingers (with exception) because of the potential
stress caused by such a flat position. Trk explains:
The correct position of hands and fingers is very important, therefore the
following rules should be observed. The three longer (mittlern) fingers must
always be curved a little, but the thumb and the little finger must be held
out straight; because of the shortness of the little finger, the hands and arms
need not sometimes be moved forward and then immediately backward. If
the three longer fingers are held extended, the [tendons] will be subjected to
tension at the same time, and as a result, it will not be possible to play with
the necessary ease. Only when executing large skips and wide stretches is
it necessary and therefore permissible to hold the three longer fingers in an
extended position.127
One has to wonder if he truly intends the thumb and little finger to lie
outstretched without curving whatsoever, or if he means that they should be
nearly straight and less arched than the middle fingers. Given the fact that
he goes on to discuss the need for the thumb to remain on the keys, it seems
that he has observed individuals who have held the fingers so close to the front
of the keys that the thumb dangled off the keyboard when not in use. If this
36
latter position were the case, the player would need to move the hand and arm
in and out whenever the thumb was needed to play. This motion would be
terribly inefficient while playing. Also, if Trk has witnessed thumbs hanging
away from the keys, this might suggest that even at such a late date (when the
thumbs were used quite often), there existed players who employed earlier
finger patterns that favored the three middle fingers. Were they still in fashion
by the end of the eighteenth century? Trk writes:
The thumb must always be held over the keyboard; therefore it should never
hang down or be pressed against the edge of the clavichord, for both of these
mistakes, among other things, would cause unavoidable gaps in the music
incorrect articulation of the musical thoughts before the thumb could
be placed in its correct position. The fingers must not be held too closely
together, but rather a little apart from each other, so that whenever possible,
any stretches can be executed nicely and with continuity, without motion of
the hands, because playing should be done only with the fingers. For large
skips, however, small movements of the hands and arms are unavoidable.128
Corrette (1716) describes the following hand curvature that he feels promotes supple playing:
The beautiful manner of placing the hands upon the keyboard is to curve
the three middle fingers so that they may be almost equal with the thumb
and the little finger, on the same straight line above five successive keys, as
for example, C D E F G, because if several fingers are found on the same key,
not only does the hand look bad, but, moreover, this impedes the freedom
and suppleness of the fingers.129
Although in this paragraph he says almost equal with and the same
straight line, it is likely that he means for the curve of the fingertips, when
placed on five consecutive keys, to have an even, steady line instead of a jagged
one caused by fingers placed in different parts of the keys, some closer to the
edge and some farther inward. He describes a curvature that places the fingertips near each other but not exactly parallel. When the middle fingers lie close
to the outer fingers, they create a slight curve that is almost a straight line.
Nivers says that a natural and graceful manner of playing is achieved by
evenly curling the fingers, especially the longer ones, so their length is equal
to the shorter ones.130 This is similar to the comfortable arch of the hand
advocated by Diruta, in which the arched middle fingers form a straight line
with the little finger and thumb.
Preparing to Play
37
Pasquali advises the player to bend the three middle fingers and to keep
the outer fingers upon the keys, but he does not go into detail. He mentions
the fingernails twice, pointing out that they should be kept short and hidden
from the performers view, although neither of his comments tells us just how
much to curve the fingers:
The points of all the fingers and thumb should always be held over the keys,
whether they play or rest, which will occasion the three longest fingers to
be so bent, that the performer cannot see the nails of them. This is the true
position of the fingers. . . . The nails should always be kept so short as not to
touch the keys.131
John Baptist Samber, in his Manuductio ad organum (1702), favors curving

the middle fingers and developing finger independence. He describes a hand
position that has a natural arch, one neither too forced nor relaxed:
Concerning the body, hands, and fingers: how the beginner places himself . . .
holding the fingers neither too straight nor too curved . . . also, do not support
them high in the air, but rather always let them be held over the keyboard.132
We recall Saint-Lamberts statement: There is nothing freer in playing

the harpsichord than the position of the fingers. . . . The convenience of the
player is the first rule that must be followed; gracefulness is the second.133
Contrasted with this comment is his description of a hand position that I feel
causes unnecessary effort and muscle tension. His position includes having
the fingers curved and all arranged at the same level based on the length of the
thumb.134 Does he intend the middle fingertips to be brought so far inward as
to be parallel with the thumb? If so, this takes more force than allowing them
to fall naturally and form a slight arch, as the middle fingers rest farther into
the keys than the thumb and little finger.
Jacques Duphly (1765) favors a natural curve of the hand and promotes
equal use of each finger.
The perfection of the fingers consists in general of a movement that is soft,
light, and regular. The movement of the fingers stems from their root; that is
to say, at the joint which is attached to the hand. The fingers must be curved
naturally, and each one must have its own independent movement.135
Rameau draws our attention to the position of the outer fingers as they rest
toward the fronts of the keys. Notice that he says the other fingers arch naturally to the necessary extent and not parallel to the thumb and little finger:
38

When the thumb and little finger rest on the edge of the keys, they make
it necessary for the other fingers to curve, so that these [fingers] may also
rest on the edge of the keys. However, as stated earlier, by dropping the
hand, the fingers curl naturally to the necessary extent and need not be extended nor curled any further, except in certain cases where it is absolutely
necessary.136
In Code de musique pratique, he writes:

Imagine your fingers to be set into your hand like elastic metal springs
fastened into a small iron bar, with joints that allow them perfect freedom
of action . . . the hand must remain inert and the wrist as flexible as possible, so that the fingers can benefit from their own movement, developing
facility and equality of strength. With this position, place the five fingers
upon five consecutive keys, where the thumb is further up on its own key,
the fingernail outside, almost up to its first joint, while the other fingers fall
down perpendicularly upon their respective keys, doing so with their own
weight, rounding themselves of their own accord without tension, the little
finger less round than the others since it is the smallest.137
Carl August Thielo, author of a Danish treatise entitled Tanker og Regler

fra Grunden af om Musiken (1746), describes the role of the thumb in proper
hand formation. From his recommended position of the thumb, it is clear that
he often uses the first finger as a pivot.
From the very beginning of playing the keyboard, the student must accustom oneself to keeping the fingers [more] curved than straight. . . . In regard
to the use of the thumb, make sure the thumb is held very near the index finger; indeed, the thumb, while playing, moves mostly under the index finger.
Get used to using the thumb, and not (as some of the old keyboard masters
taught) to play with only the other four fingers.138
Marpurg writes as though he has seen plenty of poor hand positions. His
thoughts on proper curvature keep the hand in one general position, with
fingers remaining relaxed and curved:
One should not make any forceful movements and frightful leaps with
the hands, nor bring the fingers out of their curved position, sometimes
stretching them out or contracting them; nor force any fingers down
from the keyboard next to the palms of the hand, leaving another lying
stretched out on a key like a pointer; nor sometimes slide carelessly over
the keys, only to thrash them at other times rather than depressing them
[properly].139
Preparing to Play
39
Figure 1.3. Aerial view of hands being placed upon the keys. The fingers do not line
up completely parallel to one another but instead have a natural, subtle arch to them.
The palms form a gentle curvature. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
Johann Christian Bach and Francesco-Pasquale Ricci instruct the player

to avoid placing two thumbs on one key at the same time. They also suggest a
slight arch of the hand, independence of finger motion, and keeping the hand
and fingers close to the keys:
The two hands [should be placed] on the keyboard in a manner that does
not hinder either [hand]; this obliges one to exclude one thumb; the other
fingers are spaced at the distance of the key widths and slightly curved over
them, each finger having its own independent movement. . . . One must raise
the whole hand as little as possible.140
As with any of this information, we should not interpret these descriptions

literally. Likewise, it is imperative to remember that every hand is shaped
differently and that the natural hand position when at rest upon the keys is
subject to change, with the fingers being more curved or extended than at
other times. A natural curvature of my own hand is shown in figure 1.3.
2
Touching the Instrument
Warm-up Exercises
As in most disciplines of the performing arts, physical and mental preparedness is beneficial to the process of learning pieces and perfecting ones craft.
For harpsichordists, this preparation includes exercising the hands both away
from and at the keyboard. We recall Couperins suggestion to pull the fingers
and stretch the hands before touching the keys.1 Players can do this alone or
have someone else do it for them. In addition to general stretches done while
standing, sitting, or lying on the floor, the shoulders may be lifted up and
down, first tightening the muscles and then relaxing them upon the release
downward. To loosen the neck, which is a major source of locked tension for
many people, the head may be moved forward and back, from side to side, and
in slow circular motions. This loosens the muscles and helps release tension
from the body.
After stretching, Couperin tells us to progress to short exercises at the
keyboard:
I always have my students play brief finger exercises, either running or arpeggiated passages, beginning with the simplest ones and in the easiest keys;
and gradually leading them to the fastest and most transposed ones. You
cannot have too many of these little exercises.2
Not only do unhurried exercises warm up and limber the fingers, but
they also quietly draw in the senses, enabling more mental focus and aural
awareness from the player, differentiated from the often busy and noisy sphere
40
41
Example 2.1. Miller, Institutes, evolutions, chap. 10.
that lies beyond the sacred space of the practice room. Warm-up exercises
also serve to sensitize the keyboardist to the requisite touch at a particular
instrument, with which one may or may not be familiar.
In Lart de toucher le clavecin, Couperin devotes six pages to Progressions or short exercises to form the hands.3 He employs the term evolutions
to signify that these exercises are intended to improve ones technique over
time through a gradual increase of skill. He also provides Little preliminary
and essential exercises to arrive at playing well.4 He gives these exercises in
C major only, but mentions that they should be practiced in every key.5
Edward Miller also uses the word evolutions in his 1780 treatise Institutes
of Music.6 He provides seven examples over which is written: Of different
42
Example 2.2. Miller, Institutes, chap. 9.
Evolutions, and the manner of contracting the Fingers. They progress in

speed from eighth notes to triplets and sixteenths. He uses a fingering system
in which the thumb is assigned a + sign, the index finger is 1, the middle finger
is 2, and so on. He provides fingerings for all of them, as seen in example 2.1.
He also presents the simple exercises shown in example 2.2, which should be
practiced with both hands (together or separately) and in different keys.
Marpurg advises:
One should begin to prepare the fingers for greater undertakings, using
many types of small exercises. Once such exercises are under control, one
may advance further. It is not sufficient to exercise the fingers in certain
[passages from actual pieces].7
Like Couperin, Marpurg gives a series of exercises called Little progressions appropriate for forming the hand (Petites evolutions propres former la
main). At least six of his exercises are derived from Couperins examples.8 Several of Marpurgs musical examples quote from J. S. Bachs keyboard pieces.9
From Forkels biography, we learn that J. S. Bach gave his students exercises for at least half a year before supplying them with pieces to play. These
isolated exercises, which are unfortunately lost, taught his students how to
develop independence and dexterity of the fingers. Forkel reflects on Bachs
teaching method:
43
First of all let me explain how he taught keyboard. To begin, his students
were encouraged to acquire the special touch of which I have already
spoken. To do this, for months he made them practice nothing but simple
finger exercises in both hands, with emphasis on the need for clear and
precise playing. He gave them these exercises for six to twelve months,
unless he felt that his students were losing interest, in which case he would
compose short pieces, which served to elucidate specific technical concepts.
These include the Six Little Preludes for Beginners and the Fifteen TwoPart Inventions, both of which Bach wrote during a lesson for a particular
student, later improving them into beautiful and expressive compositions.
Besides this finger practice, in exercises as well as in actual pieces composed
for the purpose, Bach taught his students how to play various ornaments in
both hands.10
Trk emphasizes the practicing of ornaments as a good way to warm up

for practice. In particular, he discusses trills:
The trill must be practiced diligently in the very first lessons. In the very
beg inning it must be executed slowly and only gradually more rapidly, but
in such a manner that the pupil will play both keys with equal strength and
rapidity, without lifting the fingers too high, for with beginners the upper
note of the trill is generally weaker and faster than the low one. Those who
do not practice the trill at all in the beginning and only rarely afterwards
will scarcely be able to master it well subsequently; it will always remain a
bleating sound. Many an otherwise fine keyboard player can provide audible
proof of this.11
Trk does not specify when, exactly, to introduce trills, but it is sound advice
to practice them early, at least as one of the core principles to be taught within
the first year, but this depends also on the skill and readiness of the player.
Certainly, when introducing ornaments, the trill should be among the first
embellishments that a student learns.
Trk also advises keyboardists to practice slowly at first:
Granted the necessity and beauty of velocity in playing the keyboard, it can
nevertheless be harmful to the beginner when required of him too soon. For
generally clarity suffers, certain tones will imperceptibly be skipped, and
correct fingering will be neglected, among other abuses.12
Saint-Lambert shows similar interest in the value of including trills in

ones exercises. He shares this perspective on practicing them with all the
fingers:
44

Masters of the harpsichord have established the practice of only playing
tremblements [trills] with the fingers indicated in this chapter, but when they
made this rule they assuredly did not give it enough thought. They should
have considered that fingers can never be too agile and that nothing makes
them more supple than the tremblement. Thus they should have established
the practice of making tremblements with all the fingers of each hand, even
with the little finger and the thumb. . . . For if one examines all the capable
masters in Paris, one will discover that those who distinguish themselves
the most by beauty of touch and sureness of execution are those who make
use of all their fingers equally well, by having accustomed themselves early to
exercising them all equally.13
Couperin also finds the practicing of trills a good exercise:

It will be very useful to have young people practice trills with all the fingers,
but, as that depends partly on the natural condition [of the hand], and as
people have different amounts of flexibility and strength in certain fingers,
this choice must be left to their teachers.14
Rameaus section entitled De la mechanique des doigts sur le clavessin,

which is also known as the preface to his Pices de clavecin (1724), also aims
to establish finger independence and equality of motion. It is worth quoting
several of his rules from his section Concerning the Technique of the Fingers
on the Harpsichord:
(1) Perfection of touch on the harpsichord consists mainly in well-managed
movement of the fingers.
(2) This movement can be acquired by a simple technique, but one has to
know how to use it.
(3) This technique is nothing other than the frequent practice of a regular
movement: the skills which it requires are natural to everyonemuch
the same as in walking, or, if you prefer, in running.
(4) The faculty of walking or running comes from the agility of the knee;
playing the harpsichord depends on the suppleness of the fingers at their
roots.
(5) The continual exercise in walking gives everyone nearly the same free
movement of the knee. In contrast, our lack of practice of the finger
movements necessary to play the harpsichord does not allow the fingers
liberty to develop; moreover, our particular [bad] habits cause the fingers
to develop movements so contrary to those needed to play harpsichord
that this liberty is constantly inhibited. . . .
45
(8) The result, therefore, of all these observations is that frequent and
well-managed practice is, to me, essential for perfect technique on the
harpsichord, and it is from [this principle] that I have created a particular
method of renewing in the fingers the movement granted to them by
Nature, and of augmenting its liberty. . . .
(19) Each finger must have its own movement, independent of the others, so
that, even when the hand must move to another part of the keyboard, it
is still essential for the finger then used to drop onto the key by its own
movement. . . .
(24) Remember to make every finger operate by its own movement, and make
sure that the finger that releases a key always remains so close that it appears to be touching it. . . .
(26) Observe equality of movement among all the fingers and, above all, never
rush these movements, for lightness and speed are acquired only through
this evenness of movement; and it is often the case that by rushing, we
lose that which we are seeking.
(27) One must try to attain the required movement in the fingers, and to give
to each one its own particular movement before putting their strength to
the test; I suggest that in the beginning, [the fingers] only be placed on the
keyboard to become used to the spacing between the keys. However, as
at the start one has trouble moving every finger independently, the added
burden of trying to press the keys might destroy the perfection of their
movement.15
Rameau encourages the reader to practice his finger exercises and other
musical examples repeatedly and with equality of finger motion.16 He also
says that the exercises should be practiced with hands separately at first
and then with hands together when the skill has been mastered in each
hand.17
C. P. E. Bach recommends that children be trained to stretch their hands
and extend their fingers:
It is self-evident that the relaxation of the tendons and the curving of the
fingers cannot be maintained in leaps and wide stretches. . . . One should
habituate the hands (as yet not fully grown) of children particularly, so that
instead of springing up and down with the entire hand . . . they stretch the
hands as much as possible when necessary.18
I doubt Bach is worried here about overstretching childrens hands; it is more

likely that he intends to keep children from letting their hands leap around
the keyboard closed and their fingers curved too far inward or clumped to-
46
gether (auf einem Klumpen zusammen gezogen). His advocacy of stretching

childrens hands may also aim to improve their strength and prepare them for
more difficult pieces in which they have to stretch the hand for bigger chords,
such as multi-voiced fugues, or wider leaps. Bach notes: All stretches, the
omission of certain fingers, the substitution of one finger for another on a
note, even the indispensable crossing of the fingers and turning of the thumb
demand this elastic ability.19 Elasticity involves a temporary tension in which
the muscles are flexed, then a return to a relaxed state.20
Nassarre attributes success at the keyboard to devoted practice:
The main way to achieve a fine technique is to practice often. . . . If practice
is infrequent, the fingers will accomplish little, and if there is much practice,
then the success will be great. However, there are some students who, with
less effort than others, attain a better technique. This is due to their natural,
flexible tendons, their youth, or their strong constitutions. Those who need
more practice are all those who have less flexibility in the tendons, are of a
weak constitution, or have begun lessons later in life. This natural defect
has no other way of being overcome than by deeply immersing oneself in
study.21
We see from the many quotations that how one prepares to play is just as
important as the compositions that one practices. In addition to good practice
pieces, warm-up exercises (preexistent or self-composed) can be an enjoyable
part of the creative process for both teacher and student. Since these exercises
are usually easy to memorize, I advise experimenting from time to time with
a lowered music stand, so that the sounds coming forth from the harpsichord
can be heard better. The music, when upright, actually blocks the sound from
reaching the player. By lowering the music desk (or removing it altogether),
both the fingers and the ears can benefit from warm-up exercises and tune in
to the qualities of touch and sounds coming from the instrument. This is also
helpful when playing pieces, not just exercises. Lowering or removing the music stand also requires the player to memorize music, or at least in part, since
it is not easy to read the music when it is lying flat. Traditionally, harpsichord
playing relies less on memorization in performance, but it is nonetheless a
useful skill, whether or not one uses the score in an actual concert. I also encourage the occasional practice of playing with the eyes closed or in the dark,
as taught by C. P. E. Bach: In order to become oriented at the keyboard . . .
it is a good practice to play memorized pieces in the dark.22 This may be done
with warm-up exercises as well as with actual pieces.
47
Touching the Keys

Terminology used in discussing harpsichord playing may differ from that for
other keyboard instruments, especially the piano. In my experience, pianists
often say that they play or strike the keys, whereas harpsichordists touch
them. The difference in terminology may seem small but is nonetheless significant. Perhaps harpsichordists say they touch the keys because it has a
more intimate, sensory connotation than hit or strike. Harpsichordists
learn to develop their touch so that they increase the intimate connection
with the plectra and strings. The following sections deal with various historical perspectives pertaining to the manner in which the fingers touch the keys
when playing harpsichord.
Baroque treatises abound with descriptions of fingers remaining in contact with the harpsichord keys. Although they reveal, at times, differences of
opinion about the speed of attack in how quickly or how slowly the plectrum
should pluck the string (if they say anything at all about that specifically), the
sources do share the perspective of touching the keys from as close a position
as possible (if not directly depressing them at all times). Couperin credits this
close connection as being directly related to la douceur du toucher:
The delicacy [sweetness or refinement] of touch depends once again on
holding the fingers as close as possible to the keys. It makes sense to believe
(experience aside) that a hand that falls from higher up gives a dryer stroke
than if it touches from nearby; and that the quill produces a harsher sound
from the string.23
Writing over a century earlier, Diruta, who is writing primarily about the
organ, has sound advice for harpsichordists, who need close contact between
finger and key:
Finally, the fingers must press rather than strike the key, lifting [the finger]
only as much as the key rises. Even if these instructions seem of little or no
significance, one should have the highest regard for the help they bring: they
ensure that the harmony turns out pleasant and smooth and that the organist is not hampered in his playing.24
Diruta also warns the keyboardist not to raise the fingers too high when
playing faster, more ornate figures:
On playing diminutions . . . remember how to carry the hand in line with
the arm, somewhat cupped, with the fingers curved or together, so that none
48

is higher than the other, nor stiff, nor lying over another, or drawing back, or
striking the keys [at the wrong time]. Let the arm guide the hand, the hand
and arm staying in line with the key being played, the fingers playing cleanly,
not pressing a key before the previous one has lifted up. Be careful not to
raise the fingers too much, and above all, carry the hand alert and light.25
Over and over again, I have observed, both in my own playing and in
that of students and harpsichordists in general, that when the key is struck
from above and not from close by, the tone is drastically diminished.26 When
a key is played too quickly from on high, sometimes the pitch is barely audible. This often occurs when a finger has darted upon the note and left it too
quickly, as if it were too hot to touch. This tends to happen in fast, technically
advanced pieces that require rapid hand crossing or large leaps, but it can
occur elsewhere as well. When passages like these are played from the point
at which the finger feels the plectrum ready to pluck the string, the tone is
vastly improved.
Nassarre discusses aspects of depressing the keys that pertain to the
touch required for beautiful playing at the harpsichord:
There are some players who press the keys so little they are hardly audible,
others in whose diminutions we hear rests from note to note that are more
than the [value of the] notes sounding themselves, others who play with
such force that they sometimes destroy the keyboards, and others, who at
the moment of laying down the finger [on the key] rock the key violently
from one side to the other, which is often the cause of keys that stick. . . .
Regarding the pressing of the keys, the pedagogy that masters should follow
with beginners should be that at the moment of depressing [the key], it is
only the finger which moves; for some not only move the hand but also the
arm. Others, [in an effort] to remove the fingers from the keys, lift the hand,
and this movement is superfluous, for it is enough to move the fingers. For
this reason Nature gave the ability to move them without requiring them to
move the hand.27
He adds:
It is also important that the pressing of the keys, in whatever music is played,
be natural and not forced. Some lift the hands from the keyboard too much.
Others apply such force to the fingers that you hear the striking of the keys
more than the sound of the notes, and others press with such softness that
they do not sufficiently press the keys in order to form the sounds properly.
Those who lift the hands play in a most improper manner, for as they lift the
hands more and more from the keyboard, greater will be the interval of time
49
from sound to sound, which robs the notes of their correct value of time, and
in this way [the player] will not give the proper character to the music. Those
who make a habit of adding force to the fingers when playing upon the keys
make it impossible to play diminutions quickly, because this causes their
hands to tire quickly. Though they justify this as a means of performing
well on those organs that have heavy keyboard [action], it is not a convincing
reason; because the force that they apply is more excessive than that which
is necessary to lower the keys, no matter how heavy the action.28 . . . Neither
the hands nor the fingers should ever be lifted [high above] the keysonly
enough to stop the keys from sounding in such a manner that one can barely
perceive the interval of time from sound to sound.29 This should not be done
so powerfully that the fingers are forceful. Rather, one should employ the
least amount of effort needed to lower a key. . . . There are some students
who naturally have a heavier hand or have more strength in it. These [individuals] can, by applying less force [or weight], apply the right amount of
energy needed to play the keys. Others, in contrast, being weak, need to use
their strength more efficiently by applying the right amount of pressure, and
they may practice this until it becomes habitual. Thus will individuals learn
to control more efficiently [and equally] the amount of pressure applied to
the keys, regardless of finger strength.30
The purpose of maintaining contact with the keys is to be in control of

the point at which the plectra pluck the strings. If the fingers are held high
above the keys, they are nowhere near this plucking point. That said, not
only do the fingers need to be touching the keys, but they should also depress
the keys ever so slightly, enough to feel the resistance of the quill and string
against the finger. It is important to touch the key fast enough to get the quill
to pluck the string. When playing more than one set of strings, this is especially important, so that the strings of the same sounding pitch (or an octave
higher, if the four-foot is engaged) sound simultaneously. Finding the exact
point on which to remain in contact with the keys is a subtlety that develops
over time and depends a lot upon the tempo. Once the quill has plucked the
string, the finger, no matter how long it needs to remain on the key, must relax
immediately and avoid pushing the key to the bottom of the key bed, which
among other disadvantages may result in a percussive, wooden sound. Resting
on the string with too much weight or pressure may also cause the quill to
pluck the string and elicit a ghost sound.
In Forkels biography, we read that J. S. Bachs fingers were in immediate contact with the keys.31 Saint-Lambert says that in scale passages the
fingers should neither be raised too high nor allowed to rest too heavily on
50
the keys.32 Rameau says, Remember to move each finger by its own individual movement, and see that the finger that releases a key always stays so
close that it seems to touch it.33 Recalling his perspective on the position of
the forearms and hands of a beginning student, as mentioned in chapter 1,
the hands should be glued to the keyboard, allowing the players touch the
utmost connection to the keys.34 As for the manner in which players should
touch the keys:
The fingers must fall onto the keys and not hit them; moreover, they must
flow [glide], so to speak, from one to the other when playing successive
notes, which should give you some idea of how gently one has to go about it
from the beginning.35
As every harpsichord is different, keyboardists should take care to familiarize themselves with every harpsichord they play. The plectra on any given
instrument may not be voiced regularly nor voiced like another instrument
of the same style. The key dip will be different as well. When touching the
keys, it is important to gauge the resistance of the quills against the string and
how strongly or weakly they pluck. Harpsichords need to be regulated quite
frequently; it is prudent to learn some basic harpsichord maintenance skills
or to ask a professional to work on ones instrument so that the action and
voicing are to ones taste.
Keeping the fingers in contact with the keys may be challenging at first,
especially when coming from a modern piano background. To alleviate this
problem, teachers may opt to emulate the Baroque practice of placing a stick
(such as a small ruler or a pen) on the hand to keep the fingers from flying
upwards and to maintain a calm hand position. The teacher may also hold
down students fingers gently if they fly upward. This helps to retrain the fingers and relax the muscles. The only drawback to this practice is that it does
not allow for much flexibility in wrist motion, which is necessary for supple
playing and relaxation.
One advocate for this practice is Marpurg, who suggests a piece of metal
be put on the fingers:
Today one does not strike the keyboard instrument, one plays it . . . ; however, no matter how wary one is of heavy blows on the keys, one also must
not slide down indolently over them so that the strings do not produce the
proper sound. In the beginning, a little piece of lead may be placed upon the
hands of pupils in order to accustom them to this. If the lead remains there,
it is proof that the movement is uniform.36
51
Le Gallois (ca. 1680) describes the French harpsichord master Chambon

nires:
Everyone knows that this illustrious man excelled above others as much
because of the pieces he composed as because of his having been the originator of that beautiful style of playing in which he revealed a brilliance and
a legato37 so well controlled and managed from one note to the next that it
would have been impossible to do better. It is well known that besides skill
and precision, he had a delicate skill [lit. delicatesse vs. douceur] of the hand
that others lacked: so that if he played a chord, and another imitated him,
one would perceive a great difference; and the reason for it is, as I have said,
that he had dexterity and a way of applying his fingers to the keys which was
unknown to others.38
Further in his Lettre he says:

It is made evident from all that we have said that although there are among
the various masters different manners of playing, it is nevertheless true to
say that some of these manners are more excellent than others; and likewise
there is one that rises above all others, because it is the most natural, the
most delicate, the most precise, and as a consequence the most agreeable;
and such a one is that of Chambonnires.39
Le Gallois remarks that when less successful harpsichordists play the notes,
they either pass over them too quickly, or they do not press the keys [hard]
enough to make the notes heard, or they hit the keys instead of [letting
them] flow [from one note to the next].40 He observes others with faults of
the opposite kind:
But if the brilliant style of playing has its faults, the flowing style also has
its own, which are easy to observe in those in whom affectation greatly
impedes the flow of their playing. For they make such great contortions of
the hands and fingers, they raise them one over another with such excess,
and stiffen them in an extraordinary manner, that the result is distasteful
and pitiful.41
He idolizes both Chambonnires and Louis Couperin,42 the two founts

from which others styles are derived. He gives due praise to Louiss brother
Charles and of course his nephew Franois, granting them status among the
finest living harpsichordists.
As mentioned in my introduction, Le Gallois asserts that Chambonnires and Louis Couperin moved listeners in different waysOne touched
52
the heart, the other touched the ear.43 Le Gallois describes Chambonnires
playing as more natural, more delicate, more tidy, and consequently more
delightful.44 He was the source of the beautiful approach to touch, the
beautiful and agreeable manner that made him a perfect model.45 He had
knowledge and brilliance and a delicacy of the hand that others did not have
. . . a way of holding [the hand] and a way of pressing down the fingers on the
keys that was unknown to the others.46 In short, Le Gallois describes not
just a manner or a way, but a highly personalized and refined art, a language
expressed through la douceur du toucher.
Gravity
It is important not to confuse the concept of keeping the fingers in contact
with the keys with that of finger weight or gravity. Gravity plays a major role
in sound production on the piano, in that more weight or force on the keys
produces louder dynamics. Harpsichord touch resists hand or arm weight
falling into the keys. Instead, the arm holds up the hand, which acts as a support to the fingers. This does not mean that the arm is held in a stiff position;
instead, when the finger falls, the hand, wrist, and arm follow the movement
instigated by the fingers. The fingers, in turn, remain poised on the keys, ready
to drop further into them. Only in this sense does gravity play a role by way
of the fingers falling downward. But as the finger falls into the key, the quill
rises to pluck the stringthe imagery involved is technically an upward one.
This manner of touching the harpsichord is documented in several treatises
of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Rameau informs us:
Never let the touch of your fingers be weighed down by your hand. Conversely, let it be your hand, which, by supporting your fingers, makes their
touch lighter; this is of utmost importance.47
Mersenne, writing nearly a century earlier, compares the sound of a harpsichord when played delicately with that of a plucked instrument:
Now it must be further observed that the lightness of the hand is very
different from its speed, for many have a very fast hand that is nevertheless
quite heavy, as the hardness and roughness of their playing will testify. Now
those who have this lightness of hand may be called absolute masters of their
hands and fingers, which they let weigh as little on the keys as they wish so
as to soften the tone of the spinet, as is common with that of the lute.48
53
John Parsons addresses both approach and release of the keys by letting
the fingers fall with their own weight:
The hand should be poised above the keys, so that the thumb may easily pass
under the fingers to change the position. . . . No weight of the hand or arm
should bear on the keys and every finger should be put down, with an elastic
spring, and be recovered from them in the same manner. The thumb should
be put down with a spring from the joint of it only.49
Forkel describes Bachs technique as allowing for the fingers never to fall
or (as so often happens) be thrown upon the notes, but placed upon [the notes]
in full control of the force they may be called on to exert.50
Friedrich Konrad Griepenkerl, writing well into the nineteenth century,
is one of the few to mention arm weight at the keyboard from a positive standpoint if we apply it to harpsichord technique:
The mechanism of the hand is based upon its ability to grasp. In grasping, all
of the fingers bend themselves together with the thumb into the palm of the
hand, and by this motion reveal all of their innate force and security. . . .
Every operation that the hand can accomplish by this motion succeeds in
doing so with ease, freedom, and security, since the operation corresponds to
the hands natural inclination.
. . . The inequality of the fingers as regards strength and flexibility, however,
makes yet another artistic resource necessary . . . in overcoming the natural
obstacle inherent in the weakness of the fourth and fifth fingers. J. S. Bach
found this resource in the use of the weight of the hand and arm, which
anyone may maintain with ease and at will, either at the same degree or at a
greater or lesser degree of effort. No finger is too weak to serve as the point
of support for this weight; the fourth and fifth fingers may bear it to the
same degree as the second and third and may transmit it to the keys with
equal amount of effort, insofar as the elasticity inherent in each finger is
brought into use. The most intimate connection of this elasticity with the
weight of the hand in the pressing of the keys is therefore the most vital
component in the entire technique of keyboard performance according to
Bachs method.51
This type of gravity, as it were, may be interpreted as a shifting of the

hands balance point to assist the fingers, when necessary. In context, it might
serve well when the weaker fingers momentarily pause on a particular note.
Rather than stretching or flexing the fingers and keeping the hand in one
rigidly fixed position, the whole hand shifts its weight over the note being
54
Figure 2.1. Inner view of right hand shifting its weight onto the little finger.
Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
Figure 2.2. Outer view of right hand shifting its weight onto the little finger.
Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
55
played by the weaker fingers. This will inevitably cause a brief contraction
or slight turning of the hand. The hand follows the fingers, much like a ballerinas hand gestures gracefully change as she moves in different directions.
Figures 2.1 and 2.2 show how my right hand looks when shifting its weight
onto the finger that is playing the note. Notice in these photos how the hand
is poised over one note. The hand is not falling heavily onto the key, but is
suspended over it.
Teachers may assist students who have too low or heavy a hand or
arm at the keyboard by gently pressing upwards from under their wrist(s)
with one finger or the length of a pencil. This will help them find the balance point of the finger without dropping the weight of their hand, wrist,
or arm.
Stroking the Keys

There are various descriptions in early writings of the motions of the fingers
as they play the keys. A few depict a perpendicular motion. Others explain a
touch that strokes the keys in a movement that glides, peels, or draws backward from the fingertip to the palm. This is sometimes referred to as the
scratch technique in modern circles; however, this term is only half accurate,
since scratching is usually done with the very tips of the fingers, if not the
fingernails. The technique as it applies to the harpsichord is performed with
the fleshy, softer part of the fingertips, allowing for the very top part of the
fingertips to stroke the keys only at the final part of the motion and subsequently toward the fronts (or edges) of the keys.
Proof of this stroking (or gliding) method is found on several historical instruments, both harpsichords and early pianos, on which the keys
are worn down at their edges, as opposed to the middle only, where perpendicular motion would situate the fingers (see figures 2.32.5). Notice in
figure 2.5 how the motion of the fingers has created a sloped indentation on
the keys.
Stroking and perpendicular motion feel extremely different from one
another, but they are not mutually exclusive. They need to be combined according to the character and speed of the music, as well as the acoustics of
the instrument. Furthermore, the two manners may coincide with the different steps involved in playing a notethe vertical part necessary for the
dropping of the finger into the key, and the horizontal motion for the release
56
Figure 2.3. Late eighteenth- or early nineteenth-century English spinet by Astor

& Company, with worn key edges. Arequipa, Peru. Convent of Santa Catalina.
Photo by Stanley Ritchie.
(as opposed to a directly vertical release of the key). This manner of stroking
the keys produces sparkling and brilliant effects in fast passages, as well as
lush, sonorous shades of overlapping tone and color in slower sections. In
such slow, legato passages, this technique may feel like a loving caress upon
the instrument.
As early as 1565, Sancta Maria mentions the stroking of the keys through
a gliding motion when he discusses the upper mordent as a type of quiebro,
a Spanish ornament containing two tonesthe main note, the one above it,
and the return to the main note:
The finger that plays the first note should not be raised from the key after
having depressed it, but it should remain on it, and the finger that plays the
second note should be removed from the key by sliding across it, like someone scratching, and the finger that plays the first note should press a little in
the key pushing it well down.52
Figure 2.4. Side view of key edges. Arequipa, Peru. Convent of Santa Catalina.
Photo by Lourdes and Andrea Arias Grupp.
Figure 2.5. Side view of keys. Arequipa, Peru. Convent of Santa Catalina.
Photo by Lourdes and Andrea Arias Grupp.
57
58
Example 2.3. C. P. E. Bach, Versuch, Schnellen, fig. 162.
Although the phrase well down reminds us that he is writing more for
clavichord, the sliding motion is nonetheless applicable on the harpsichord.
He adds:
The finger that plays the highest note of the redoble and the quiebro should
always play nearer the end of the key than the adjacent finger with which the
ornament ends. Furthermore, from the beginning of repeated redobles and
quiebros, that finger should gradually be drawn further and further out until
it is completely withdrawn from the key at the end of the ornament, which
is why the finger which ends the ornament ends up at the edge of the key although it began further in, which is necessary if the redobles and the quiebros
are to end crisply and cleanly.53
When Sancta Marias technique is executed on harpsichord, it allows

the quill to return below the string to repluck it for the final note. In other
words, the finger that plays the second note uses the sliding or scratching
method for a quick release, unlike the main notes upon which the ornament
is built.
C. P. E. Bachs Versuch (nearly two hundred years after Sancta Marias
treatise) contains roughly twenty references to the technique of playing these
ornaments (Schnellen in German), onto many of which he applies the gliding
technique in highly contrasted contexts (see example 2.3).
He combines techniques that use both stiff finger strokes and geschnellte
(darted or snapped) notes. Like Sancta Marias explanations, most are appropriate for the harpsichord, others more for the clavichord. He describes the
ornament as a quick retraction, which occurs when each finger slides off the
key as rapidly as possible so that every tone may be distinctly heard. He adds,
After the stroke, the upper joint of the finger is sharply doubled and drawn
off and away from the key as quickly as possible. For fast, repeated notes, he
suggests alternating two fingers, referring to the necessary quick retraction
that occurs when a finger leaves a key as rapidly as possible, so that every new
tone may be clearly heard.54
59
Forkel describes this very technique as portrayed by J. S. Bach. He praises

this technique to the utmost because it creates a brilliant, rolling, and round
sound:
The finger must not be raised perpendicularly from the key, but must
glide off the forepart of the key, by gradually drawing back the tip of the
finger towards the palm of the hand. . . . In the transition from one key to
another, this gliding off causes the quantity of force or pressure with which
the first tone has been kept up to be transferred with the greatest rapidity to the next finger, so that the two tones are neither disjoined from each
other nor blended together . . . the drawing back of the tips of the fingers
and the rapid communication, thereby effected, of the force of one finger
to that following it produces the highest degree of clearness in the attack
of the single tones, so that every passage performed in this manner sounds
brilliant, rolling, and round, as if each tone were a pearl. . . . by the gliding of
the tip of the finger upon the key with an equable pressure, sufficient time is
given to the string to vibrate; the tone, therefore, is not only improved, but
also prolonged, and we are thus enabled to play in a singing style and with
proper connection.55
In other words, when sufficient time is given to the string to vibrate,

the damper falls at the last minute, so the tone is not cut off abruptly. Forkel
does not say at which point the finger drawing back would actually be aligned
with the inactive fingers. But he does claim that the sliding fingertip and the
consequently rapid transmission of regulated force from one finger to another
tend to bring out each note clearly and to make every passage sound uniformly
brilliant and distinct to the hearer without exertion.56
Griepenkerl, in a discussion about Bachs keyboard technique, teaches:
Let one finger be placed upon a key and serve as the point of support for a
finely adjusted weight of the arm, not stiffly or rigidly, but with the express
intent of pulling [the finger] backward so that it instantly might be drawn in
toward the hand. . . . This position is impossible unless the wrist firmly supports the hand and maintains itself at the same height as the knuckles on the
upper side of the hand . . . whoever now is able to accomplish what I have just
been describing with all the fingers of both hands in every situation, with the
fingers either in normal or extended positions, and in all possible varieties
of loudness and softness, speed or slowness, staccato and slurringall these
with finesse and security and without additional bodily exertionwhoever
can do this possesses the method of performance taught by J. S. Bach, as
Forkel possessed it, and as many have learned from him.57
60
Johann Joachim Quantz describes a stroking technique in his Versuch einer

Anweisung die Flte traversiere zu spielen (1752). His horizontal finger motion
aims to improve tone quality and to increase the speed of articulation. Running passages sound brilliant and clear but still maintain their roundness.
Whether you strike one finger more forcefully than another is very important. This may happen if you have accustomed yourself to curve some fingers
inwards while extending others straight forward, a habit that not only
causes inequality in the force of your playing, but is also obstructive to the
round, distinct, and agreeable execution of quick passagework. As a result,
many persons sound as if they were literally stumbling over the notes if they
have to produce a run of several step-wise notes. If you accustom yourself
at the very beginning to curving all the fingers inwards, each one as far as
the others, you are less likely to make this mistake. In the performance of
these running passages, however, you must not raise the fingers immediately
after striking the key, but rather draw the tips of the fingers back towards
yourself to the foremost part of the key, until they glide away from it. Running passages are produced most distinctly in this manner. I appeal here to
the example of the greatest of all players on the keyboard, who practiced and
taught this way.58
The only caveat in applying Quantzs suggestion is that the harpsichordist needs to make sure not to curve the fingers too much at the beginning.
If the arch is too excessive, the fingers will have nowhere to go and thus will
not be able to use his recommended release toward the palm. When done
correctly (i.e., in moderation), this technique produces sparkling, distinct
running passages.
Three sources from the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries give
testimony to the release toward the palm for clear, articulate passagework.
These later sources represent a continuation and transfer of this particular
harpsichord technique to the fortepiano. Lhleins Clavierschule suggests that
in five-finger exercises, especially in rapid sections, the fingers should never
be lifted upwards but should be drawn towards the inner part of the hand
. . . with a gentle sliding action along the keys.59 For fast, clearly articulated
passages, Johann Nepomuk Hummel (1820) explains that the fingers should
be hurried away from the keys very lightly and in an inward direction.60
A. E. Mller and Carl Czerny both recommend a scratching or tearing
motion for fast scale passages.61
Ruth Nurmi, in A Plain & Easy Introduction to Harpsichord (1974 and
1986), describes at least two basic types of touch as they pertain to the release
61
Figure 2.6. Index finger stroking the keys. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
of the key.62 She calls one an instant release and the other a gradual release.
According to Nurmi, the instant release (a vertical or near vertical down-andup stroke) is the only kind of release possible in fast passages, whether legato
or articulated. She also states that the gradual release is not a part of the
legato touch, nor is it used in fast passages.
She also suggests that the gradual release may be done with three separate types of motions: (1) a lifting motion when making an instant release more
slowly, (2) a rolling motion, in which the wrists rotate as weight shifts from
finger to finger, and (3) an elliptical motion that is the same movement needed
for the gliding or scratching technique. These descriptions are highly useful
for harpsichordists, but I disagree with the limitation she places on their application. Although this elliptical, rounder technique is not the only method
for touching the harpsichord, it may benefit nearly all musical contexts and
tempos, especially if one is adept and facile enough. Furthermore, it does not
need to stand apart from other techniques. The fingers may peel back toward
the palm while the wrist gently rotates, as seen in figures 2.6 and 2.7.
62
Figure 2.7. Middle finger stroking the keys. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
Motion of the Hands and Wrists

Baroque treatises offer assorted ideas about the position of the hands and
wrists while they are in motion, from a flat, even hand to one that turns
slightly outward. In all cases, the treatises encourage the keyboardist to maintain a calm hand and move only those fingers and other muscles that are
absolutely necessary.
In the Fundamentbuch (written ca. 1520, published posthumously in 1551)
Hans Buchner favors a light, facile right hand without arm weight and possibly a quick sideways motion of the hand.63
Regarding the turning of the wrist, Sancta Maria says that in playing long
ascending and descending passages, players should turn the hands toward
the direction of the run, raise the third finger higher than the others, and play
with it further in on the keys, with the elbow moving away from the body.64
Two centuries later, Saint-Lambert, who does not mention anything about
the position of the wrist while playing, does discuss the need for a calm hand:
The principle to follow is to choose fingers which make the hand move the
least, and to that end it is necessary when practicing to look ahead for several
63
measures in a row in order to place the hand in the position necessary for
playing them all with grace and agility.65
Similarly, Forkel praises J. S. Bach for his ability to maintain a calm hand
position, regardless of the musics tempo or difficulty:
We gather that the action of Bachs fingers was so slight as to be barely perceptible. Only the top joint seemed to move. His hand preserved its rounded
shape even in the most intricate passages. His fingers rested closely upon the
keys. . . . An unemployed finger remained in a position of repose. . . . If he
wished to express deep emotion he did not strike the notes with great force,
as many do, but expressed his feeling in simple melodic and harmonic figures,
relying rather on the internal resources of his art than external dynamics.
Therein he was right. True emotion is not suggested by hammering the
clavier. All that results is that the notes cannot be heard distinctly, much less
be connected coherently.66
Burney describes George Frideric Handels harpsichord technique as

astonishingly subtle and efficient:
Indeed, his hand was then so fat, that the knuckles, which usually appear
convex, were like those of a child, dinted or dimpled in, so as to be rendered
concave; however, his touch was so smooth, and the tone of the instrument
so much cherished, that his fingers seemed to grow into the keys. They were
so curved and compact when he played that no motion, and scarcely the
fingers themselves, could be discovered.67
Rameau encourages finger independence by having a calm hand position

and a flexible wrist:
Perfection of playing the harpsichord consists chiefly in a well-controlled
movement of the fingers. . . . The wrist joint must always be supple. This
suppleness, which is then transmitted to the fingers, gives them all the flexibility and lightness that they need.68
It is important for teachers and players to approach the subject of good

hand position early on in lessons. By doing so, attention is given to keeping the
hand calmthat is to say, void of unnecessary movements that will detract
from the freedom and agility of the fingers. The hand and wrist, by being flexible, will follow the fingers and move only when necessary. It is important not
to confuse this with a tight hand in which only the fingers move, as though
they were typing away at a computer keyboard.
64
Dynamics
The production of different tones and shades on the harpsichord is a popular
topic among harpsichordists. People often ask, Can the harpsichord produce
dynamics? The answer is yes and no. Rather than viewing as a flaw the harpsichords inability to make the same gradations of volume that a piano does, one
may see this issue as an opportunity to explore the musical techniques particular to harpsichord playing. These techniques form a collection of intricate tools
that can create a rich palette of dynamic shading and dramatic nuance.
Broderip writes, Expression is produced by regulating the time, to the
style of the music, by giving attention to the graces and embellishments, by
the touch, and by a judicious management of the tone of the instrument in
its different gradations of soft to loud.69 Assumedly, he is talking about the
harpsichord here, since the title of his method includes both harpsichord and
the fortepiano.
Couperin finds no flaw in the harpsichords lack of overt degrees of dy
namics:
The harpsichord is a complete instrument by virtue of its range, and sufficient unto itself. However, as one can neither swell nor diminish its sounds,
I shall always be grateful to those who, by consummate skill supported by
good taste, are able to render this instrument capable of expression.70
Marpurg also gives due praise to the musicians who create dynamic expression: Skilled artists know how to beguile the ears at the harpsichord,
so that we believe we are hearing loud and soft tones, even though the quills
produce them with mostly equal force. 71 Marpurg also states:
One should not believe that it makes no difference what manner of treatment
the keys of a harpsichord are accorded, or that a distinction in tone may be
achieved perhaps only with the flute, because of variety in attack, or with the
violin, because of bowing variety. It is true that the intensity on a harpsichord is always the same, no matter whether the keys are struck gently or
with such force that one hears the simultaneous knocking of wood. Nevertheless, just as [players] hands vary, the manner of linking many successive
tones varies . . . there may only be one true way of operating the keys . . . as to
be pleasing to the ear.72
Although I acknowledge Marpurgs recognition of talented musicians

who masterfully bring forth expression from the harpsichord, I disagree with
65
his perspective on harpsichord dynamics being only an illusion, that we only

believe we are hearing dynamics, even though the quills produce [tones]
with mostly equal force. This topic deserves more detailed attention, preferably in scientific experiments connected with live performance.
Two of the key ways in which we can produce dynamics on the harpsichord are timing and articulation. I will address these topics in further
detail in chapter 3. Suffice it to say here that the resonating length of a note
is dependent on how fast the string is plucked and how far the damper falls
to cut off the sound. How we initiate the plucking of a string is affected by
how quickly or slowly we drop the finger into the key in addition to how aggressively we touch it. The speed of release is also critical, such as in places
that require over-legato. By carefully choosing which fingers to use, we may
employ varied articulations that range from staccatissimo to over-legato, to
bring out certain notes (and chords) over others, and to obscure notes so that
they sound softer.
Both Quantz and C. P. E. Bach discuss ways to deal with the harpsichords alleged imperfection (lack of dynamics) by altering the number of
parts rather than manipulating the fingers.73 But this method applies to the
accompanist playing figured bass. We also should remember that harpsichord
was not their primary instrumentQuantz was a flute player, and C. P. E.
Bach, although he played the harpsichord, favored the clavichord and the
newly emerging fortepiano. In a solo context, Bach recommends changes of
registration to produce dynamics:
If the lessons are played on a harpsichord with two manuals, only one
manual should be used to play detailed changes of forte and piano. It is only
when entire passages are differentiated by contrasting shades that a transfer
[between manuals] may be made.74
He then provides an example of a bass line with continuo figures in which dissonant chords are marked forte and consonant chords are marked piano.75
Gustav Leonhardt, one of the worlds greatest harpsichordists, poetically
states:
A good clavichord plays like butter and does everything that you require
from it with the greatest willingnessit is like a pilot flying only in good
weathernot quite that challenging or rewarding. This is in contrast to its
colleagues the harpsichord and organ. Here, one must employ all ones artistry and tricks to give the impression of dynamic variation. And this is the
66

crux of the matter! Perhaps I love the harpsichord for this very reason, that it
stimulates one into the regions of the impossible, to the creation of the illusion. I thrive on this illusion. And apparently, the greatest composers thrived
also on it; otherwise they would not have tolerated this undynamic instrument for centuries for the perfections of such exquisitely dynamic music.76
Again, my intention is not to prove scientifically whether or not the harpsichord is capable of producing dynamics or if it is all a trick of the ear and thus
some type of musical illusion. I offer the possibility that it is a combination
of both. Just as music is both a science and an art, playing beautifully and
meaningfully on the harpsichord requires both a high level of technical skill
and imaginative artistry. The perfect balance of these qualities renders the
harpsichord an expressive, dynamic instrument.
Playing Different Keyboard Instruments

In an interview by Aapo Hkkinen about the various keyboard touches of
different instruments, several harpsichordists were asked the following questions: What may a harpsichordist learn from playing the clavichord? and
Is there something to be gained by practicing harpsichord repertory on the
clavichord? Among those being interviewed was the renowned Leonhardt,
who responded:
The clavichord is great for little children, certainly better than the modern
piano and even better than the harpsichord. Otherwise, I think Philipp
Emanuel Bach made too much of the instrument. . . . I think the clavichord
was used before him mostly as a study instrument, by virtue of its relative
cheapness to buy and ease of maintenance. . . . People who play badly on the
harpsichord naturally play badly on the clavichord and vice versano sense
of sound, or dynamic imaginationI suppose imagination is what it is all
about. I feel that a harpsichord student should be confronted with the clavichord and then left to decide for himselfones own discoveries are always
the best. Personally, I do not see any advantage in practicing the harpsichord
repertoire on the clavichord, but it is not necessarily bad at all . . . and I am
often surprised how many pieces of the sixteenth to the eighteenth centuries
seem to work marvelously on all kinds of keyboard instruments.77
When asked which of the two instruments he found easier to play (harpsichord or clavichord), Leonhardt, who started very early on the harpsichord
and organ, replied: After having dived as much as I could into making the
67
harpsichord a dynamic instrument, my reaction was that the clavichord is

almost too easy by comparison. 78
Musicians living in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries faced challenges similar to the ones we face when switching from one keyboard instrument to another. The touch is different, and it takes skill to adapt to the
peculiarities of the different keyboards in order to master them with sensitivity and artistry. Like modern musicians who play multiple instruments, our
predecessors were sometimes better at one of them. Pierre-Louis Daquin
remarks about Duphly:
For some time he was organist at Rouen, but doubtless finding that he had
a greater gift for the harpsichord, he abandoned his first instrument. One
may suppose that he did well, since he passes in Paris for a very good harpsichordist. He has much lightness of touch and a certain softness, which,
sustained by ornaments, marvelously render the character of his pieces.79
Marpurg notes that Duphly, a student of the organist Franois Dagincourt, eventually played only the harpsichord, in order not to spoil his hand
with the organ.80 This might have had something to do with heavy actions
on some historical organs, which would have required more development of
hand muscles than needed for playing the harpsichord.81
As a teacher, Marpurg favors the harpsichord:
The harpsichord is preferable to the clavichord because its tone does not
die away so quickly, and thus one may hear more clearly whether or not the
pupil lifts his fingers promptly upon expiration [release] of the note values.
Consequently one may caution him against the sticky manner of playing. 82
C. P. E Bach and Trk both support the idea of playing multiple keyboard instruments. Bach feels that a good keyboardist should play pieces
interchangeably on a minimum of two instruments. He briefly expounds upon
the virtues of playing both the harpsichord and the clavichord:
Every keyboardist should own a good harpsichord and a good clavichord to
enable him to play all things interchangeably. A good clavichordist makes an
accomplished harpsichordist, but not the reverse. The clavichord is needed for
the study of good performance, and the harpsichord to develop proper finger
strength. Those who play the clavichord exclusively encounter many difficulties when they turn to the harpsichord. In an ensemble where a harpsichord
must be used rather than the soft-toned clavichord, they will play laboriously;
and great exertion never produces the proper keyboard effect. The clavichord-
68

ist grows too much accustomed to caressing the keys; consequently, his touch
being insufficient to operate the jacks, he fails to bring out details on the
harpsichord. In fact, finger strength may be lost eventually by playing on the
clavichord. On the other hand, those who concentrate on the harpsichord
grow accustomed to playing in only one color, and the varied touch, which the
competent clavichord brings to the harpsichord, remains hidden from them.83
Bachs statements seem to conflict with one another. He feels that a

person who exclusively plays clavichord would be challenged by the touch
required to play harpsichord, since it demands more finger strength. Also,
the clavichord player might be musically challenged at the harpsichord due
its lack of the same type of dynamic ability and its inability to allow for bebung
[vibrato on a clavichord] and manipulation of pitch while playing a given note.
In spite of this difficulty, or perhaps because of it, Bach promotes the idea of
the clavichordist practicing the harpsichord. In doing so, the clavichord player
learns to be expressive in new ways that do not rely solely on the production of
loud and soft dynamics. Bachs remark about the clavichordist growing too
much accustomed to caressing the keys is troublesome in that it suggests that
harpsichordists do not caress the keys.
Bachs words are testimony to his dislike of the harpsichord. I cannot
disagree more with his biased statements. Obviously, the harpsichord does
not play in just one color, and it is a pity that he, the son of one of the greatest
composers of harpsichord music, would have such opinions, much less share
them openly. In my opinion, both the harpsichord and clavichord are complete
instruments and are not lacking in anything. Nonetheless, we may infer from
his statements that these two keyboard instruments offer unique and diverse
ways of expressing music. Practicing on both highlights these differences.
Trk restricts his students to the clavichord at the beginning of their
studies and only later leads them to the harpsichord or piano. Unfortunately,
he shares C. P. E. Bachs sentiment about the disadvantage of playing only the
harpsichord: If one has only enough money for one instrument, he advises,
get a clavichord, for those who study harpsichord only do so at the expense
of a good manner of performance.84 His attitude reflects an apparently fashionable prejudice in the latter half of the eighteenth century, when the harpsichord gave way to the growing popularity of the fortepiano.
Lhlein also prefers the clavichord as a first instrument. He reasons that
students who learn first on fortepiano or harpsichord do not achieve the
same refinement of touch and expression as one who is first taught on the
clavichord:
69
It is probably an indisputable fact . . . that a clavichord is better than a harpsichord or a pianoforte for the beginner. Because anyone who learns from
one of the latter instruments will never be as refined in playing and in expression as a person who receives beginning instruction on the clavichord. 85
In the Anleitung fr Clavierspielen (1790), Johann Carl Friedrich Rellstab

regards the clavichord as an opportunity to learn good performance which
a keyboardist may then bring to bear on the harpsichord. He also mentions
the virtues of the harpsichord:
The harpsichord gives strength and paradoxically, neatness, elegance,
certainty, and precision. The reasons are as follows: one can play a piece
reasonably well on the clavichord, notwithstanding that here and there,
consecutive notes are touched together, without, however, being heard on
this instrument; but if one attempts the same piece on a harpsichord, many
notes that have never been imagined on the clavichord are heard; the even
and invariable tone of the harpsichord, and the deep fall of the keys are
responsible for this.86
G. F. Wolf encourages the study of clavichord to cultivate lyricism in ones

keyboard playing: In order to achieve delicacy and expression in playing, and
to learn to express the soft and singing style on the keyboard, one should at
least begin on a good clavichord.87
Although certain challenges arise when mastering different touches required for multiple keyboard instruments, my experience has been that there
is much to gain by exploring more than one keyboard instrument. If anything,
they complement each other, each one standing in relief against the other.
For example, by creating dynamics through finger pressure on the piano or
clavichord, we may transfer those ideas of dynamics to the harpsichord and
use them to bring forth those emotions. Likewise, the study of harpsichord
may positively affect ones playing of piano (modern or fortepiano), by expanding the concept of articulation and other means of expression that go
beyond overt gradations of simple loud and soft notes. Although there is
something to be said for devoting as much time, energy, and focus as possible
to the perfecting of ones technique on a particular instrument, the study of
other instruments (keyboard as well as non-keyboard) is a great asset to ones
musicianship and imagination as a performer or pedagogue.
3
Articulation
What Is Articulation?
Articulation is a cornerstone of many standard courses about Baroque performance practice. It is often taught in conjunction with the principles of
rhetoric,1 phrasing, rhythm, and overall expression, with special emphasis on
how these topics are based on historical sources. Until my first official harpsichord lesson in the early 1990s, I had never heard articulation mentioned
in relation to music, only applied to speech. In particular, I had understood
articulation simply as a way to speak clearly so that our words will be heard
and understood.
Rhetoric takes its name from the Greek word rhtr, an orator or teacher.
It is generally understood to be the art of communicating effectively and
convincingly by finding all available means of persuasion in a given situation. Music abounds with rhetorical elements. Instrumental music mirrors
spoken language, and is full of grammatically governed phrases, sentences,
pauses, and punctuation marks. Rameau says in his Dissertation, Music has
its phrases, just as discourse has its sentences, and each phrase or sentence
has its particular texture.2 Similarly, Trk writes:
Just as the words: He lost his life not only his fortune can have an entirely
different meaning according to the way they are punctuated (He lost his life,
not only his fortune; or, he lost his life not, only his fortune), in the same
way the execution of a musical thought can be made unclear or even wrong
through incorrect punctuation. Thus, if a keyboard player, other than at the
end of a musical period, does not join the tones together well and conse70
Articulation
71
quently divides a thought where it should not be divided, then he makes the
same mistakes that an orator would if the latter would pause in the middle
of a word and take a breath. . . . If a musician would play through a point
of rest in the music without breaking the continuityin one breath as it
werethis would be as faulty and contrary to purpose as if, while reading,
one would read beyond the point where a phrase or a sentence ends without
interruption.3
It is the duty of the performer to portray the music and to do so convincingly

before an audience. Thus the musicians task is not only to play (or sing) the
right pitches but also to use artistry and technique to convey what the composition is about. George Buelow has the following to say about the role of
the composerit applies equally to performers.
During the Baroque period the composer was obliged, like the orator, to
arouse in the listener idealized emotional statessadness, hate, love, joy,
anger, doubt, and so onand every aspect of musical composition reflected
this affective purpose.4
To arouse the listener effectively requires (among other things) good articulation. Not only is articulation the art of speaking or playing clearly so that
everything is heard and understood; it also involves an understanding and
interpretation of the hierarchy imbedded within the musical language. In the
historical context of the period, this musical architecture is governed by strong
and weak beats, rhythmic variation, dissonant and consonant harmonies,
tempo, intervallic steps or leaps, melodic direction, character, social context,
and so on. All musicians, instrumentalists and singers alike, make use of
articulation. In the field of Early Music, Renaissance and Baroque music in
particular, articulation is emphasized frequently, both in modern circles and
in early treatises, including method books for wind instruments, in which the
musician is taught to use a variety of tongued syllables.5
Articulation is at the core of expressive harpsichord playing; it governs
the production of legato, staccato, and everything in between. There is a direct
correlation between technique and articulation. The more that harpsichordists develop a douceur du toucher, the more they will be able to produce a wide
range of appropriate articulations. Articulation on the harpsichord involves
a light and unrestrained finger motion that affects the amount of time given
both to the notes and to the silences between the notes through carefully
directed beginnings and releases of note lengths.
72
Forkel asks, If all the players are equally competent, ought not their
performances to be uniform? He answers:
The fact that they are not so is due to difference of touch, a quality which to
the clavier stands as enunciation to human speech. Distinctness is essential
for the enunciation of vowels and consonants, and not less so for the articulation of a musical phrase.6
There is no one single articulation appropriate for any piece of music,

regardless of national origin or musical genre. All pieces consist of a myriad
of articulationsintricate manipulations of time through sound and silence.
That said, however, there is one issue of significance that has current relevance
and that is discussed in historical treatises: the ordinary manner. Ordinary
manner signifies a middle ground, a way of touching the instrument, a manner
of articulating at the keyboard that constitutes a type of basic touch. There
is no way of measuring an actual basic touch, but musicians and theorists have
spent a considerable amount of time searching for a basic articulation that is
neither legato nor staccato.
Marpurg and C. P. E. Bach have differing viewpoints on what types of
articulations should be played in the absence of designated musical direction.
Marpurg says that ordinary manner is assumed everywhere in the absence of
articulation signs, whereas Bach teaches that allegros usually consist of detached notes and adagios of broad, slurred notes and that these characteristic
features . . . [are] to be given consideration even when a composition is not so
marked. 7 Generally speaking, judging from Bachs explanation in his Versuch, detached notes appear most often in leaping passages and rapid tempos;
conversely, slurred notes tend to be found in stepwise passages and in slower
or more moderate tempos.8 He criticizes keyboardists who play excessively
in either directionwith too much legato or staccato:
There are many [keyboardists] who play stickily, as if they had glue between
their fingers. Their touch is lethargic; they hold notes too long. Others, in an
attempt to correct this, leave the keys too soon, as if they are burned. Both
are wrong. I speak in general, for every kind of touch has its use.9
Of course, the general character of a piece must always govern how one
plays. Too much or too long an over-legato that does not adjust to considerations of tempo, phrasing, acoustics, and the feel of the instrument may
produce a poor tone and unpleasing performance.
Articulation
73
Bach lists the elements of a good performance, which include the loudness and softness of tones, the touch . . . legato and staccato execution.10 He
elucidates:
Good performance, then, occurs when one hears all notes and their embellishments played in correct time with fitting volume produced by a touch
which is related to the true content of a piece. Herein lies the rounded, pure,
flowing manner of playing which makes for a clarity and expressiveness.
With these points in mind, however, it is urgent that the performer test
his instrument in advance to avoid too heavy or too light an attack. Many
instruments do not produce a perfect, pure tone unless a strong touch is
employed; others must be played lightly or the volume will be excessive. I
encourage a more musical way of portraying rage, anger, and other passions
by means of harmonic and melodic devices rather than by an exaggerated,
heavy attack. In rapid passages every tone must be played with a fitting pressure or the effect will be turgid and chaotic.11
Bach encountered technicians who were nimble keyboardists by profession who overwhelm our hearing without satisfying it and stun the mind
without moving it.12 Clearly he advocates performances that combine both
technique and musicianship.
Lhlein, who like other late eighteenth-century writers does not deem
harpsichord the instrument of choice, also discusses the need for performers to incorporate different types of touch into their playing. He encourages
keyboardists to emulate various effects on the harpsichord, such as using slurs
to represent string instruments:
With regard to expression, the keyboard is not as perfect as bowed or wind
instruments. Nevertheless, a group of notes may be played in different ways,
and we may imitate various types of bowing [by varying the articulations].13
Quantz, like C. P. E. Bach, associates certain tempo markings with types

of playingthat is to say, with more connected or detached articulations:
The principal character of the Allegro is one of gaiety and liveliness, just as
that of the Adagio, on the contrary, is one of tenderness and melancholy. . . .
In the Allegro, the quick passagework must be played above all roundly, correctly, and distinctly, and with liveliness and articulation.14
Of course, internal, smaller, and varied articulations are needed for

every phrase and passage of whatever character. Quantz recognizes the
74
need to be flexible when interpreting musical terms and pieces in general:

Cases may occur in which [the tempos] are not at all times binding, and
the intention of the composer must be discovered instead from the content
of the piece.15
Similarly, in Heinrich Christoph Kochs Musikalisches Lexicon, articulation styles are given for various shades of tempo marking. In his entry for
Adagio, he adds: It is difficult to establish general rules for the performance
of every kind of piece, since performance is a matter of feeling rather than
description, of imagination rather than instruction.16
Italian music terms signify performance styles and touches, not just
tempo markings. For instance, an allegro marking for a Baroque minuet
or gavotte might suggest an entirely different tempo than an allegro for a
toccata or fugue, since the former two genres are dance movements while
the latter two are often freer improvisatory pieces. Or, as is often the case
in Baroque keyboard suites, a minuet in a major key will be followed by a
minuet in a minor key, and minor keys often reflect a slower and quieter
character, not as light and happy as minuets in major keys. The tempo may
or may not stay the same, but it is likely that the overall touch and articulations will change between the two minuets, even if the identical tempo
marking appears above them. Information provided by a tempo marking is
not precise (and, of course, the early harpsichord repertory had no metronome markings).
Furthermore, as briefly mentioned in my discussion of rhetoric, articulation must follow the text and syntax. This applies to pieces with and without
text. In his article Tempo and Expression Marks, David Fallows reminds
us that repeated references in the theorists suggest that in vocal music, particularly in the madrigal, changes of tempo and dynamic were entrusted to
the sensitivity of the musics performers.17
Nivers, primarily an organist, includes a section marked On the Distinction and Slurring of the Notes, in which he writes:
It is of considerable refinement and elegance when ones touch enables the
distinct demarcation of all the notes and a subtle connecting of some, which
the manner of singing teaches us correctly. To play the notes in a distinct
and marked way, it is necessary to lift the fingers quickly but not too high.
That is, for example, in playing rapid divisions and scales, one must promptly
raise [release] each note as the next one is played, for if you do not lift one
until after the next is played, you make no distinction between the notes.18
Articulation
75
On harpsichord, there is less chance that overlapping will be muddy, because

the sounds dissipate rather quickly, unlike on organ. A muddy sound might
result, however, if several notes from different harmonies or adjacent notes
in a scale passage are held down simultaneously or for too long. Tension in
the hand or fingers can cause this muddiness. Niverss recommendation of a
distinct demarcation of all the notes and a subtle connecting of some applies
directly to good harpsichord technique. For instance, a quickly ascending
scale pattern may be performed with great nuance if the notes are not simply
detached equally the whole way up, but rather more connected in the beginning and more detached as they ascend.
In an article on performance in the Allgemeine Theorie der schnen Knste
(1774), Johann Georg Sulzer (writing more for fortepiano) discusses heavy
(schwer) and light (leicht) styles. Schwer playing is meant for movements that
are grand and serious. It needs a firm touch. Notes get full value, almost as
if the word tenuto were written above them. Leicht implies a less emphatic
touch and shortened note values.19
Trk says that schwer implies that notes are to be played firmly and for
their full value, whereas leicht implies a less emphatic touch, the fingers raised
before the notes full value. He explains in more detail:
For a heavy execution every tone must be played firmly [with emphasis]
and held out until the very end of the prescribed duration of the note. Light
execution is that in which every tone is played with less firmness, and the
finger lifted from the key somewhat sooner than the actual prescribed
duration. In order to avoid a misunderstanding I must also remark that the
terms heavy and light in general refer more to the sustaining or detaching
of a tone rather than to the softness or loudness of the same. For in certain
cases, for example in an allegro vivo, scherzando, vivace con allegrezza, etc.,
the execution must be rather light (short) but at the same time more or less
loud, whereas pieces of a melancholy character, for example an adagio mesto,
con afflizione, etc., although played slurred and consequently with a certain
heaviness, must nevertheless not be executed too loudly. In most cases,
however, heavy and loud are indeed to be combined. Whether the execution
is to be heavy or light may be determined (1) from the character [Affekt]20
and the purpose of a composition; (2) from the designated tempo; (3) from
the meter; (4) from the note values used; and (5) from the manner in which
the notes progress, etc. Besides, national taste, the style of the composer,
and the instrument for which the composition is written must be taken into
consideration.21
76
The following paragraph exposes Trks stereotyped views about the

types of touch ascribed to national styles:
A composition that has been written in the Italian national taste requires
in general a medium execution. The performance of a French composition
must be lighter. On the contrary, the works of German composers for the
most part demand a heavier and more robust execution. In the same way
the style of a composer also presumes an individual mode of treatment. A
composition of Handel, Sebastian Bach, etc., must be given a more emphatic execution than, for example, a modern concerto of Mozart. 22
Despite such statements about heavy and light touches as they pertain
to national styles, elsewhere Trk gives a much more detailed description
of different types of pieces. In the following paragraph he presents himself
with more integrity and an open-mindedness that crosses national lines:
Compositions of an exalted, serious, solemn, pathetic character, and similar
character must be given a heavy execution with fullness and force, strongly
accented and the like. To these types of compositions belong those which are
headed grave, pomposo, patetico, maestoso, sostenuto, and the like. A somewhat
lighter and markedly softer execution is required by compositions of a pleasant, gentle, agreeable character, consequently those which are customarily
marked compiacevole, con dolcezza, glissicato, lusingando, pastorale, and the like.
Compositions in which lively, humorous, and joyous feelings are predominant, for example, allegro scherzando, burlesco, giocoso, con allegrezza, risvegliato, etc., must be played quite lightly, whereas melancholy and similar affects
particularly call for the slurring of tones and portato. Compositions of the
latter type are designated by the words con afflizzione, con amarezza, doloroso,
lagrimoso, languido, mesto, etc. . . . It is understood that in all of the aforementioned cases, various degrees of heavy or light execution must be applied.23
He concludes with a poetic analogy, in which he compares heavy and light

keyboard touches to visual art: If I might express myself in the terminology
of painting, then I would say that certain parts must be given light and others shadow.24
G. F. Wolf argues that it is not enough to know these superficial meanings of these Italian terms; the performer also needs to take into consideration
the kind of touch that they require.25
It is advantageous to look up musical terms in musical dictionaries of the
seventeenth or eighteenth century, which may provide more detail than those
given in some modern dictionaries.26
Articulation
77
Ordinary Manner
Both Marpurg and Trk describe a specific manner of playing the keyboard
as ordentliche or gewhnliche.27 This manner of playing has been the subject of
much inquiry. If there is an ordinary way of touching the keys, some basic way
of articulating that is neither connected nor detached, the topic raises many
questions: What is it, exactly? When should it be used? Is it truly intended as
some kind of default when nothing else is marked? Is this the touch we should
first teach beginners? At what point do the fingers alternate their motions
and release from one note to the next so that the movement is not considered
more of a legato or staccato touch? What factors tell us when to apply it? Does
it change depending on when and where the piece was written? Are we able
to be precise about how to play in this manner?
At the end of the sixteenth century, Diruta demands clear articulation:
Remember that the fingers clearly articulate the keys so that one does not
press another key until the finger rises from the previous one. One raises and
lowers the fingers at exactly the same time. I warn you not to lift the fingers
too high over the keyboard and, above all, to hold the hand easily in a ready
manner.28
Nassarres eighteenth-century Spanish organ treatise describes something similar to this manner of playing, which is neither connected nor de
tached:
Others go to another extreme, which is to not give enough movement to the
fingers; for to depress one key, they do not lift the one they depressed before,
and the sounds overlap. One must avoid these two extremes, for they are
undesirable and of no small consequence, and one should adjust the timing
in such a manner that the sounds follow one another distinctly and with
clarity, neither delaying nor overlapping, so that there is no confusion. 29
Marpurg explains how legato, detached playing, and ordinary manner

differ:
An arc . . . means that the notes are to be slurred. Now, to slur means not
to lift the finger from the preceding note until one touches the next [note].
. . . Detachment is the opposite of slurring; it consists in this: that one does
not hold a note for its [full] value but only until about half the value. This
is notated with a dot. Often one makes use of a little [vertical] straight line
for this.30
78
He adds:
Contrary to the legato and staccato is the ordinary manner of playing, which
consists in lifting the finger nimbly from the previous key just before the
next note is played. Because this ordinary manner of playing is always implied, it is never marked.31
Forkel describes a type of basic articulation that is somewhere in the

middle of legato and staccato:
When passing from one note to another, a sliding action instinctively instructs the next finger regarding the amount of force exerted by its predecessor, so that the tone is equally regulated and the notes are equally distinct.
In other words, the touch is neither too long nor too short, as Carl Philipp
Emanuel complains, but is just what it ought to be.32
Like Marpurg, Georg Caspar Hodermann, author of Kurzer Unterricht

fr Musik-Anfnger (1787), describes an ordinary manner: In the absence
of [a] precise indication, all notes, on whatever instrument, must be played
quite fully after each other.33 Is this something closer to legato? Portato?34
It is absurd to think of playing this way in the large variety of musical contexts simply because it is not otherwise marked. Notation, even at its best,
is imprecise.
Johann Daniel Hensel, in his Klavierschule (1796), attributes certain
touches to a variety of tempos, with fast pieces requiring sprightlier finger
motion than slow pieces. In the absence of musical indications from the composer, he specifies a semidetached style of playing:
In slow tempos, every note must be fully held for as long as its value requires,
which is known as holding the note. In order to render the performance
more distinct and lively in fast tempos, these same notes, when no signs
specify to the contrary, may be almost unnoticeably separated, as if a rest
of the shortest possible duration stood after each note, whereby a round
manner of playing is achieved.35
Trk writes: For tones which are to be played in customary fashion (that
is, neither detached nor slurred) the finger is lifted a little earlier from the key
than is required by the duration of the note. This is not staccato, either. The
silences are barely audible. He goes on to say, Each note should be heard with
its requisite strength, roundly and distinctly separated from the others. He
describes the correct connection and separation of musical phrases and criti-
Articulation
79
cizes those who do not connect the notes together sufficiently. Trk dislikes
extremes of touch because they obscure a clear manner of performance. He
does not specify when to use the ordinary manner.36
Without instruction to play in a specific manner, Rellstab favors the
rule of the middle road (die Mittlestrasse).37 Similarly, Merbach warns against
extremes of touch that are too sticky or too light. He complains about beginners who tend to leave all five fingers on the keyboard at once, depressing all
the keys in an inappropriate overlapping manner. He encourages students to
find a happy medium. The finger should be lifted immediately after touching
the key for its complete note value.38
Adolph Friedrich Petschke criticizes Merbach for his immediate lifting
of the fingers, remarking that it is not always required:
[When playing] a sustained note, the finger must remain on the key for a
long time. It must remain on the key for the exact value and length of the
note, unless dots or dashes signify that the notes are to be played otherwise.39
Discussions of the ordinary manner occur outside of Germany as well.

Rameau describes a transfer of finger weight that is naturally smooth, much
like the shifting of weight from one foot to the other in walking:
From the finger from which you started, proceed to its neighbor, and so
on to the next one, making sure that the finger which has just depressed
a key leaves it at the same instant that its neighbor plays another; for the
raising of one finger and the depressing of the next should occur simul
taneously.40
The majority of Baroque compositions for keyboard have few markings

instructing us to play legato, staccato, or anything else for that matter. Yet we
know from previously cited sources that, indeed, all sorts of touches were
employed. Thus, rather than searching for a precise articulation befitting an
ordinary manner, we may view it as an umbrella term describing a touch
somewhere between the extremes of legato and staccato. It would be absurd
to think of playing everything that is unmarked, as it were, in the same
manner, so it is likely that the sources are trying to document a manner of
playing befitting any composition as a point of departure. When teaching
beginners, it is also helpful to give simple exercises that should be played
in this manner before progressing to a more connected or detached style of
playing.
80
Legato
My staccato is always legato.
Wanda Landowska, quoted in
Harich-Schneider, The Harpsichord
When teaching or learning how to play legato, it is important to realize that

there are many gradations and applications of this style of playing. It is not sufficient to say only that the notes should be connected as smoothly as possible.
Legato implies a connected manner of playing. It may mean that the strings
never stop vibrating between the notes, but there are different levels of overlapping sounds and the number of notes played. Extreme legato is sometimes
known as over-legato, legatissimo, or finger pedaling.41
Mastering variety in legato styles demands that the fingers remain in
contact with the keys in a relaxed, graceful manner. Those who place their
fingers on the keys in either too arched or too flat a position will have a more
difficult time achieving a beautiful legato touch. It is imperative not to reserve legato playing (or any articulation, for that matter) solely for when signs
instruct us to play in this manner. Rather, it is but one of the many ways of
moving from one note to the next, applicable in countless situations, tempos,
affects, etc. In fact, from the beginning of the seventeenth century and well
into the late eighteenth century, various authors have proposed using legato
for nearly all pieces.
In Libro de tientos y discursos de msica practica (1626), Francisco Correa
de Arauxo teaches:
One must inviolably maintain one rule: to not raise one finger until the next
note or rest follows in the same line. . . . one must know how to adapt the
fingers and hands . . . all to avoid raising the preceding key until the next one
in the same line follows, as said above.42
Is he describing some kind of legato playing, even in such an early period? Or

is he describing something between legato and staccato, some kind of flowing
ordinary manner?
In The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord, Spinet, or Organ, Pasquali clearly
states his preference for legato:
Legato is the touch which this essay seeks to teach, since this is the most
important touch for almost all passages, and the one in which the vibration
of the strings is most complete for each note.43
Articulation
81
Pasquali defines legato as the tied or equal touch. He is a proponent of thumb

passing in passages of five or more consecutive notes; this, he says, enables players to keep the fingers down upon the keys the entire length of the notes.44
He is reproachful of detached playing (when not specifically marked in the
score):
When the vibration of a string ceases before the vibration of another one
begins, not only does this cause an unsatisfactory tone to come from the
instrument in some of the notes of a running passage, but the music will also
not be played as it is written.45
It is unclear as to whether he refers only to running passages or to other contexts as well.

In Lart de toucher le clavecin, Couperin says, It is necessary to preserve
a perfect legato in all that one plays.46 We may think of this liaison parfaite
not as a true legato but more as a perfect connectedness; in other words, every
note, and thus every phrase, should relate and connect to the next one. This is
different from an overlapping of sounds. If we interpret his advice in this way,
every release of a key should have a smooth motion as the fingers prepare to
play the next note or even a rest. This is in direct contrast to choppy playing,
but this is not to say that Couperins comment, taken out of context, implies
an avoidance of detached notes. In fact, he provides examples of fingering
patterns that promote a non-legato, such as in the second part of the Silvains
(Woodland nymphs), in which he uses the third finger twice on consecutive
notes. At the same time, given the amount of attention he devotes to legato
playing, we cannot deny the possibility that, overall, Couperin favors a more
connected manner of touching the keys, one that may in fact be more legato
than in the earlier virginal repertory, for example.
Duphlys Exercise Book for Lord Fitzwilliam contains a paragraph entitled Du doigt that mirrors the article the composer provided for the entry
Doigter in Rousseaus Dictionnaire de musique. Duphly says that legato is a
particular feature of the French way of playing (le jeu franois):
The fingers must fall on the keys and not strike them; and moreover, they
must flow from one to the other in succession; that is to say, [the finger] must
not leave one key before it has taken up another. This primarily regards the
French manner of playing.47
This passage is somewhat ambiguous, beginning with the meaning of the

word pris (taken, or taken up), which could refer to either the initial contact
82
Example 3.1. Minuet by Rameau, mm. 13, from Miller, Institutes, 28.
or the actual sounding of a note. We face the same confusion with Rameau,
from whom Duphly copies the first sentence verbatim. Rameaus preface says
that the fingers should drop onto the keys (i.e., the point at which the quill
touches the string) and glide in succession from one note to the next, raising
and lowering the successive notes simultaneously.48
In general, it appears that Rameau is an enthusiast of legato playing.
Specifically, he elaborates on this technique in his Dissertation, which focuses on the art of playing from figured bass. He connects notes by holding one or more common tones from chord to chord. Although it is highly
doubtful that he intends all continuo parts to be played legato, at the very
least he is a proponent of good voice leading and keeping the hand still to
avoid choppy playing which occurs when it jumps around the keyboard. In
his preface, he indicates his familiarity with techniques taught by others in
the Parisian circle, such as Denis, Saint-Lambert, and Couperin, all of whom
discuss legato in their writings. Rameaus comments in Trait de lharmonie
are somewhat conservative in regard to use of the thumb, but there he writes
in the context of playing from figured bass, not solo playing.49 In the preface
he advocates using the thumb as an equal, active finger, especially for solo
playing.
In Institutes, Miller observes that the best masters recommend legato
as the most appropriate touch for the harpsichord. He gives fingerings that
promote a smooth, equal, and connected manner.50 Among his practice
pieces, which are intended to teach different types of articulation, is a minuet
by Rameau (example 3.1), for which Miller adds very long slurs that span three
measures. He notes, As far as the curved lines go, you take such fingers as
naturally lie over the keys.51
Among his many finger exercises are ones for learning different types of
articulation. In example 3.2, he puts slurs over groups of notes, most of them
in pairs, for the purpose of practicing legato.
Articulation
83
Example 3.2. Aria for producing legato, mm.14, from Miller, Institutes, 51.
In Millers rules on fingering, he says that every different note requires

a different finger [for connected playing] unless there is a rest or because a
pause intervenes.52 He also emphasizes contraction of the hand and better
fingering (i.e., use of the thumb) to guarantee a better tone from the instrument.53 (Millers thoughts on contracting the hand will be discussed in
chapter 4 in a section devoted specifically to that subject.)
In Principles of Music Calculated for the Pianoforte or Harpsichord (1796),
Nicholas Joseph Hllmandel prefers a smooth, flowing style. He deems
defective any fingering patterns that stiffen the fingers or prevent the joining of the notes. This stiffening and detached style of playing are to be
avoided at all costs.54 This statement is direct, but it is hard to believe that
he rejects all instances of detached playing. Id like to think that he would
endorse a detached manner when written, and, if we read between the lines,
he strongly disliked tension in the fingers or keeping too constant a distance
between finger and key, which would result in unattractive, overly detached
playing.
In Marpurgs Clavierstcke (1762), he states, The first basic rule of fingering is that the performance should be as connected and legato as possible.55 In his Principes du clavecin, he specifies that when playing notes
under a slur, one should not lift a finger until the following note has been
touched.56
In his Klavierschule, Trk illuminates how to play in a connected manner
that suggests an over-legato:
84
Example 3.3. Couperin, Lart de toucher le clavecin, Agrments qui servent au jeu.
For tones which are to be slurred, the finger should be allowed to remain on
the key until the duration of the given note is completely past, so that not the
slightest separation results.57
For slurred notes, G. F. Wolf explains that one finger is not raised until
the next one is played. He calls this klebricht Spielart (notes held beyond their
value).58 Franz Paul Rigler, in his Anleitung zum Gesange (1798), also writes
about connecting notes as much as possible in slurred passages; specifically,
the keyboardist should hold the first note until the second one has been
sounded.59
Johann Peter Milchmeyer, in his treatise Die wahre Art das Pianoforte zu
spielen (1797), points out that holding notes beyond their written value does
not always apply to every note in a passage:
The legato style of playing . . . requires a smooth and languishing approach.
. . . However good or bad sounding they may be, such passages as contain
only the true notes of the chord are enhanced by this manner of playing. . . .
This method of playing requires that the fingers may remain a little longer
on various notes; moreover, the notes, provided that they remain in one
position, are played without moving the hand or arm. 60
Although his treatise is about playing the piano, his words are appropriate for holding certain notes down when playing chords and arpeggiated
harmonies on the harpsichord, such as in the French unmeasured preludes.
In these preludes, the earliest of which were written entirely in whole notes,
different types of curved lines (liaisons) appear in the score. Some of these lines
are ties; others are slurs over groups of notes both large and small. All of these
slur markings inform the performer about which notes to sustain or overlap,
allowing the other notes to be played in passing. Those that are held create
the fundamental harmonies, while those that are released constitute fanciful,
Articulation
85
Example 3.4.Couperin, Lart de toucher le clavecin, premier prlude, mm. 14.
improvisatory passagework and ornamental filigree. The notes without slurs

may or may not be played legato, depending on the particular passage and the
performers interpretation.
In The Elements of Music, John Parsons makes the correlation between a
good touch and a beautiful sound. His description suggests a possible legato or
something close to it. It may be more of an ordinary touch, but it is certainly
not a depiction of a detached manner of playing.
Care must be taken that no finger be recovered from its key before the full
length of the note be expired, nor, till the succeeding one be fully prepared
to strike; and when that strikes, the one that was played before is to rise
and not until then; so that the movement be alternate, down and up; by
which means a proper direction of finger will be acquired and a fine tone be
produced from the instrument.61
Couperin is among the first to notate and to discuss the use of finger
substitution as a means to a sustained manner of playing.62 He remarks about
his use of the technique in his piece La Milordine, Notice what connection the
changing of fingers lends to playing! However, people tell me that this requires
more agility than the traditional manner. I agree.63 Couperin illustrates finger
substitution through exercises, such as is seen in example 3.3. He explains this
technique:
The two numerals over the same note mark the change from one finger to
the other, except that when the higher number is played first, one must
ascend at once, and when the lower is played first, on the contrary, descend.64
His affinity for this technique is evident in the fact that his very first prelude
is devoted to it.65 It is a technique that can (and should) be used in many of
his pieces for solo harpsichord. Notice in example 3.4 how he uses finger substitution in both hands on notes of differing time values and for notes with
and without ornaments.
86
Rousseau also supports finger substitution:

In sonorous and legato music, it is good to get used to substituting one finger
in the place of another, without raising the key. This manner of playing gives
fluency in performance and prolongs the duration of the notes.66
C. P. E. Bach, however, criticizes Couperin for using finger substitution too

often in his Lart de toucher le clavecin:
Couperin, who is otherwise so sound, calls for replacement too frequently
and casually. Undoubtedly, the thumbs correct use was not fully known in
his time, as suggested by some of his fingered examples in which he replaces
fingers instead of using the thumb or the repeated finger, both of which are
easier.67
Hartong (writing more for piano, where pedaling helps facilitate legato) prefers the finger slide to finger substitution, specifically when moving from an
accidental to a diatonic key:
In those keys [tonalities] in which I would have to overreach from a black
[raised] key to a neighboring white one, I prefer in these cases to spring
down with the finger that I have on the black key, snapping down to the
white key.68
In his Lettre, Le Gallois draws attention to the faults of performers who

poorly execute legato:
But if the brilliant style has its defects, the legato (coulant) style also has its
own, which is easy to observe in those [for] whom affectation causes [them]
to slur their playing in an agonizing [or chaotic] manner. For they so contort
their hands and fingers, they pass them over each other with such excess,
tightening them in an extraordinary manner, that it becomes disgusting
and pitiful. . . . Thus all one may say about it is that their playing is indeed
so strongly legato that it sounds more like the playing of a hurdy-gurdy, in
which, because of the slurring, the playing has no rhythm, than like true
harpsichord playing.69
Although we know that all kinds of articulations were employed in Baroque

harpsichord playing, a trend toward legato playing, especially in France and
Germany, is suggested in evidence found scattered throughout the later treatises quoted above. These treatises begin to discuss the equal use of the fingers, the active role of the thumb, liaisons (slurs), successive fingers for scale
passages, finger substitution, and not raising one key until the next has been
Articulation
87
played. Given the quick decay of sound when a string is plucked on the harpsichord, mastering the fine art of legato playing is among the essential tools
needed to sustain tones and to create lush sonorities.
Slurs
Slurs indicate that notes belong together in some kind of grouping. They
usually suggest a connected style of playing, but they do not tell us exactly how
joined the notes in question should be played. In early seventeenth-century
keyboard repertory, slurs are sometimes intended to imitate string instruments. One such example is found in the first two volumes of Samuel Scheidts
Tabulatura nova (1624), where slurs are placed over several groups of sixteenth
notes. The score is marked Imitatio violistica:
Where the notes, like here, are tied together, it signifies a special manner
similar to the violinists slurring with the bow. This manner is often used
by celebrated German violinists, and it is also possible to use it on lightactioned organs, regals, harpsichords, and spinets, where it produces a
pleasant sound. For this reason I became very fond of this manner and
grew used to it.70
Most often, however, discussions of slurred passages and their execution are
less about special effects and more about general technique. Several treatises
give examples of slurred notes, differentiating between adjacent notes and
notes that constitute a broken chord.
Rameau tells us, A slur that embraces two different notes . . . indicates
that the finger must not be raised from the first note until after the second
note has been played. 71 How long these notes should be overlapped is not
clear from his description or from the example he provides in his table of ornaments. What we may infer is that there is a definite legato, especially when
we contrast this statement with the one in the preface, where he describes a
general finger technique in which the raising of one finger and depressing of
a key by another must be carried out at the same time.72 At the same time
conveys a simultaneous touch applicable to a non-legato, whereas until after
the second note has been played denotes overlapping.
Marpurgs definition of a slur is similar to Rameaus: A slur over two
different notes signifies that the notes are to be connected. To connect them
means that the fingers are not raised from the previous note until the next
finger has played the following note. 73
88
Example 3.5. C. P. E. Bach, Versuch (1787 ed.), slurred notes, fig. 168.
C. P. E. Bach explains how to play his examples in which two and three
notes are connected by a slur:
Notes that are to be played legato must be held for their full value. . . . The
slur applies to all of the notes included under its trace. Patterns of two and
four slurred notes are played with a slight, scarcely noticeable increase of
pressure on the first and third tones. The same applies to the first tones of
groups of three notes. In other cases only the first of the slurred notes is
played in this manner. It is a convenient custom to indicate by appropriate
marks on the first few of prolonged successions of detached or legato notes, it
being self-evident that all of the tones are to be played similarly until another
kind of mark intervenes.74
Clearly, Bachs use of the word pressure indicates that he is referring to either
piano or clavichord. Nonetheless, his lesson may be applied to how we interpret and perform slurred notes on the harpsichord: not by exerting more
pressure, obviously, but by lengthening and overlapping certain notes more
than others to create a hierarchy of important notes. Bach demonstrates in
example 3.5 how to prolong note values when three notes of a chord are embraced by a slur.
In situations like these, Trk tells us when to release the fingers from
the notes being held:
When there is a curved line over harmonies that are to be slowly arpeggiated
. . . especially in compositions of agreeable character, and the like, to let the
fingers remain on the keys until the appearance of the next harmony.75
He then provides assorted examples that show how long to hold slurred notes
in different contexts, depending on the tempo or character of a piece.76
Rameau says, A slur that embraces many notes indicates that one must
hold them all down from one end of the slur to the other.77 Example 3.6 shows
how Rameau wants the notes under a liaison to be held. Saint-Lambert also
gives examples of groups of slurred notes that are part of a broken chord, such
as those in example 3.7.
Articulation
89
Example 3.6. Rameau, Pices de clavecin, Table des agrments: Liaison.
Example 3.7. Saint-Lambert, Les principes du clavecin, Remarque sur la liaison.
In an earlier chapter, De la liaison, he includes more examples, including

ones in which all notes have the same value (either quarters or whole notes) as
well as instances in which a slur is written over notes that move by step. He
elaborates on the subject:
The general rule is to keep down all the notes embraced by the slur until it
is time to release the last one, but there are some instances when they must
not all be held. When the first and last notes are long, that is, whole or half
notes, and the others are short, that is to say, eighth or sixteenth notes . . .
only the first and last notes are held, and all the others released.
But even without looking to see if the first and last notes are longer than
the others, it suffices that the notes embraced by the slur move by step to
make it obligatory to hold only the first and the last. Thus in examples with
stepwise quarter notes, even though the notes all have the same value, only
the first and last of those embraced by the slur are to be held, since they
move by step and not disjunctively.78
Saint-Lambert goes on to distinguish between examples in which all

the notes are held down and ones in which only the first and last notes are
held, the middle ones being released after their note values have expired. We
conclude from his section on slurs that he wants players to employ different
types of legato for passages with leaping notes and for those that move by step.
On over-legato, he gives the following explanation:
One plays all the notes that the slur encloses, and the effect of the slur is
that all these notes are held after having been played, even if their value has
expired, and they are only released when it is time to release the last note.
90

In order to explain this more clearly, let us suppose four notes are connected by a slur and marked ABCD according to the order in which they are
arranged. A must be played first, B second, C third, and D fourth. But when
playing B, A must not be released, nor in playing C must A or B be released,
nor in playing D must A, B, or C be released. They must all be held and not
released until it is time to release the last one, that is, when D has reached its
full value. Then they are all released at the same time even though they were
played one after the other. . . . The slur is used particularly in preludes, and
sometimes also in pieces, but more rarely.79
From all of these discussions about slurred passages, the harpsichordist

learns the importance of controlling the amount of connection between two or
more notes, both when slur markings are provided by the composer and when
the performer decides to apply them to an otherwise unmarked score. What is
not written in the treatises, however, is that the performer must take into consideration all sorts of factors that affect ones use of legato, including tempo,
the acoustics of the instrument and performance venue, the character of the
piece, and its harmonic movement. This applies to passages that have slurs
over several adjacent notes that move by step as well as to broken chords.
Arpeggios
Tones decay quite rapidly on the harpsichord; how fast the sound decays differs from one instrument to the next. Although it is a keyboard instrument,
its plucking mechanism is more akin to that of a harp or a lute. Because of
this attribute, harpsichordists are forever faced with the need for expressive
moulding of a continuum of sound.80 One of the principal ways to sustain the
sound on a harpsichord is through arpeggiation: when the notes of a chord
are played in broken succession rather than simultaneously. An arpeggio may
be written out as individual notes, or it may be indicated by a sign, such as a
wavy or curved line running vertically alongside a chord. It may be played in
numerous directions, depending on the number of notes: upward, downward,
and in a mixed direction (style bris), etc. Not only may an arpeggio prolong
harmonies, but the manner in which it is performed may produce infinite
contrasts in character and affect the expressive shaping and drama.
One of the earliest sources to mention the need to sustain the sound on a
harpsichord is Diruta in Il Transilvano. In a paragraph discussing the differences between organ and harpsichord technique, he tells us:
Articulation
91
Example 3.8. Froberger, Toccata no. 2 in D Minor (1649), mm. 13.
The same effect that one derives from the organ, that of sustaining sound,
should be employed on a quilled instrument; for example, when a breve or
semi-breve is played on an organ, one hears the entire sound without again
pressing the key, but when playing the quilled instrument for the same note
duration one loses half the sound. One must, then, with the vivacity and
dexterity of the hand, make up for the lack of sound by playing the notes
often and gracefully. 81
According to Frescobaldi, elegant artifices are needed in order not to leave

the instrument empty:
The beginnings of the toccatas should be played adagio and arpeggiated. The
same applies to the suspensions or dissonances, which also in the middle
of the piece are to be played together in order not to leave the instrument
empty [i.e., not to let the sound die away]. Reiterating the notes may be
repeated at the players discretion. 82
Adagio is most commonly understood to mean slow. Brossard (Dictionnaire,

1703) translates adagio as comfortable, at ones ease, without hurrying, as
well as slowly, dragging the beat a little. The term adasio appears in Frescobaldis prefaces to his two 1615 volumes and his Fiori musicali (1635). Given the
musical context, the word suggests playing at ease or as you wish, a more
prose-like manner than in other, more metrical sections.83
Often in the beginning of the toccatas of Frescobaldi and Johann Jakob
Froberger, we are given only a whole note (or more) of a held chord (see example 3.8).
The opening chord would sound boring if played as literally notated
that is, as block D-minor chords that just sit and wait for the next chord
to be played. Through different ways of arpeggiating and ornamenting the
chord, this opening harmony may be transformed into a powerful, emotive
statement, much like an initial grand brushstroke that begins a painting or
an actors entrance onstage. One should experiment by moving up and down
92
the D-minor chord note by note, altering the speed at which the arpeggio
is played, lingering on some notes more than others, and even adding some
acciaccaturas (the momentary application of nonharmonic, melodic passing
notes within an arpeggiated figure).84
French keyboard tradition also makes use of passing nonharmonic tones.
This is sometimes notated (e.g., in DAnglebert) as a slash (/ or \) between the
notes of a chord or a vertical slur to signify either an upward or downward
motion, often called a slide. The most common of these slides fills in the
harmonic interval of a third and signals the harpsichordist to sustain the main
notes while playing a passing note in between them. The slide is often called
a coul or tierce coul or coul sur tierce.85
Much may be learned about arpeggiating from the music of other plucked
instruments, especially those in the lute family. Perrines Pices de luth en
musique (1680), written in keyboard notation, provides instructions for performing the arpeggio. Reviewing lute pieces with written-out sections in the
style bris (broken style) is valuable to the harpsichordist who seeks creative
ways to break up a chord, so as not to leave the instrument empty and to
mould the continuum of sound. The style bris is found in many early lute
manuscripts, such as in Kapspergers arpeggiated toccatas (Rome, 1604) or
the doubles of courantes in Robert Ballards lute books (1611 and 1614), and it
eventually became a distinctive feature of French lute playing. It serves to give
expressive shape and nuance to an otherwise ordinary harmonic progression.
It also sustains the vibration of the strings and prolongs their harmony. With
its foundations in lute repertory and lute performance of the late Renaissance
and early Baroque, style bris soon found its way into solo harpsichord performance. Some of the earliest appearances of this broken style appear in the
allemandes of Chambonnires. Chords written out in this style continue to
be seen in compositions throughout the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries,
including the cadential passages of courantes and other movements of the
harpsichord suites by such composers as Johann Caspar Ferdinand Fischer.
There is much to be learned about inventive arpeggiation from the French
unmeasured preludes written for solo harpsichord; in particular, the later
preludes, such as those by DAnglebert, include black notes of varying notelengths and reveal which notes to play as passing melodic notes and which to
sustain as fundamental harmonies.
For arpeggiation to sound effective, the fingers must never stiffen. Slow
practice is useful in learning to shift the position of the hand as it is guided
by the fingers with a graceful, gradual motion. It is most important to keep
Articulation
93
all the fingers relaxed and near each other in a natural manner, without force.
If the music calls for the finger to linger on one note, the whole hand should
linger there without leaving some fingers outstretched as though they were
preparing to play other notes. That only causes unnecessary tension in the
hand and fingers.86
Staggered Playing
Another expressive device on the harpsichord is staggered playing: when
two notes that are written as simultaneous are played at different times, with
the upper note slightly delayed with respect to the lower one (sometimes the
reverse). It is related to the arpeggio in the sense that the notes of a given
harmony are not played at the same time. I have also heard it called fringing, because the upper part is played a little outside of the beat, i.e., on the
fringe. The Englishman Roger North uses the word in this context as well
when he says that this manner of playing doth not corrupt but rather fringes
the tone.87 It also resembles the French agrment called the suspension. Staggered playing needs at least two notes written in harmony on the same beat.
Delaying a note so it is not exactly together with those notated on the same
beat is often a useful tool in ascending passages when the final top note is
reached. The slight postponement of the upper note reminds me of the sensation I sometimes get at the top of a hill or a roller coaster. It may also feel like
a small but highly emotive, musical sigh.
Both Duphly and Antoine Forqueray provide written instructions on
where and how to apply staggered playing. In Duphlys piece Les Grces he
places dots above the notes with instructions at the top of the page: Dots
above the bass mean that they should be played before the upper part. In
Forquerays pieces La Sylva, La Lon, and La DAubonne, he puts little crosses
(+) above some notes with these directions:
This piece must be played with a great deal of taste and feeling. To convey
this I have marked little crosses which signify that the chords of the bass are
played before those of the treble; and for all those [chords] where [crosses]
are not found, the treble is played before the bass. 88
Pierre-Claude Foucquet is another proponent of staggered playing. His instructions are more general, however, and without specific notation. Foucquet prefaces his second book of harpsichord pieces with this remark: In
all pieces that are graceful or tender, one must play the bass note before that
94
of the upper part, without changing the meter [i.e., without using tempo
rubato].89
Henry Purcell notates staggered playing in the Almand from his harpsichord Suite in A Minor, mm. 1516, in which he delays the downbeat of the
top line by a sixteenth note while the bass line plays on the beat. This is an
example of a written-out fringing technique.
Staggered playing is an extremely effective tool on the harpsichord for
bringing out certain notes and being expressive. It tends to work better in
slower pieces, but it is left up to the discretion of the player to determine where
to apply it. If overused or performed distastefully, it may sound sloppy, as if
the keyboardist were unable to play notes at the same time. Just how long the
performer waits to play the delayed note is a matter of artistic choice and, to
use the familiar French expression, of bon got: good taste.
Grace Notes and Trills

Ornaments are a melodic salt that seasons the music and gives it flavor,
without which it would be flat and insipid. As salt must be used prudently so
that there is not too much nor too little (some meats require more and others
less), so must the use of ornaments be applied with moderation. One must
know how to discern where more are necessary and where fewer.90
Jean Rousseau, Trait de la viole
In my experience as both performer and teacher, one of the main concerns

is how to play ornaments beautifully.91 Too often, especially for beginning
students, when a grace note or trill is played, the fingers stiffen and fly up
from the keys. The result is anything but graceful, much less emotionally moving. Marpurg complains about the same problem in the eighteenth century:
Young beginning students tend, particularly with trills and mordents, to
tighten and force the muscles, with the intent of bringing out one [or another]
tone, no matter how lightly quilled the keys may be.92 Similarly, C. P. E. Bach
taught: The muscles must remain relaxed, or the trill will bleat [meckern] or
grow ragged.93
For most ornaments, such as appoggiaturas, mordents, and trills, in order
to perform them with subtlety and variety, the keyboardist must have maximum control of the keys. To do so requires that the fingers remain on the
strings in a supple, relaxed manner.94
Articulation
95
Example 3.9. J. S. Bach, Sonata, BWV 1027, for viola da gamba

and harpsichord, II, mm. 14.
C. P. E. Bach devotes an entire, rather elaborate chapter of his Versuch

to the art of playing embellishments. As to where they should be applied,
he says:
They are better suited to slow or moderate [pieces] than to rapid tempos,
and to long rather than short notes. . . . [They] are best applied to those
places where a melody is taking shape, as it were, or where its partial, if not
complete, meaning or sense has been revealed. . . . Embellishments and their
execution form a large part of good taste.95
Regarding the timing of their execution, he explains, All ornaments stand in

proportioned relationship to the length of the principal note, the tempo, and
the [character] of a piece.96
As seen in example 3.9, the second movement from J. S. Bachs Sonata
BWV 1027 includes appoggiaturas (Vorschlge in German) in both the keyboard and string parts. Bach writes them all as eighth-note grace notes, regardless of the length of the main note. Varying the lengths of these shortened, ornamental notes adds expressivity and dissonance to the harmony that
would otherwise sound consonant.
In C. P. E. Bachs discussion of how to play a normal legato, he gives each
note its full length, but gives the appoggiatura a prolonged duration. Together
with the main note that it graces, there consists of an overlapping of sounds:
96

With regard to execution we learn from this figure that appoggiaturas are
louder than the following tone, including any additional embellishment,
and that they are joined to it in the absence as well as the presence of a slur.
Both of these points are in accord with the purpose of appoggiaturas, which
is to connect notes. They must be held until released by the following tones
so that both are smoothly joined. An undecorated, light tone that follows an
appoggiatura is called a release.97
Bach devotes several pages to the various ways an appoggiatura may be

elongated. Playing the first note longer adds to the dissonance and delays the
resolution. This method of overlapping the two notes allows for the second
note to be covered up by the sound of the first note, making it sound quieter.
Moreover, because the overlapping of sounds produces a blurring effect, it
creates an enjoyable clarity after the second note is heard and the first note is
released. It is like a picture coming into focus or strings coming in tune with
one another.
The amount of space before the appoggiatura also affects the way in which
the player emphasizes the grace note and in turn makes the release note sound
softer and more relaxed. In his detailed chapter about appoggiaturas, Quantz
writes, Accented appoggiaturas, or appoggiaturas which fall on the downbeat,
are found before a long note on the downbeat following a short one on the
upbeat.98 Here he is referring to the articulation before the actual grace note,
not to the space between the grace note and the note upon which it leans.
Similarly, Saint-Lambert remarks in his Principes du clavecin on a connected way of touching the keys when playing the port de voix to create a
diminuendo between the two notes.99
This mark drawn above the notes . . . is a slur, which means that those notes
should be connected; that is, the fingers should not be lifted when playing,
but should wait until the second of the two notes is played before lifting the
finger from the first.100
Again, it is difficult to notate to what extent there should be a blurring

effect. He goes into much less detail than C. P. E. Bach about elongating grace
notes. It is left more to the discretion of the player and is dependent (as always)
on context, tempo, and the resonance of a particular instrument. This artistic
license is confirmed by Saint-Lambert:
In the pieces which one studies, one may play them [ornaments] in places
even where they are not notated, may remove those that are there if he finds
Articulation
97
that they dont suit the piece, and add others according to his preference. He
may even, if he so desires, disregard all those that I have taught here (excepting only the essential ones) and compose new ones according to his own
taste, if he believes himself capable of inventing ones that are more beautiful. But he must be careful not to be too liberal in this area, especially in the
beginning, for fear of ruining what he hopes to embellish by trying to be
too refined too soon. This is because it is both good and necessary to follow
others ornaments from the beginning, and to perform them only in those
places where they are marked in the pieces, until one is advanced enough to
discern that other ornaments would not be bad there. The student must be
convinced, no matter how good his taste is for the harpsichord, that if he has
only had six months of practice, he cannot tell what makes playing elegant
as easily as those who have been in this profession for twenty or thirty years
and who through this long experience have acquired a surer knowledge of
what can beautify their art. Therefore, if the reader believes me, he will followthe ornaments that I teach in this book and that I propose with all the
more freedom, since I have little personal interest in their being followed,
as there are very few of my own; all the rest come from the most famous
masters that our century has produced, which alone is sufficient to give them
authority.101
Trills are mentioned in nearly all the treatises that discuss ornaments.
Diruta recommends in Il Transilvano that the keyboardist embellish music
with tremoli [trills] and lovely accenti.102 Specifically, he prescribes these
embellishments for harpsichord, not organ, as a means to sustain harmonies
and perpetuate the sounds from the quickly decaying vibrations of strings.
Trills add shimmer, and like an arpeggio, they prolong a harmony. Finger
technique, touch, and the speed at which a trill is played all help to create
expressive nuance and dynamic contrast. For example, by starting slower,
speeding up in the middle, and slowing down again at the end of a trill, a
crescendo-diminuendo is produced (<>). Some keyboardists tend to play trills
as if they were pasted hastily onto the page. Worse, they play every trill (even
every ornament) in the same manner, regardless of its musical context. C. P. E.
Bach discusses the challenge of playing trills:
Trills are the most difficult embellishments, and not all performers are
successful with them. They must be practiced industriously from the start.
Above all, the finger strokes must be uniform and rapid. A rapid trill is
always preferable to a slow one. In sad pieces the trill may be broadened
slightly, but elsewhere its rapidity contributes much to a melody. . . . Never
advance the speed of a trill beyond that pace at which it may be played
98

evenly. . . . When the upper tone of a trill is given its final performance it is
snapped; after the stroke the upper joint of the finger is sharply doubled and
drawn off and away from the key as quickly as possible. . . . The trill must
be practiced diligently with all fingers so that they will become strong and
dexterous. However, let no one believe that all the fingers may be made to
trill equally well.103
Bach encourages keyboardists to practice trills from the start of keyboard

lessons. He points out that practicing trills with all the fingers is beneficial
for the development of finger strength and independence. His remark about
the fingers having different strengths resonates with most keyboardists, but
some individuals can perform trills successfully with any finger combination.
Whereas Bach says trills are uniform and rapid and reserves the altering of
speeds within a trill for slower tempos, Marpurg changes the speed within a
trill, particularly when it is prepared with an appoggiatura: The leaned-upon
or prepared trill is when one remains a little longer on the accessory note
before alternating the notes or when one starts slowly, gradually increasing
the speed.104
I find the practice of changing the speed within extended trills effective in any situation. Earlier repertory, including many virginal pieces and
seventeenth-century Italian toccatas, often have notated trills that begin in
slow, dotted rhythms that accelerate into evenly notated alternating notes.
It is advantageous to practice grace notes and trills in different tempos,
keys, and characters, as well as with various finger combinations in order
to develop touch on the harpsichord. The more control there is of the plectra, by way of a developed finger technique, the more keyboardists broaden
their ability to produce dynamic contrasts and theatrical expression from the
instrument.
It is detrimental to the music to perform all the ornaments uniformly.
Even though French keyboard treatises reflect overall uniformity in their
application of trills as set forth by their ornamentation tables, in actual performance more freedom of expression is required. By diversifying their execution, the ornaments will serve their purpose, which is to highlight, decorate,
and accentuate various aspects of the music. The necessary contrast is like
the painter who needs brushes of differing sizes and shapes to create detailed
shading.
Surely, we may apply Bnigne de Bacillys remark about the need for
artistic license in vocal performances to our own idiom:
Articulation
99
Those who fancy themselves as great experts of the vocal art would not for
anything in the world omit that preparation of the trill [he refers here to
whether or not to include the appuy, the prepared or supported trill] . . . as
if it were of its essence, even in the case of the shortest trills. They consider
it a crime to do otherwise and thereby render the performance dull and
monotonous without realizing that the most universal rules have exceptions,
which often produce more pleasing results than the rules themselves.105
I conclude this section with a quotation from Trk:

By ornaments [I mean] those embellishments that are used in place of
simple tones. The use of ornaments is manifold. They contribute markedly
to the adornment of the melody; they animate it and make its tones more
cohesive; they sustain attention; they give greater emphasis to those tones
on which they are used so that a composition has a more telling effect; they
strengthen the expression of the passions and feelings; and in addition to
necessary variety, as it were, they bring light and shadow in a composition.106
Cantabile
Several texts of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries encourage keyboardists to study voice and other instruments. Not only is this advisable in
order to learn the art of phrasing, breathing, and cantabile playing, but because
it enables players to make even greater progress at the keyboard107 and leads
[instrumentalists] more deeply into the meaning of the music.108
Most keyboardists are familiar with the Italian term cantabile. We usually think of it as meaning a singing style or that which may be sung. Gioseffo Zarlino explained in his Le istitutioni harmoniche (1558) that the parts
[sections] of the song are singable; that is to say, they lend themselves well to
being sung.109 Over a century and a half later, Johann Gottfried Walthers
Lexicon describes cantabile in a similar way: When a composition, whether
for voices or instruments, is composed so that every voice or part is singable
or each one contains its own melody. Kochs Lexikon includes the terms
usage as an autonomous tempo marking for a fairly unhurried speed, but
surely this is not representative of the majority of pieces containing the Italian marking.
Given the fact that Domenico Scarlatti gives a musical instruction for
each of his harpsichord sonatas, it is clear he envisioned a tempo and mood for
each.110 The majority of his keyboard sonatas are marked allegro, allegrissimo,
100
or presto, but a handful of them are marked cantabile. When cantabile appears,
it is usually written together with another marking, such as andante, andantino, or moderato. Only a few are marked cantabile by itself. Some of these
cantabile (or cantabile andante, etc.) sonatas seem singable, but others do not.
In general, they seem more lyrical and flowing than many of his faster, more
virtuosic sonatas. Some, but not all, of the sonatas marked cantabile feel songlike. Moreover, some resemble sonatas marked andante or moderato, leaving us
to question what he means when he actually calls for cantabile.
J. S. Bach rarely, if ever, mentions a type of articulation, yet cantabile appears on the title page of the fair copy of his Inventions and Sinfonias (1723):
Upright instruction wherein the lovers of the keyboard, and especially those
desirous of learning, are shown a clear way . . . above all to arrive at a singing
style of playing.111
In his Livre dorgue I, Nivers says, One must consult the method of
singing, for it is in this way that the organ learns how to imitate the voice.112
Singers need to breathe in appropriate moments that coincide with musical
and textual phrases. They also must convey words clearly and effectively. In
addition, they should strive to produce a beautiful tone and a lyricism that is
full of different dynamics. By learning to sing or by observing singers, keyboardists can emulate these vocal skills when playing the harpsichord. Thus I
suggest that the term cantabile is a reminder to think lyrically and rhetorically
like a singer who conveys text through music.
C. P. E. Bach writes: The whole approach to performance will be greatly
aided and simplified by the supplementary study of voice and by listening to
good singers.113 He adds:
The keyboardist will learn to think in terms of song. Indeed, it is a good
practice to sing instrumental melodies in order to reach an understanding
of their correct performance. This way of learning is of far greater value
than the reading of voluminous tomes or listening to learned discourses.114
Most of the early sources do not specify what type of articulation should
correspond with cantabile playing. Manfredini is one of the first writers in
Italy to describe legato within the context of a cantabile style of playing. In his
section Del portamento della mano, he discusses a singing style and its
difficulty to achieve on the harpsichord. To do so, he teaches that a harpsichordist should not release a key until the next one is played. He insists that
his method is to be followed ma quasi sempre (almost always).115
Articulation
101
Although we find only a few writers equating cantabile with a legato style,
it is important not to associate legato solely with stile cantabile. What is important is for keyboardists to think vocally and lyrically as they play; they
should be encouraged to sing the music in their heads while playing. It is also
helpful to sing the music aloud when practicing, remembering to breathe at
necessary and musical moments.116 Last, when working on a piece and trying
to figure out what one wants to say with the music, one can make up a text
for it and dramatize it like an actor.
Detached Playing
We know from previously mentioned sources that all styles of articulation,
ranging from detached to connected, are indeed a part of musical performances of the Baroque period. Certain performers leaned more toward one
end of the spectrum. In this section, I include what some writers have to say
about the detached style of playing. Some of these observations are positive;
others are more critical.
In a letter to his parents, Franz Schubert criticizes the accursed chopping in which even distinguished pianoforte players indulge, and which delights neither the ear nor the mind.117 Although this does not mean that late
eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century trends favored a detached style, it
suggests that he observed performances that he disliked because of keyboardists choppy playing. This manner, choppy as it may have been, was likely the
result of a transitional period in which the early piano was emerging. With the
harpsichord still in fashion, keyboardists may have been adapting harpsichord
technique to the piano. In addition, the sustaining power of the fortepiano
was still in its early stages of development.
Mozarts performances were remembered by his successors for his detached style. Czerny, who could only have acquired such information through
Beethoven, describes Mozarts distinct and considerably brilliant manner of
playing, which was calculated rather on the staccato than on the legato.
Then [Beethoven] . . . called my attention to the legato which he himself
controlled to such an incomparable degree, and which at that time all other
pianists regarded as impossible of execution on the fortepiano, for even after
Mozarts day, the choppy, short detached manner of playing was the fashion.
In the latter years, Beethoven himself told me that he had heard Mozart
play on various occasions, and that Mozart, since at that time the invention
102

of the piano was still in its infancy, had accustomed himself to a mode of
playing on the clavier [harpsichord?], then more frequently used, which was
in no way adapted to the fortepiano. In the course of time, I also made the
acquaintance of several persons who had taken lessons from Mozart, and
found this remark justified by their playing.118
For seven years in Dorset, England, Muzio Clementi studied the works
of J. S. and C. P. E. Bach, Handel, and D. Scarlatti. Records show that he
practiced during this period only on a harpsichord, not a piano.119 The young
Mozart, in a letter to his father (1782), criticizes Clementi, whom he says is a
mere mechanic.120 Looking over Clementi sonatas, Mozart advised that his
sister should not practice his kind of music too much . . . so that she would
not spoil her quiet, even touch, and so that her hand would not lose its natural lightness, flexibility, and smooth rapidity.121 He added that Clementis
music produces an atrocious chopping effect. It is unclear whether Mozart
was criticizing Clementis compositions, his keyboard technique, or both.
Regardless, it seems that over time Clementi developed a rounder, smoother
way of playing. This may have been a direct result of technical maturity in
conjunction with the development of the English fortepiano. Some material
also points to Clementi having been inspired by listening to well known singers of the time.122 Clementi writes, The best general rule is to keep down the
keys of the instrument the full length of every note. He adds:
When the composer leaves the legato and staccato to the performers taste,
the best use is to adhere chiefly to the legato, reserving the staccato to give
spirit occasionally to certain passages, and to set off the higher beauties of
the legato.123
Several earlier writers oversimplify playing styles. One such remark is by

Justin Heinrich Knecht, who says in his Kleine theoretische Klavierschule (Munich, 18001802), The ordinary harpsichord demands that the notes should
be played with an elastic finger touch and be detached rather than held.124
Johann Georg Sulzer observes in Allgemeine Theorie der schnen Knste in Einzeln (1771): It is certain that the method of playing everything in a light and
almost playful manner has become so widespread and has influenced the art
of composition so profoundly that musicians seem ignorant of any profound
or majestic expression in music.125
Marpurg generalizes about periods in which connected or detached playing was the norm. Our great masters strove to bind their playing; our new
ones, to the contrary, seek to detach it, and consequently make their perfor-
Articulation
103
Example 3.10. Couperin, Le Moucheron, mm. 1516; fingerings from

Lart de toucher le clavecin, 66.
mance very thin and dry . . . a fault which speaks sufficiently for itself.126
In addition to this comment being highly subjective, it is inconsistent with
evidence from the sources, such as finger patterns found in manuscripts, that
suggest the opposite trend in detached or legato playing styles.
G. F. Wolf writes, In todays style of brilliant playing, the dtach [das
Abstossen] is very common; in Allegro the runs are all played detached, if
not expressly forbidden by the slur, as often happens.127 Although he writes
more about the clavichord, it is nonetheless interesting to read what he says
on producing a dtach:
One strikes the key with a stiff finger (as when playing a syncopation), and
then immediately draws the finger back towards the player so that it slides
off the front, and the key quickly springs back up. The tone, when thus
struck on good clavichords, sounds rather as if the consonants tnt! were
sounding along with it; this tnt! has a better effect than the tt one gets
when the finger releases the key without the slide-off.128
Example 3.10 is taken from Couperins Sixime Ordre, in which his fingering patterns (especially in the second of the two measures) suggest articulations in a detached style.
Last, I include a lengthy selection from Le Galloiss Lettre, in which he
compares jeu coulant (flowing playing) with the brilliant style, attacking
players for being too careless and for playing without much soul.
But when one observes closely, one finds that their trills are often too hurried, and as a consequence too abrupt, being produced by too much passion.
Because they are unequally played and poorly sustained, which deprives the
ornament of that which is most beautiful in playing; for there is nothing
which embellishes it more, nor that can make it appear beneficial than to
execute [it] equally and to sustain well. Those [keyboardists] who have a
104

rushed or faulty speed, who make their rhythm inaccurate because they
make it uneven, and do not keep time well enough to ensure the ultimate
accuracytheir playing is often confused, and they pass over so many keys
that one only hears half of them, sometimes none at all. This is because they
pass over [the keys] too quickly, do not play strongly enough for them to be
heard, or they strike the keys instead of playing them in a flowing manner.
In short, one observes in their playing nothing more than a perpetual trilling [une perpetuele cadence],129 which hinders one from hearing the melody
of the piece distinctly, and they continually invent passages, particularly in
octaves: something that Chambonnires rightly called cauldron-like playing.
Thus these are the faults to which those who play with this brilliant style are
commonly subject, [all for the purpose of] dazzling the world, and ignorance
does not permit them to recognize. There are very few masters who do not
succumb to these flaws.130
It is clear from these early sources that not every keyboardist in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries was capable of effectively producing a detached articulation at the harpsichord. Some applied it too liberally, while
others possessed poor technique. Deciding where to detach notes is only the
first step in the process of articulating music. The more challenging part is
calculating how much to detach notes. In addition to the finger technique
necessary to achieve a high level of playing with these varying degrees of
separation between notes, mental preparedness is requiredthat is to say,
when one wants to emphasize a note by articulating it, one has to release the
note prior to it. How quickly or slowly the finger releases from the preceding
key affects the tone of the following key. Again, I reiterate the importance of
close, constant contact between finger and key. Fingers that fly up and point
in different directions cannot have much control over detailed nuances of
articulation.
Silences
Various sources list silence as a part of certain ornaments. To Couperin, inserting the aspiration and the suspension give soul (lme) to the harpsichord:
Each note on the harpsichord has been fixed, and thus cannot be swelled or
diminished. It has seemed nearly untenable, up until now, for anyone to give
soul to this instrument. . . . The expressive effect that I propose makes its
effect in the cessation and suspension of the notes, made appropriately and
according to the character of the melodies of preludes and pieces. These two
Articulation
105
Example 3.11. Example 14. Couperin, Premier livre de pices de clavecin (1713),
Explication des agrments, et des signes: Aspiration et Suspension.
Example 3.12. Rameau, Pices de clavecin, Table des agrments: Suspension.
ornaments [the aspiration and the suspension], by their contrast, leave the
ear in suspense, so that on the occasions where bowed instruments make a
crescendo on their notes, the suspension of [the notes] of the harpsichord, by
a contrary effect, seems to make the ear hear what it expects.131
Couperins aspiration shortens the value of a note and thus creates a silence
after it. The suspension delays the initial sounding of a note, thus inserting a
brief silence before it. He tells us that when playing the aspiration, it is necessary to detach the note over which it is placed, less quickly in tender and slow
pieces than in those which are light and fast.132 As for the suspension, he says,
It is rarely used except in slow and tender pieces. The silence before the note
over which it is placed must be regulated by the taste of the performer.133
Both he and Rameau include examples of these agrments in their tables of
ornaments, first as they are notated, followed by an explanation of how they
should be played, as seen in example 3.11 and 3.12.
Saint-Lambert also has an ornament he calls aspiration, but it is not
the same as Couperins, having nothing to do with silence.134 However, SaintLambert does illustrate the dtach, which he attributes to DAnglebert and
106
which resembles Couperins aspiration. Saint-Lamberts example provides

two notes, the first of which has a dtach, the second of which has a tremblement.135 The first note is shortened and therefore produces a space before the
trilled note. Saint-Lambert explains the importance of detaching the note
before an ornament:
Practicing this dtach is highly necessary in certain pieces of lively tempo,
particularly when the note that precedes the trill is a degree higher, and
that which precedes the mordent is a degree lower. It is not inappropriate
in other pieces and on other occasions, but good taste will determine where
you must use it.136
In the late 1700s, Marie-Dominique-Joseph Engramelle invented the tonotechnie, a machine designed to preserve and repeat performances by setting
pins on a cylinder of a mechanical instrument. Through his recording experiments, he noticed that on keyboard instruments a finger that had just released from a note was often lifted long before being placed on the next and
that this method was vital for producing short rests, which he called silences
darticulation between the notes. He felt that no note was exempt from the
silence darticulation. Engramelles work was expanded by Franois Bdos de
Celles (known also as Dom Bdos), who claimed that it was a manner of conceiving music entirely different from the one taught in all the treatises upon
the art. Dom Bdos says that the treatises failed to take into consideration
the combination of silences, held, and touched notes.137
The musical examples above demonstrate how silence is notated as a type
of ornament for expressive purposes. The absence of sound (and the shortening or delaying of a note) is not only ornamental; it has many functions in
expressive playing. How we use silence at the harpsichord is analogous to how
we pause in speech or how dancers hold their bodies motionless between different gestures. As in the spoken word, in music we insert silences to breathe
and for dramatic expression. Pauses before and after notes are as much a part
of our musical delivery and declamation as are the melody, harmony, and
lengths of notes.
The spaces between notes, notated or not, function in multiple ways. No
matter how large or small the rest, a silence is used to clarify and to accentuate notes that follow and to separate ideas. The music does not stop during
rests; it allows for a previous musical thought to sink in, as it were, allowing
the listener to reflect upon an idea. Rests may also be pregnant with musical
and dramatic expectation.
Articulation
107
How harpsichordists prepare to play a note (or chord) is as important

as how they release from it. The silences at the ends of phrases, sections, and
pieces are particularly critical. How one releases the final note(s) determines
the final punctuation mark. A stupendously performed piece of music might
be ruined by the lack of appropriate note release. In general, the speed of
release usually mirrors the speed of the initial contact. A quickly spoken consonant at the beginning of a note usually beckons a quick release; conversely, a
slow release corresponds with a slowly initiated tone. If the jacks are released
too quickly after a piece in a slow character, it will sound like a noisy, sudden
jolt.138 If, at the end of a fast, showy, boisterous piece, the fingers slowly peel
off the keys one by one toward the palm of the hand, it will sound as if the
confident character has fizzled out or become weak. At the ends of pieces,
both when the tones are still sounding and when they have completely died
out, listeners may hear and watch the movement of the fingers as they lift
from the keys. How quickly or slowly the jacks are returned to their resting
position affects the musics drama and may make or break a performance. It
is a skill to be learned and fine-tuned over time.
Agogic Accents
In Kochs Lexicon we read the definition of an accent: The finger remains
on an accented note of this type for a moment longer than its notated duration requires.139 One of the many ways to emphasize a note or chord on the
harpsichord is to give it an agogic accent, applicable for both solo and continuo
playing.140 It involves three parts: (1) the shortening of the previous note (or
chord) to create a silence before the note in question, (2) a slight delay of the
note in question, and (3) the slight lengthening of that note.
According to Trk, agogic accents are a natural way of playing, similar to
a speaker accentuating important words or syllables by giving a slight pause
or glottal sound before them, in addition to lingering on the first part of the
word. In music, where to place an agogic accent is dependent on the importance of the note, the harmony, and the duration of the note and its relation
to the remainder of the passage.141
Agogic accents may be applied liberally and generously, even when they are
not specifically notated (such as with wedge marks). But in order for them to
be musically successful, they must be implemented tastefully, which requires
diversified degrees of inflection and emphasis, depending on the context and
character of the piece. The release of the previous note and the placement of
108
the accented note (or chord) will change in each situation. An agogic accent
in speech accentuates certain words or syllables that have special meaning or
significance. Sometimes it is a word (or note) that is repeated multiple times.
Stating them the same every time would produce a dull execution. The author
or composer reiterates ideas to affect the listener emotionally. Accentuating
each utterance with an increasing level of emphasis, such as through agogic
accents, is one way of dramatizing the expression. Likewise, in painting, the
artist highlights parts of a picture so that the spectators eye will notice those
particular areas. In a musical setting, where, when, and how much the harpsichordist inserts musical highlights is a journey of artistic refinement.
Timing
The preceding sections have dealt with different types of articulation on
the harpsichordordinary manner, legato playing, and detached playing.
What they do not mention is how the Baroque treatises describe the appropriate lengths of notes or silences. Constant and subtle manipulation of note
lengths is an integral part of harpsichord technique and vital to expressive
playing.
Both C. P. E. Bach and Trk try to illustrate in their treatises how long
to sustain a note within different musical contexts. According to Bach:
Tones which are neither detached, connected, nor fully held are sounded for
half their values, unless the abbreviation Ten. [hold] is written over them, in
which case they must be held fully. Quarters and eighths in moderate and
slow tempos are usually performed in this semidetached manner. They must
not be played weakly, but with fire and a slight accentuation.142
Most of Bachs discussions, however, define the manipulation of time in

broader terms. He says that the performer may extend certain notes and
rests . . . beyond their written length, for affective reasons.143
Trk dislikes the semidetached manner because it curtails notes by half
their value:
On the whole, this style of playing does not appear to me to be the best.
For (1) the character of the piece makes some restrictions necessary, (2) the
difference between the detached and ordinary manner of playing is virtually
removed, and (3) it would make the performance too short [choppy] if every
unslurred note were only held for half its value, with a rest taking up the
second half.144
Articulation
109
When extending the length of a note beyond its notated value, Trk
says that a note should never be prolonged by more than half its value. This
is common sense (assuming he is not referring to notes with fermatas placed
over them or notes at the end of a piece), for prolonging a note in mid-passage
for more than half of its notated value could affect the stability of the rhythm
and disrupt the harmony.
Much of the material in Rellstabs Anleitung mirrors that of Bachs Versuch but pays closer attention to certain topics, such as unmarked notes and
their note values in performance, especially when marked allegro or adagio:
With regard to the value of unmarked notes, one must ensure that quarter
and eighth notes in fast tempos such as the Allegro, etc., must only be held
for half their intrinsic value; sixteenths are played with the greatest rapidity,
but firmly; this also applies to eighth, sixteenth, and thirty-second notes
in slow tempos. All long notes, such as full and half notes in Allegros, and
quarter notes in Adagios, are held for their full value; but if these quarter
notes in the Adagio do not form part of the melody, but rather the accompaniment, they are held for half their intrinsic value, and played short like all
unmarked accompaniment notes.145
G. F. Wolf explains in his Unterricht im Klavierspielen that all notes should

be held for their full value unless other circumstances prevent this, such as
when indicated by dots or dashes.146
Sometimes there are clearly marked signs that tell us to prolong a note
or a phrase, such as the + or signs found in many German treatises and
compositions of the eighteenth century, which may signify an accent and/or
a slight lingering on the note. It is a musical device that calls for a slight rubato
but is not the same as the French ingal.147
Pasquali remarks that the holding of the fingers upon the keys the exact
length of the notes, produces the good tone; and the taking them off frequently before the Time, occasions the contrary.148 We know from his treatise that he prefers legato playing,149 but does he really dislike the shortening of
notes for expressive purposes? Or is he referring to a specific context or a bad
technique? Sometimes, when a key is touched too quickly and struck harshly
from above, rather than from on the string by depressing the key slightly with
the fingertip, the tone quality will indeed sound poor.
Couperin stresses the precise termination of a strings vibration: Take
great care . . . not to prolong notes beyond the value of their duration.150
Control of note lengths and the speed of their moment of release is possible
110
if one follows Couperins advice: The sweetness of touch depends again on

holding the fingers as close as possible to the keys.151
These selected quotations represent only a small portion of the discussions of appropriate note lengths. It is clear that these early writers shared
some ideas on the subject but differed in others. Likewise, modern performers, when interpreting pieces of music, can develop a sense of musicality and
understanding that will make full use of varied articulations and subtleties
of time manipulation.
4
Fingering
All his fingers were equally skillful; all were equally capable of the most
perfect accuracy in performance. He had devised for himself so convenient
a system of fingering that it was not hard for him to conquer the greatest
difficulties with the most flowing facility.
From J. S. Bachs obituary (1754), The Bach Reader
Comfort and Context

Several keyboard sources spanning the late Renaissance through the late
Baroque promote comfortable fingering patterns and flawless technique requiring minimal motion. The motivation behind such choices is the sameto
communicate the expressiveness of the music. In his Arte de taer fantasia,
after several pages devoted to fingering scale passages, Sancta Maria adds this
liberal approach to fingering:
Fingerings are often combined in many other ways, so numerous that no
rules can be given for them; these are up to the judgment of each individual,
who may best use his ingenuity as the need arises.1
In his Syntagma musicum (1619), Michael Praetorius has a generous, cheerful attitude toward fingering choices:
Let a player run up or down with the first or middle or third finger, ay, even
with his nose, if that could help him, providing everything is done clearly,
correctly, and gracefully.2
111
112
Of the late Baroque treatises, one of the most extensive discussions on

the subject of fingering is by C. P. E. Bach in his Versuch. He devotes his first
chapter to the topic and includes nearly one hundred rules, complete with
diverse examples. Bach lists correct fingering first of the three factors important to playing the keyboard tastefully.3
Both C. P. E. Bach and his contemporary Marpurg espouse relaxed and
comfortable fingering choices. Marpurg teaches:
Place no finger upon a note without having previously looked at the notes
to follow. Both comfort and proper positioning require this. . . . One must
always choose a fingering that requires the least amount of movement in
preference to that which necessitates a greater amount of movement.4
Similarly, Trk says, The most comfortable fingering, or that which

requires the least movement of the hands, is generally regarded as being the
best. He adds:
It is well known that fingering [Applikatur] is an essential and in more
than one respect a very important part of keyboard playing. Therefore, the
student must work very diligently in the beginning to acquire commendable fingering habits, because it is not possible to play in a well-rounded and
free-flowing manner when using poor and incorrect fingerings. It may also
be maintained with certainty that a large measure of agility either cannot be
achieved by poor fingering or then only with an inordinate amount of practicing. On the other hand, less time and effort are required to learn to play
quite difficult pieces readily and well when correct fingering is used.5
Rousseau stresses the importance of comfort in his Dictionnaire de mu

sique:
To finger: To direct the fingers in a convenient and regular manner on any
instrument, and principally on the organ or the harpsichord, in order to
play on it with the most ease and skill possible. . . . There are two methods
of playing on these instruments [organ and harpsichord]: accompanying and
[solo or obbligato] pieces. To play pieces, we pay attention to the ease of the
performance, and the elegance of the hand. . . . We must not place the same
finger successively on consecutive keys, but make use of all the fingers of
each hand.6
Comfort and convenience play significant roles in fingering choices, but musical declamation is the primary determining factor.
Fingering
113
The treatises and musical manuscripts reveal changes in compositional

styles and taste through various means, one of which is fingering. The most
notable difference in keyboard sources is the gradual shift from paired fingering to thumb-under patterns traceable from the late Renaissance through the
late Baroque. Fingering examples from the sixteenth and early seventeenth
centuries reveal abundant paired fingering patterns. These are mostly executed
with the three middle fingers, which facilitates shorter groupings of notes
within florid passagework. This is not to suggest an overall detached manner
of playing; rather, it implies a focus on great subtleties within each phrase,
not only an emphasis on a long, lyrical line (which is more characteristic of
the Romantic period). Likewise, examples of thumb-under usage may imply
longer lines and more legato playing, but that does not negate the need for
diverse articulations and inflections within a phrase. As unlikely as it would
be to use paired fingering, for instance, when playing Chopin, it would be just
as inappropriate to use only thumb-under patterns in virginal repertory.
The particular instrument may affect decisions about fingering patterns.
Playing on a muselar is a different experience than playing on an Italian, a
Flemish, or a late French harpsichord.7 How one plays a piece is influenced by
variations in general construction practices, individual voicing, touch, sound
quality, and size of the keyboard, including the possibility of a short bass
octave and/or split sharps in the lowest octave.8 The different features and
qualities that distinguish harpsichords from one another affect musical phrasing, tempo, articulation, and fingering patterns.
Just as interpreting a piece of music affects fingering choices, being historically informed about early fingerings can influence musical interpretation.
If the desired effect is to play a passage legato, fingering patterns may be chosen
that allow for smooth, connected playing. In contrast, fingering patterns can
facilitate a brilliant, detached style.
The context in which pieces are performed also affects fingering choices,
one of our primary tools for musical declamation and expression. Context
may include the size of the location and of ones audience, the acoustics of the
performance space, and the nature of the performancesolo or ensemble,
with or without dancers, concert or background music, a sacred or secular
occasion, and so on. Clothing is an influential factor as well. Occasionally,
harpsichordists are asked to perform in period costume, when the elaborate
dress, corsets, ruffles, layers, and decorative openings at the wrists may affect
the ability to play at faster tempos.
114
The following sections address various topics pertaining to fingering patterns. They include discussions of touch and technique as they relate to issues
of strong and weak beats, paired fingering, thumb usage, and contraction of
the hand.
Strong and Weak Notes

Fingering patterns at the keyboard help to convey the rhetorical aspects of
music. As in most languages, music has hierarchical aspects. Were every
note to be played exactly alike with the same inflection, the music would be
monotonous, just as in speech. To articulate clearly in music, certain notes
(or chords) receive more emphasis than others. Which notes to emphasize
depends on several factors: whether they fall on strong or weak beats; whether
their harmony creates a dissonance or consonance (the dissonances often
receiving more emphasis, resolving into their consonant harmonies on weak
beats); and syllabical stress, if applicable.
Late Renaissance and Baroque treatises discuss musical declamation in
terms of strong and weak notes, often expressed with good and bad fingers.
Many of these sources favor paired fingerings as a way to convey differences
between accented and unaccented notes. Dirutas Il Transylvano says:
As one final piece of advice, I should tell you which are the good and bad
fingers, for we speak of fingers in the same way as we do the good and
bad notes. They are indispensable for organists as well as for players of
dances [harpsichordists].9
Good fingers are to be used on prominent notes, bad fingers on weaker

notes. He labels the notes of his examples with the letters b for good finger (ditto
buono) and c for bad finger (ditto cattivo). He gives primary importance to the
three middle fingers and less attention to the thumb and little finger; however,
he is unique in regarding the middle finger (3) as a bad finger. Despite it being
a bad finger, he explains that it is nonetheless the finger used most often:
Take care, however, that the third or middle finger needs to play all the
bad notes, ascending and descending, as well as all the bad notes that leap.
Besides this, it is the finger played most often because nothing may be done,
whether ascending, descending, or leaping, without using it.10
Although Diruta insists that keyboardists follow his rules if they want
to have good technique and effective musicianship,11 he makes exceptions to
Fingering
115
his rules, such as in regard to the third finger, especially in rapid diminutions
and trills, where that finger may play good notes because the music moves so
quickly one does not notice a difference:
The bad notes often lend elegance to the good notes. Thus, in diminution,
it is better to focus on making the ornaments decorative and light than to
observe your [these] rules.12
Diruta departs from other Italian contemporaries in this matter, including Adriano Banchieris Conclusioni nel suono dellorgano, op. 20 (Bologna,
1609) or, several decades later, Lorenzo Pennas Li primi albori musicali per li
principianti della musica figurata (Bologna, 1672), which usually associates good
notes with the middle finger. Others use the third finger interchangeably on
both strong and weak beats. Contemporaries in the English virginalist school
also favor the middle finger on good notes, such as in pieces by John Bull and
Orlando Gibbons.13
Dirutas practice of putting the third finger on weak beats reflects some
of the earlier German sources, such as Buchners Fundamentbuch (1551). Other
German composers of the time, such as Elias Nikolaus Ammerbach, use the
middle finger for both good and bad notes.14
Depending on the context, Dirutas 2323 patterns may have implications
for lombardic rhythms (short-long short-long). His application of middle finger to bad notes also contrasts considerably with our modern application of
strong and weak fingers, in which we tend to favor fingers 1, 2, and 3, with the
ring finger (4) and little finger (5) being the weakest.
Dirutas ascending scales are played 2343434 in the right hand and 4323232
in the left hand if the beginning note is on a strong beat. He differentiates
between the right- and left-hand fingerings when playing descending scales
because he feels that the ring finger of the left hand is weaker than that of the
right. Thus, if the right hand plays 4323232 in such a passage, the left hand
might play 2323232, using just two fingers instead of three. He mentions the use
of the thumb by some players in left-hand ascending passages, but discourages
its use to avoid its landing on an accidental key, as this would thrust the hand
into an unnatural position: Truly, the thumb is very far from the black [accidental raised] key, and in order to reach it the whole hand is disturbed.15
Diruta prefers certain intervals to be played according to his rules, such
as putting fingers 2 and 4 on thirds, 2 and 5 on fourths, 1 and 4 on fifths, and
1 and 5 on octaves (he does not mention sixths). But he also reminds players
in all situations to seek convenience, first and foremost.
116
To the keyboardist of today, such fingering combinations may at first

seem awkward and cause the thumb or entire hand to feel tired or stressed.
This may be especially true for students who come to the harpsichord from
a background in piano. Tension only impedes our ability to play with paired
fingering patterns. Even players of the sixteenth century had difficulty when
learning to play with these early fingering patterns. Diruta observes:
From much experience, I find one difficulty, and this is the manner of using
the fingers of the right hand. When the fingers are playing an ascending passage, they straighten out. The index finger is tense, the thumb is forced beneath the hand, and the little finger is arched too much, causing the muscles
of the hand to tighten and become tense, thereby inhibiting the agility of the
other fingers. So it is that many organists, having acquired these bad habits
from the start, rarely achieve the sonorous harmony that should be apparent
in their playing, whereas had they kept their hands light and supple, they
could play the most difficult passages with ease.16
From the Spanish keyboard sources, between the mid-sixteenth century

and the early eighteenth, there are six writers who discuss keyboard fingering:
Juan Bermudo, Luis Venegas de Henestrosa, Toms de Sancta Maria, Hernando de Cabezn, Francisco Correa de Arauxo, and Fr. Pablo Nassarre.17
These sources are fairly consistent in their approach to early keyboard fingering. Despite the lack of discussion of good and bad fingers, the sources share
the use of paired fingerings to achieve metrically accented or unaccented
notes. Of particular interest is Sancta Marias description:
[It is necessary] in making ascending runs with the right hand toward the
upper register (which ascent is commonly executed with two fingers, the
third and fourth), to raise the third finger more than the fourth after each
stroke of the key, and not to raise the fourth more than is sufficient to separate or detach it from the key, so that it will appear as though it were being
drawn along the keys. Moreover, the fourth finger must strike the tips of the
keys, with the third further in, and the second finger must remain somewhat
contracted and more elevated than the third. With the second finger held in
this fashion, it must adhere to the third finger, and thus the hand achieves
more force. Without all this it is impossible to produce ascending notes with
perfection.18
Sancta Maria takes into account both the shape of the hand and the muscular ability of the fingers. Too often, modern keyboardists, especially those
Fingering
117
Figure 4.1. Hand position using paired fingering of the middle and ring fingers
as described by Sancta Maria. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
new to the concept of early fingerings, will attempt to play these fingering patterns with their fingers completely parallel, or too flat, too curved, or too far
from the keys. Owing, perhaps, to a natural response when trying something
new and seemingly difficult, they frequently tighten their wrists, which works
against their efforts. The wrists need to be supple and flexible.
According to Sancta Maria, the middle finger, which is usually the longest, is held further into the keys. The ring finger, which is generally the
weakest finger, should not be lifted off the keys. By sliding it along the keys,
the middle finger may cross over it. It helps to do this by turning the hand
slightly outwards and opening up the palm. In doing so, the thumb and little
finger naturally relax and lean slightly in toward the other fingers or under
the palm while the three middle fingers play. Figure 4.1 demonstrates my right
hand playing in this manner.
Paired fingering patterns continue to appear in treatises and musical
manuscripts throughout the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. In 1665,
Nivers provides a scale fingering that uses the thumb along with such patterns. In example 4.1, his choice of 3434 (and other adjacent fingers) on weak
118
Example 4.1. Nivers, Livre dorgue I, De la position des doigts. The eighth rest, second
measure, is original and probably meant to be a quarter rest.
Example 4.2. Alessandro Scarlatti, Toccata no. 1, mm. 69.
beats naturally produces a strong-weak accent, a slight long-short long-short

rhythm, and possibly a slurred two-note pattern.
Alessandro Scarlattis keyboard toccatas have received relatively little attention. Unlike the prolific output of keyboard sonatas by his son Domenico,
Alessandro is remembered more for his vocal works. More didactic in nature,
and nowhere near as harmonically rich or diverse in texture as toccatas by
Frescobaldi or Froberger, they are worth studying for the composers fingerings. Scarlattis inconsistency is intriguing; in the fingerings in his Toccata no.
1 in G Major, for instance, he employs nearly every type of fingering pattern
imaginable, including modern scale fingerings that use the thumb, paired
fingerings, fingerings in which the middle finger crosses over the fourth, patterns where fingers 2 and 4 play on repeated descending adjacent notes, and so
on. Occasionally, he even puts the thumb on a raised accidental key and uses
different fingerings for repetitions of the same passage, as, for example, near
the beginning of his toccata (see example 4.2), where he has ascending and
descending scales in C major, first in the right hand and then in the left. The
right hand ascends with the fingers 12343435, but when the left hand imitates
this passage, it uses 54321321, a more modern system, in which the middle finger crosses over the thumb, enabling a more connected articulation. It seems
Fingering
119
Example 4.3. Alessandro Scarlatti, Toccata no. 1, mm. 2728.
Example 4.4. A. Scarlatti, Toccata no. 1, mm. 4344.
he intended a specific type of phrasing for each passage, because his descent
in the right hand uses a modern fingering of 54321321 (like the left hands
ascent), and the descent in the left hand mirrors the right hands ascending
passage, using 1234343(4). Also, he may be acknowledging more suppleness
for the paired fingers in the left hand.
Similarly, he employs different fingerings in separate appearances of
another type of passagework, such as when pairs of notes descend in twos,
using LH32323232 in one instance but LH4242424 in its repeat occurrence.
Compare the fingering patterns in examples 4.3 and 4.4.
Multiple purposes may be inferred from the fingerings supplied in this
toccata: that Scarlatti wants varied articulations for the same type of passages,
or that he wants to demonstrate that there are numerous ways to finger a passage or else to develop flexibility by using nonadjacent fingers.
Fingering patterns apply not only to passages, such as scales and runs,
that may require paired fingerings but to chords and grace notes as well. As
mentioned earlier, we often decipher good and bad notes by which beat they
fall on as well as by their harmonies.
To emphasize the dissonance and its consonant resolution, the keyboardist may do a number of things, such as articulate before the beat, arpeggiate
the chord, lengthen the note, and slur strong notes to weaker notes. For instance, in John Dowlands Pavana Lachrymae set by William Byrd (example
4.5), in the first beat of m. 2 there is a strong beat with a dissonant harmony
(the interval of the seventh created between the A and B-flat) followed by a G
on a weak beat. Articulating before this chord will emphasize this dissonance.
A practical fingering choice here might be to place the third and fifth fingers
120
Example 4.5. John Dowland, Pavana Lachrymae, set by William Byrd, mm. 78.
Example 4.6. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasia, f. 44.
of the right hand on the A and D of m. 2 so that the A slurs into the G with
the second finger. In doing so, a dynamic shape is created that produces a
crescendo into the downbeat of the second measure and a diminuendo when
the A moves to the G.
Diversity of fingering choices (and thus the possible varied types of ar
ticulation) enhances the rhetoric, drama, and overall expression of a piece. The
more supple ones fingers, the more easily these subtleties may be realized.
Use of the Thumb

Because our forerunners rarely used the thumb, it got in the way. Hence
they often found that they had too many fingers. . . . Today, despite
improvements in the use of the fingers, we find, at times, that we have too
few of them.
C. P. E. Bach, Essay on the True Art
of Playing Keyboard Instruments
One of the more frequently asked questions is whether or not early keyboard
fingerings make use of the thumb. Realistically, the thumb is indeed a part of
early keyboard playing, but practice changed over 250 years. Both treatises
and music manuscripts from the late sixteenth century to the late seventeenth include the thumb less than those of the eighteenth century, but they
do not exclude it. It may come as a surprise to some musicians that what we
Fingering
121
Example 4.7. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasia, ff. 40v, 43.
consider modern scale fingerings (RH12312345 ascending or RH54321321

descending) appear in sources as early as the sixteenth century, such as in
Sancta Marias treatise (example 4.6). His treatise contains numerous examples of how to finger scale passages in diatonic keys.19 Scale passages with
longer note values have more paired fingerings, while the same passages with
smaller note values employ four-finger patterns that include the thumb (see
example 4.7).
Corrette, writing nearly two centuries after Sancta Maria, uses a similar
fingering. The right hand plays a descending C-major scale with the fingers
43214321 and 12341234 for the ascending scale. The left hand employs the same
fingering, but in the opposite direction.20
Manuscripts of the early virginalist repertory, from both the Dutch and
English schools, use paired fingering as well as the thumb. In fact, much of
the virginal repertory is so virtuosic that it requires the use of the thumb in
many passages. This applies, for instance, to many pieces by John Bull, Giles
Farnaby, and Jan Pieterszoon Sweelinck. The thumb is especially necessary
in the pieces with more chord-like textures, as in some of Sweelincks Mein
Junges Leben variations.
Similarly, evidence of increasing frequency of thumb usage in the eighteenth century does not mean that the earlier methods of paired fingerings
and the predominance of the middle fingers were no longer in fashion. Nevertheless, the thumb was not used as often as in current fingering practices.
As early as 1650, Denis advocated equal inclusion of the thumb:
When I started to study, teachers said as a maxim that one should never play
with the thumb of the right hand; but since then I have realized that if one
had as many hands as Briareus had, one would use all of them, even if there
were not enough keys on the keyboard.21
122
Example 4.8. Couperin, Lart de toucher le clavecin, Manire plus commode pour les
tons diss et bmoliss.
Couperin reflects this pivotal point of evolving fingering practices in the

way in which he starts scale passages with the thumb, but, as in the case of an
example in G Mixolydian, he completes the ascending passage with a paired
fingering pattern of 3434 in the right hand.22 Or, as seen in example 4.8, he
begins an A major scale with the thumb but does not cross the thumb under
after playing the third note; instead, he uses fingers 12342345. This fingering
opens up articulation to create a gesture that seems to grow in volume or gain
a feeling of lifting off the ground, slightly suspended in time and space, at the
top of the scale.
Couperin purports to be the inventor of the new, more progressive fingering method, claiming, Until now there has not yet appeared any method
for the harpsichord.23 His own fingerings, he feels, represent the modern
style. In addition, he feels they are not just preferable but the true way,24 in
particular, for passages with thirds. Example 4.9 is Couperins representation
of the old way of playing. Example 4.10 shows his modern manner of playing
this same passage in a more connected way. He adds boldly:
I am certain that few people in Paris are still infatuated with the old maxims, Paris being the center of what is good. But as up until now, there has
been no method dealing with good taste in playing, and as this one may be
read elsewhere, I felt that nothing should be omitted.25
Couperins early fingering patterns for playing consecutive thirds appear to be invented by him, not based on an earlier treatise or example. His
proposed old fingerings are unrealistic, in that they create an articulation
between every eighth note and avoid any relationship between strong and
weak beats, grouped notes, or phrasing. Ironically, he includes early fingerings in some of the preludes in his Lart de toucher le clavecin, where he gives
right-hand patterns of 12334 for an ascending five-note scale passage that is
embraced by a slur, or 5433232 for a descending scale passage.26 Furthermore,
his claim about being the first and only author to discuss beautiful and tasteful harpsichord playing has an air of self-righteousness. Clearly, he was not
Fingering
123
Example 4.9. Couperin, Lart de toucher le clavecin, Manire ancienne de faire plusieurs
tierces de suite.
Example 4.10. Couperin, Faon moderne pour couler ces mmes tierces.
aware of the fingered examples left by the English virginalists that reveal the
same pattern he suggests for parallel thirds.27
Hartongs Clavier-Anweisung also provides an example for fingering
thirds but uses fingers 1 and 3 on strong beats and 2 and 4 on weak beats or,
as a second possibility, 1 and 4 alternating with 2 and 5 in the same manner.28
His treatise, published more than thirty years after Lart de toucher le clavecin,
reflects the growing trend toward the inclusion of the thumb.
Saint-Lambert, whose Principes du clavecin antedates Couperins Lart de
toucher le clavecin by fourteen years, similarly reflects a transition period for
fingering scales. Saint-Lambert is more inclusive of the thumb in his section
Remarques, in which he favors equal use of all the fingers:
Because if one observes all the skillful Parisian masters, one will find that
those who are distinguished the most by the beauty of touch and surety of
execution are those who make equal use of all their fingers.29
In the fingered passages of his treatise, he combines thumb patterns with

paired fingerings. One example is an A Dorian scale, for which the right hand
plays 12343434 when ascending and 54323232 when descending; similarly, the
left hand plays a G Mixolydian scale using fingers 43212121 when ascending
and 12343434 when descending.30
Rameau, whose remarks on using the thumb in continuo playing are
rather conservative,31 is more inclusive of the thumb in solo playing, in particular for roulements.32
124
Example 4.11. Miller, Institutes, C-major scale, part 2, progressive lessons for practice.
Example 4.12. Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord, lesson 7.
To continue a roulement . . . one simply needs to get used to passing the

thumb under any desired finger and to passing one of these other fingers
over the thumb. This manner of playing is excellent, especially when the
roulement includes sharps and flats; more specifically, it enables the practice
of certain batteries.33
Miller provides a modern fingering in his Institutes for a C-major scale

(example 4.11; the thumb is marked +). Pasquali also uses the thumb (marked
0) in scale patterns (example 4.12). Pasqualis right-hand fingering mirrors a
modern scale pattern of 12312345. Note where he puts the thumb for the left
hand: on C and F instead of C and G. This puts more strain on the hand,
requiring a wider stretch of the thumb when it passes under the palm after
the fourth finger plays G. I see no meaningful intention here other than the
possibility that it was either a mistake or a way to present different options of
playing scales, similar to the inconsistencies seen in the Alessandro Scarlatti
examples.
Fingering
125
C. P. E. Bach describes the thumb as the finger that most determines the
relaxed nature of good keyboard technique:
Those who do not use the thumb let it hang to keep it out of the way. Such a
position makes even the most moderate span uncomfortable, for the fingers
must stretch and stiffen in order to encompass it. May anything be well
executed this way? The thumbs give the hand not only another digit but also
the key to all fingering. This principal finger performs another service in that
it keeps the others supple, for they must remain arched as it makes its entry
after one or another of them. . . . Those passages, which, without the thumb,
must be pounced upon with stiff, tensed muscles, may be played roundly,
clearly, with natural extension, and a consequent facility when it lends its
assistance. This principal finger performs a service because it keeps the other
fingers flexible in that they must bend every time that the thumb presses
in next to one or another finger. . . . It is self-evident that the slackness of
the [tendons] and the curving of the fingers cannot be maintained in leaps
and wide stretches . . . but these are very rare occasions, and Nature herself
teaches them.34
My experience shows that a much rounder, pleasing tone may be produced from the harpsichord when the hand does not stretch (except in cases
where it is necessary to hold notes down in wide leaps). When the hand does
not need to hold notes down for a leap, stretching the fingers causes unnecessary tension in the hand. A more relaxed hand position allows for more
control. In leaps, a better tone is produced when the fingers peal off from each
key and move gracefully with the whole hand to the next note.
We know that Bach supports the need for relaxed tendons when playing
the keyboard. His comments suggest that he has seen poor hand and finger
movements, due to stiff tendons and tight muscles, which he claims were
caused by not using the thumb. Indeed, there are numerous passages that
may be played roundly and clearly without the thumb, but it depends on
the context and on the individual technique of the player. For his music, it is
necessary to employ all of the fingers.
C. P. E. Bach reflects upon hearing his father talk about the less frequent
use of the thumb by earlier keyboardists:
My deceased father told me that in his youth he used to hear great men who
employed their thumbs only when large stretches made it necessary. Because
he lived at a time when a gradual but striking change in musical taste was
126

taking place, he was obliged to devise a far more comprehensive fingering,
and especially to enlarge the role of the thumbs and use them as nature intended; for, among their other good services, they must be employed chiefly
in the difficult tonalities. Hereby, they rose from their former uselessness to
the rank of principal finger.35
Trk shares C. P. E. Bachs view of employing as many fingers as possible. In fact, both of these eighteenth-century German authors banter about
wanting even more than the given ten fingers:
All fingers must be utilized in playing, for there are certain passages which,
without the thumb or the little finger, may either not be played at all or, at
least, only clumsily and falteringly. Therefore, it is not correct to let these
two fingers be idleespecially the thumbor to use them only in time
of utmost need. Our present compositions are for the most part so constituted that one often wishes for even more fingers. Formerly this wish would
probably have been superfluous, because the older manner of composition
was quite different from ours now. At present, it is not possible to play some
passages reliably without the thumb, assuming that one does not want his
hands always jumping back and forth on the keyboard or even have his arms
moving about here and there. Those who play in this manner certainly do
not exhibit the best execution.36
Although Trk does not specify to which textures he refers, I suspect he

means multi-voice in fugues, larger and more diverse chords, flashier virtuosic
pieces that require hand-crossings, the frequency of diatonic scale passages,
etc. These musical textures are frequent in pieces from the High Baroque
(although they are found in some earlier pieces as well). A few of Domenico
Scarlattis sonatas contain chords that require not only every finger but some
fingers to play more than one note at a time; they are the tone clusters of the
eighteenth century! J. S. Bachs partitas, Handels suites, and C. P. E. Bachs
sonatas and fantasies are full of chordal textures and virtuosic running passages that require all the fingers, especially the thumb as a pivot finger.
Even among the writers advocating equal application of all the fingers,
there is no one who encourages the use of the thumb on a raised key, except
on rare occasions. Sancta Maria is among the earliest authors to discuss this
practice: One must never strike a black note with the thumb except when
playing octaves with either hand, or when through necessity nothing else can
be done.37 Over a century later, Saint-Lamberts fingerings show that the
three middle fingers primarily play accidentals because that forms a good
Fingering
127
Example 4.13. C. P. E. Bach, Versuch, chap. 1, fig. 47.
hand posture and keeps the hand parallel to the keys. Other authors who
similarly caution against using the thumb on accidentals discuss this in contexts where the thumb acts as a pivot. For instance, C. P. E. Bach writes:
Crossing and turning, the principal means of changing the fingers, must be
applied in such a manner that the tones involved in the change flow smoothly. In keys with few or no accidentals, the crossing of the third finger over the
fourth and the second over the thumb is in certain cases more practicable
and better suited for the attainment of unbroken continuity than other
crossings or the turn. With regard to the latter, when a black [accidental]
key acts as the pivot the thumb is conveniently provided with more room in
which to turn than in a succession of white keys. In keys without accidentals
crossing should cause no stumbling, but in the others care must be exercised
because of the black keys.38
A few pages later he writes, From the study of these scales we learn that the
thumb is never placed on a black key, that it may be used after the second
finger, after the second and third fingers, or the second, third, and fourth, but
never after the fifth.39 Examples 4.13 and 4.14 demonstrate his admonition
against using both the thumb and little finger on raised keys, even when the
thumb would facilitate an easier stretch to the following note.
In these passages, depending on the size of the hand and its ability to
stretch the span of an octave with the index and little finger, Bachs fingerings favor a more connected style for adjacent notes but a more articulated
separation of octaves.40 Bach does, however, present an exception, because he
128
Example 4.14. C. P. E. Bach, Versuch, chap. 1, fingering, fig. 64.
Example 4.15. Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord, chap. 5,

Of Thumbs with Flats, fig. 18.
values comfort and relaxation in playing. Despite the fact that he says, The
thumbs and the little fingers of both hands should seldom be employed on the
raised keys, he admits. A slight discomfort being preferable to a great one,
it is better to commit the little finger or the thumb to a black [accidental] key
than to omit them and cause an excessive, hazardous stretch.41
Contrary to his dislike of thumbs on raised keys, he presents some fascinating fingering patterns that allow certain fingers to cross over rather
than under, such as putting the index finger over the little finger in the right
hand.
Unless the finger releases slightly early from the tied F, this fingering is
not comfortable. If he insists on placing the second finger on the G following the tied note, finger substitution on the F would make this shift much
smoother.
Pasquali also says that the thumb is to be used neither on accidental
keys (see example 4.15) nor in intervals smaller than a seventh, unless the
highest and lowest notes are on accidental keys (and are too wide to play with
fingers other than the thumb and little finger).42 Example 4.16 demonstrates
his avoidance of the thumb on raised keys in an arpeggiated passage.
Trk permits the use of the thumb and little finger on raised keys only
rarely unless the passage in question is such that no other way of playing it
is possible, for these more distant keys cannot easily be reached by those two
Fingering
129
Example 4.16. Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord,

Of Thumbs with Flats, fig. 19.
fingers without movement of the hands. He adds the following exception:

On the other hand, for skips and wide stretches, one may and must, in some
circumstances, use the thumb as well as the fifth finger on raised keys.43 Octaves, in his opinion, do not necessitate thumbs on raised keys, unless other
fingers are holding notes down and would thus require the little finger to play
an accidental key. He describes one other exception:
Another permissible motion of the type being discussed is referred to as
sliding (when in certain cases a finger is placed on a raised key and then
pulled down to an adjacent lower key). . . . This type of sliding is used for
detached as well as legato passages.44
Marpurg avoids the little finger on raised keys because it requires more
effort and is uncomfortable:
Since the little finger is closer to the keys than the thumb is, one may consequently use it to play the smaller keys [accidentals] more easily than with the
thumb. But since one always requires more effort to play the accidentals than
the larger keys, and since the little finger is the weakest of all the fingers,
this is also the reason that it is not necessary to employ it upon accidentals
as long as one is able to play the passage more comfortably with the other
fingers. But if this is no longer the case, one is free to use the little finger on
accidentals, whether in running through scales, or in arpeggios, in sustained
passages in one or two parts, by steps or leaps, etc.45
Miller advises: Never use the thumb on the short keys, except in very
particular cases of many sharps or flats, where it cannot always be avoided.
In addition: The natural place of the right hand thumb in ascending notes is
immediately after, or to the right of the short keys [raised] and in descending
[passages] its place is immediately before a short key. . . . The natural place for
the bass or left hand thumb ascending is before a short key, and in descending
[passages it] is generally immediately after a short key.46
130
In Instructions for the Piano-forte or Harpsichord, Matthew Camidge does

not mention accidental notes specifically, but he does remark on the thumbs
role as a pivot finger in scale passages: In ascending the octave in the right
hand, slide the thumb neatly under the fingers; and in descending passages,
put the fingers neatly over the thumb, bend the fingers, and keep the wrist
up.47
Nassarre also advises keyboardists to avoid putting the thumb on raised
notes: Although with intervals of fifths and sixths, when the upper voice is
on a black key, it is more natural to play it with the index and little finger in
order to avoid the forced movement of situating the hand.48
Rameau, who like most French composers of keyboard music at this
time infrequently wrote pieces with many accidentals in the key signature,
teaches:
Avoid, as much as possible, playing a sharp or a flat with the thumb or little
finger, especially in running passages, making sure that when a sharp or a
flat is to be played that the thumb rests on the preceding key, as this will
facilitate your execution.49
In his Dissertation, which concerns continuo playing, he writes:

The thumb is not easily placed on a sharp unless the other fingers are placed
on natural keys. . . . If you happen to have such a small hand that you cannot
reach a seventh on the keyboard without the thumb, which is very rare,
except in children, then arpeggiate the chord, beginning with the lowest
finger, and let go of this finger the moment the little finger is to be placed on
its key. This aid has always been a success for me with young people, without
their execution suffering from it in the least. . . . Do not think, furthermore,
that I am excluding the thumb from the chords altogether. I am saving it
for doubling their notes, by placing it always at the octave of the little finger.
But I am taking good care to recommend this only when one is master of the
remainder.50
Contraction of the Hand

A few eighteenth-century treatises discuss the contraction of the hand, a
motion that consists of a frequent, subtle opening and closing of the palm.
This graceful and gentle motion avoids forceful playing and facilitates good
technique, which in turn allows for a beautiful tone. Pasquali explains contraction in more detail:
Fingering
131
Example 4.17. Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord,

Contraction of the Hand, figs. 1213.
To understand what is meant by contraction, we must suppose a passage

consisting chiefly of consecutive or following notes exceeding the compass
of five, for which two fixed positions of the hand are necessary. . . . The
contraction then happening betwixt the last note of the first position and the
first note of the second; observing, that the one is played by the thumb and
the other by the little finger; which contracts, as it were, the natural space
betwixt these two fingers.51
A few pages later, he adds:

By this time it must be obvious to the diligent learner, that the whole drift
of the foregoing rules is to enable us to keep the fingers down upon the keys
the entire length of the notes; of the necessity of which a little experience
will convince; nor will the rules for that purpose seem too intricate, if we
consider, that when passages do not exceed the compass of five notes, they
are played in one fixed position of the hand; and when they exceed that
number, by extending or spreading the fingers . . . but when one single note
. . . breaks the continuation, [they are played] by contracting the fingers
upon that note [so that] we will be enabled to play them all, without quitting the key of any note before its time. And that when we do not have the
advantage of a rest, we must have recourse to the thumb, which while it is
playing will give sufficient leisure, by its shortness, to the other fingers to
pass over it in descending, or whilst the other fingers are playing, it will
easily pass under them in ascending.52
Example 4.17 shows one of Pasqualis fingered musical exercises for contracting the hand.
In his Code de musique pratique, Rameau alludes to a graceful opening
and closing of the hand position:
As the hand opens, the fingers lose their roundness; but when left to act
with their own movement, they determine how the hand should adjust to
the smaller or bigger intervals that [the fingers] encompass, and all work
with ease; even the little finger adjusts in turn by advancing less on the key.53
132
Example 4.18. Miller, Institutes, contracting the fingers.
Example 4.19. Sancta Maria, four-note scale passages.
Miller discusses contraction in his Institutes:

Perhaps there is nothing more necessary in order to play well, than to attain
a thorough knowledge of contracting the fingers. It is from a want of this
knowledge that for many performers, finger passages [are played] in an
improper manner.54
He then provides two measures of the same passage (see example 4.18). Over
the first measure he writes, Example of the method many performers [use
to] finger the following passages, and over the second, The same passage as
it ought to be playd by contracting the fingers. He adds:
It may be observed that by the first way of fingering the above passage, the
position is alterd at the end of every four notes, consequently the vibration
of the Strings is interrupted, nor can every note be of an exact length. But in
the second way, by contracting the Fingers, there appears from the effect, to
be but one position: the Notes being all of a [i.e., the same] length, causes a
better Tone to be produced from the Instrument.
Although detached playing is possible with the fingering provided in the

second measure, it suggests a more legato style by allowing adjacent fingers to
play on the last and first sixteenth notes of every four-note pattern.
Contraction of the hand is a concept not only used in the eighteenth century but in the late sixteenth century as well. Although it may not be labeled
specifically as contraction, we see similar fingering patterns in early Spanish
treatises, such as by Sancta Maria (example 4.19).
Fingering
133
Figure 4.2. Hand position just after playing 4321, preparing to place the
fourth finger down on the key. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
Sancta Maria offers two distinct methods of fingering the passage. Using
the repeating pattern 43214321 demands a slight contraction of the hand at the
moment at which fingers 1 and 4 follow one another. I call it the crab walk
because of its horizontal, repetitive opening and closing motion. This fingering permits a fairly steady wrist. The alternate fingering of 43234323 requires
less of a contraction in the hand than it does a crossing of 3 over 2. It calls for
a slight flexibility in the wrist, which, by opening up on the little finger side to
turn inward toward the thumb, facilitates a smooth execution of the alternate
fingering. The fact that he offers various options for fingering this (and other)
passages demonstrates his open-mindedness on the subject.
I conclude this section with two photos taken of my hand contracting
while playing passages similar to the one given above by Sancta Maria in
example 4.19, seen in figures 4.2 and 4.3.
Artistic Freedom
Despite the detailed lessons provided by various treatises, some authors leave
room for artistic license. Pasquali is among them:
134
Figure 4.3. Hand position after the fourth finger has been placed down, preparing
to play the 4321 descending pattern. Photo by Wolodymyr Smishkewych.
When they [these rules] are perfectly understood, still there is room for the
genius of the performer to improve upon them, by altering now and then a
finger with a view to avoid any uncouth stretch of the fingers, or to introduce
a grace, or a chord.55
This is important to remember, especially when a student is seeking

the right way to finger a given passage. The shape of the hand determines
what feels comfortable, which, of course, changes from person to person. The
shapes of the musical phrases, however, suggest certain characters, which in
turn necessitate varied articulations. Carefully thought-out fingering patterns
help to aid the expression of these phrases.
I fondly quote the well-known Dutch harpsichordist Jacques Ogg, whom
I heard say to students in a master class, I prefer not to use the term early
fingerings; I prefer to call them expressive fingerings.56 How simply and
eloquently this comment describes the importance of deciding which fingers
to use at the harpsichord. By exploring fingering patterns outside of modern,
standard ones that exploit thumb-under usage, harpsichordists will develop
more dexterity of the three middle fingers and, as a result, be able to employ
Fingering
135
more diverse articulations. All fingering patterns should be for expressive

purposes, regardless of which fingers are used.
Bearing in mind that some fingering patterns may have been written by
someone other than the composer, consulting the fingerings in musical manuscripts and treatises gives insight into different ways of fingering, articulating,
and phrasing various musical passages. Harpsichordists should practice running passages with paired fingerings as well as ones that require the thumb to
pass under another finger. They should also practice playing simple five-note
CDEFG patterns with the same fingers but with different articulations. Trills
and other ornaments should be practiced in all keys and with diverse finger
combinations. When practicing these and other exercises, it is important to
remember at all times to maximize the control of the fingers and fingertips by
maintaining a close connection to the keys. One of the benefits of practicing
simple, isolated exercises is that it allows the eye to observe the hands and
fingers carefully without having to focus on the score. By careful observation
of the fingers when playing, harpsichordists can become their own teachers.
Conclusion
To summarize, the main points needed to achieve a good technique include

but are not limited to (1) the use of an excellent instrument, (2) good musical
training, (3) an upright and comfortable posture, (4) frequent practice, (5) relaxation, (6) supple fingers with independent and even strength, and (7) finger
connection to the quill against the string. The following tools are needed in
ones musical vocabulary: (1) variety of touch and articulation, (2) diversity
of fingering patterns, (3) imagination, and (4) a sense of drama. Improving
touch at the harpsichord may also be enhanced by listening to others play,
both in live performance and on recordings.
The above-listed factors account for J. S. Bachs flawless technique at the
keyboard, as described by Forkel:
Bachs easy, unconstrained use of the fingers, his musical touch, the clarity
and precision of every note he struck, the resourcefulness of his fingering,
his thorough training of every finger of both hands . . . all contributed to give
him almost unlimited power of his instrument.1
One of the challenges in developing good technique is attaining strong,

independent fingers that retain suppleness and relaxation. As with an athlete
or a dancer, the fingers need to be both autonomous and limber. In many
ways, the old saying less is more applies to harpsichord touch. There is a
graceful poise required of the fingers, no matter what the mood: whether
slow and sustained, or fast and virtuosic. In striving for this most refined
and elegant manner of touching the harpsichordla douceur du toucherthe
harpsichordist may achieve a solid technique and a beautiful tone.
136
Appendix
Brief Biographical Notes on People
Mentioned in the Text
Agricola, Johann Friedrich (172074)

German composer and writer on music.
A student of J. J. Quantz and also C. P. E.
Bach, with whom he collaborated on
an obituary of his father, J. S. Bach, in
1754.
Bach, Johann Christian (173582)

German composer and keyboardist. The
youngest son of J. S. Bach. Collaborated
with F. P. Ricci on Mthode ou receuil de
connaissances lmentares pour le piano
forte ou clavecin (ca. 1788).
Ammerbach, Elias Nikolaus

(ca. 153097)
German organist and arranger of key
board music. His earliest publication,
Orgel oder Instrument Tabulatur (1571,
2/1583), was one of the first collections
for the organ to be printed. It also
introduced a new German organ tab
lature, in which letters were assigned
to pitches with rhythm-signs above
them. According to Ammerbach, the
pieces in it could be played on vari
ous keyboard instruments, including
harpsichord. His second publication,
Ein new knstlich Tabulaturbuch (1575),
included vocal intabulations and a
praeambulum.
Bach, Johann Sebastian (16851750)

German composer and keyboard player.
Recognized during his lifetime for his
ingenuity as a keyboard virtuoso and
remembered posthumously as one of
the greatest composers of the Baroque
period. Admired for the versatility of
his musical language, mastery of fugal
writing, and prolific output of works that
spans solo instrument pieces to chamber,
choral, and orchestral. His student J. F.
Agricola and C. P. E. Bach put together
a biography with a summary catalog of
his works, published as Nekrolog (1754).
Banchieri, Adriano (15681634)
Italian theorist, organist, composer, and
writer about music.
Bach, Carl Philipp Emanuel (171488)

German composer and keyboardist. The
second son of J. S. Bach. Wrote Versuch
ber die wahre Art das Clavier zu spielen
(1753/1762).
Bermudo, Juan (ca. 1510after 1559)

Spanish music theorist. Author of sev
eral works, notably Declaracin de instrumentos musicales (Osuna, 1555).
137
138
Appendix
Boyvin, Jacques (ca. 16531706)

French organist and composer. In 1674,
he held the post of organist at Notre
Dame Cathedral, Rouen. His Trait
abrg de laccompagnement pour lorgue et
pour le clavessin was first published as the
preface to his second Livre dorgue (Par
is, 1700) and was later printed separately
(Paris, 1705, and Amsterdam, n.d.).
Broderip, M. Robert (ca. 17581808)
English organist and composer. Wrote
songs and keyboard pieces, including or
gan voluntaries (op. 5, 1785) and a concer
to for harpsichord or piano (op. 7, 1785).
Buchner, Hans (1483ca. 1538)
(Hans Buchner van Constanze.) Ger
man organist and composer. His Abschrifft M. Hansen von Constantz des wyt
beriempten Organisten fundament buch
sinen kinden verlossen (ca. 1520) is one
of the earliest sources of information
on keyboard fingering. In 1551 it was
prepared by Christoff Piperinus and has
survived in three manuscripts in both
German and Latin. It is often referred to
as the Fundamentum or Fundamentbuch.
Bull, John (ca. 15621628)
English composer, organist, harpsi
chordist, and organ builder. Active in
both England and The Netherlands, he
was an important composer of virtuosic
keyboard music for the virginal.
Burney, Charles (17261814)
English musician, composer, and music
historian.
Byrd, William (ca. 15401623)
English composer. One of the founding
fathers of the English virginal school,
characterized by virtuosic keyboard

figuration and the variation style. His
works include English and Latin liturgi
cal vocal music, consort music, songs,
and keyboard pieces. His works for
keyboard range from fantasias, pavans,
and galliards to variation sets based
on popular songs. Several of his pieces
were published in My Ladye Nevells
Booke, the Fitzwilliam Virginal Book, and
Parthenia, together with works by John
Bull and Orlando Gibbons.
Cabezn, Antonio de (ca. 151066)
Spanish composer and organist. A musi
cian at the court of Queen Isabella and
chamber musician to Charles V. His
compositions include liturgical works,
tientos, canciones glosadas, motets, and
discantes. Although much of his music
reflects distinct traits particular to
Spanish styles, his works also show the
influence of his journeys with the royal
chapel throughout Europe.
Cabezn, Hernando de (15411602)
Spanish organist and composer. Son of
Antonio de Cabezn. Added a preamble
to his fathers works, the Obras de msica
para tecla, harpa y vihuela, in which,
among other topics, he discusses finger
ing and ornamentation.
Camidge, Matthew (ca. 17601844)
English organist, violinist, choir director,
composer, and arranger. Wrote Instructions for the Piano-forte or Harpsichord
(1795).
Chambonnires, Jacques Champion de
(160272)
French composer of solo harpsichord
music. An organist and harpsichordist
Appendix
in the royal chapel. Often regarded as
the father of the French school of harp
sichord playing.
Chopin, Fryderyk (181049)
Leading nineteenth-century Polish com
poser and pianist, later resident of France.
Clementi, Muzio (17521832)
Italian-born English composer, key
boardist, and teacher. His Introduction
to the Art of Playing on the Piano Forte
(1801) was published several times and
translated into several languages. The
treatises musical compositions (for
which he provides suggested fingering
patterns) include pieces by various Ba
roque composers, such as F. Couperin,
G. F. Handel, and Arcangelo Corelli.
Correa de Arauxo, Francisco
(15841654)
Spanish organist, theorist, and com
poser. His music is found in his treatise
Libro de tientos y discursos de msica
practica, y theorica de organo intitulado
facultad organica (1626).
Corrette, Michelle (170795)
French organist, teacher, composer, ar
ranger, and writer. Les amusemens du
Parnasse (1749, enlarged 2/1779/R) is of
interest to keyboardists, especially for
his fingered examples. Other pertinent
methods are his Premier livre dorgue, op.
16 (1737) and Le matre de clavecin pour
laccompagnement, mthode thorique et
pratique . . . avec des leons chantantes o
les accords sont nots (1753, 2/1790).
Couperin, Franois (16681733)
French composer and keyboardist.
From a family of musicians, he is known
139
as Franois le Grand, considered

one of the greatest composers of the
French Baroque. Composed numerous
chamber and vocal works as well as four
volumes of harpsichord suites (ordres)
published as his Pices de clavecin (1713,
171617, 1722, and 1730). One of the most
detailed and meticulous composers of
French ornaments. Author of the bestknown French harpsichord treatise,
Lart de toucher le clavecin (1716 and 1717).
Nephew of composer and musician
Louis Couperin.
Couperin, Louis (162661)
French composer, harpsichordist, organ
ist, and viol player. Uncle of Franois le
Grand. One of the leading harpsichord
composers of the seventeenth century.
His harpsichord pieces are found prin
cipally in the Parville and Bauyn manu
scripts and consist of pieces in different
keys, namely, unmeasured preludes and
allemandes, several dance-type pieces
typical of a French suite (courantes,
sarabandes, gigues, etc.), chaconnes, passacailles, one tombeau, one pavane, one
title piece, and doubles to pieces by other
composers.
Czerny, Carl (17911857)
Austrian piano teacher, composer,
pianist, theorist, and historian. A
piano student of Ludwig van Beethoven
(17701827) and a teacher to Franz Liszt
(181186) and other important pianists.
His technical exercises play an impor
tant role in many pianists training.
Besides the many exercises, studies, and
method books that he wrote for piano,
he and A. E. Mller (17671817) penned
the Grosse Fortepiano-Schule (1825).
Czernys lessons with Beethoven were
140
Appendix
composed of scales and other technical

exercises and included a study of C. P. E.
Bachs Versuch. Czerny spent time with
Clementi, familiarizing himself with his
pedagogical method and incorporating it
into his own teaching style.
Dagincourt, Franois (16841758)
French organist and composer. He pub
lished a Premier livre de clavecin (1733).
Daquin, Louis-Claude (16941772)
French organist, harpsichordist, and
composer. A leading improviser of the
eighteenth century; held major posi
tions as an organist. Composed Livre
de pices de clavecin (1735). The godson
of the French harpsichordist and com
poser Elisabeth Jacquet de la Guerre
(16651729).
Denis, Jean (ca. 16001672)
French harpsichord builder in Parisian
circle of Chambonnires and other
harpsichord players. Wrote the Trait de
laccord de lspinette (1643 and 1650).
Diruta, Girolamo (ca. 1554after 1610)
Author of first Italian method on organ
playing, Il Transilvano dialogo sopra il
vero modo di sonar organi, & istromenti da
penna (15931625), written as a dialogue
between Diruta and a Transylvanian
who came to Italy to learn the organ.
Dowland, John (15631626)
English composer and lutenist. Now
recognized as the greatest English
composer of lute and consort music.
His piece Pavana Lachrymae is found in
numerous manuscript sources and has
been used as a tune for multiple varia
tion settings for keyboard.
Duphly, Jacques (171888)

French harpsichordist, organist, com
poser, and teacher. The harpsichord
builder Pascal Taskin (172393) felt he
was one of the best teachers in Paris.
Duphly composed four books of Pices
de clavecin (1744, 1748, 1764, and 1768).
He also composed A Collection of Lessons for the Harpsichord (1756) and a con
tinuo treatise (1765) for Richard Fitzwil
liam (Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge).
Dussek, Frantiek Xaver (173199)
Czech composer, pianist, and music
teacher.
Engel, Carl (181882)
German organologist and musicolo
gist. Included in his publications are the
Pianoforte School for Young Beginners
(1853) and The Pianists Handbook: A
Guide for the Right Comprehension and
Performance of Our Best Pianoforte Music
(1853).
Engramelle, Marie-Dominique-Joseph
(17271805)
French builder of mechanical instru
ments. He wanted to invent a machine
that would preserve performances and
replay them on the keyboard. He devel
oped a form of shorthand for indicating
ornamentation and created a way of
converting played music onto a machine
by way of securing pins and staples on a
barrel (barrel pinning). His experiments
are discussed in his publication La tonotechnie: ou lart de noter des cylindres . . .
dans les instruments de concerts mchaniques (1775). Despite the imperfection
of his inventions, his experiments were
forward-looking and provide us with
insightful information about French
Appendix
and late Baroque performing practices.
Engramelles work was subsequently
revised and expanded by Franois Bdos
de Celles, known also as Dom Bdos
(170979), the French organ builder and
writer on organs.
Ftis, Franois-Joseph (17841871)
Musicologist, keyboardist, composer,
teacher, and critic. An influential figure
in nineteenth-century Europe within
the Franco-Belgian musical establish
ment. He studied harmony with J. B.
Rey, a student of Rameau. He published
several writings, including the Mthode lmentaire et abrge dharmonie et
daccompagnement (1823), the Biographie
universelle des musiciens (183544), the
Trait de lharmonie (1844), and the
Trait de laccompagnement de la partition
sur le piano ou lorgue (1829).
Fischer, Johann Caspar Ferdinand
(16561746)
German composer. His collections of
keyboard suites were published as Les
pices de clavessin (1696), Musicalisches
Blumen-Bschlein (1698), and Musikalischer Parnassus (n.d.). His suites combine
the French and German compositional
styles. Ariadne musica neo-organoedum
(1702) consists of twenty short preludes
and fugues, beginning in C major and
moving through eighteen keys with acci
dentals, ending in C minor (with a Cmajor Picardy third for the final chord).
J. S. Bach was familiar with this work,
which served as inspiration for his Das
wohltemperierte Clavier.
Forkel, Johann Nicolaus (17491818)
German music historian, musicologist,
theorist, and bibliographer. Began a de
141
tailed biography of J. S. Bach in the early

1770s, gathering much of his information
from Bachs sons Wilhelm Friedemann
(171084) and C. P. E. In 1801, Forkel took
the position of adviser for the Oeuvres
complettes de Jean Sebastien Bach (Hoff
meister und Khnels series of Bachs
keyboard music), which led to the firms
publication of Bachs biography ber
Johann Sebastian Bachs Leben, Kunst, und
Kunstwerke (1802). The biography focuses
mostly on Bachs keyboard repertoire and
his mastery as a virtuoso keyboardist,
composer, and pedagogue. Forkel had
collected the material for this book to be
part of the third and final volume of the
Allgemeine Geschichte, the first German
attempt at a comprehensive history of
music, but this third volume was never
completed. Well read on aesthetics, phi
losophy, and sociology, Forkel saw music
as a profound expression of human emo
tion, comparable to spoken language
full of rhetoric and articulation.
Forqueray, Antoine (ca. 16711745)
French composer, viol player, and teach
er. Father of the musician and composer
Jean-Baptiste (-Antoine) Forqueray.
Held the post of Musicien Ordinaire
de la Chambre to Louis XIV in 1689.
Known for his deep sounding devil
ish exploitation of the viol, in contrast
to Maraiss lighter, more melodic, and
graceful style.
Forqueray, Jean-Baptiste (-Antoine)
(16991782)
French composer, viol player, and teach
er. Son of Antoine Forqueray. As a child
prodigy, he played before Louis XIV.
Like his father, he left a small body of
compositions for the viol. In addition to
142
Appendix
his own pieces, he transcribed several of

his fathers works for the harpsichord.
Frescobaldi, Girolamo (15831643)
Italian composer, harpsichordist, and or
ganist. Although he did not compose an
enormous body of music literature, his
musical vocabulary and tonal language
were on a par with fellow Italian com
posers Carlo Gesualdo (ca. 15611613)
and Claudio Monteverdi (15671643),
innovative and cutting-edge. In addition
to toccatas he wrote lengthy variation
sets (partitas), canzonas, and ricercares.
Among other positions, he was organist
of St. Peters in Rome.
Froberger, Johann Jakob (161667)
South German Baroque composer
and keyboard virtuoso. A student of
Frescobaldi. His music for organ and
harpsichord includes toccatas, ricercares,
fantasias, and canzonas. Influential in
developing the keyboard suite. His pieces
reflect compositional styles found in the
German, French, and Italian traditions.
Gasparini, Francesco (16611727)
Italian composer, organist, and teacher.
It is possible he studied with Corelli
and the virtuoso keyboardist Bernardo
Pasquini (16371710) in Rome. His trea
tise Larmonico pratico al cimbalo (1708)
was published many times, even as late
as 1802.
Gibbons, Orlando (15831625)
English composer and keyboard player.
Although he was not as prolific in his
output of keyboard compositions as he
was in his vocal writing and consort mu
sic, his keyboard pieces deserve attention
for their skill and beauty.
Griepenkerl, Friedrich (17821849)

German music scholar. Studied music
theory, organ, and piano with Forkel
and promoted the works of J. S. Bach.
Together with the harpsichordist and
music editor F. A. Roitzsch, Griepenkerl
published Bachs keyboard works (1847)
and a critically corrected edition of
Bachs organ works (1844).
Handel, George Frideric (16851759)
German-born English composer. His
musical output spans nearly every musi
cal genre of his time, both vocal and
instrumental. His collection of harpsi
chord music, Suites de pices pour le clavecin (1720), while small in size compared
with the keyboard output of his contem
porary J. S. Bach, is full of beautiful and
virtuosic pieces that are reflective of vari
ous national styles.
Hanon, Charles-Louis (18191900)
French composer, organist, and writer.
Wrote methods for the piano, organ,
and keyboard accompaniment. Remem
bered for his Le piano virtuoso (1873) and
Ltude complte du piano.
Hartong [Hartung], Philipp Christoph
(170676)
Obscure German teacher who wrote
Dess musici theoretico-pratico . . . enthaltend eine methodische Clavier-Anweisung
(1749), written under the pseudonym P. C.
Humanus. It was the second part of a
large workthe first part of which is
devoted to music theory.
Hensel, Johann Daniel (17571839)
German writer, teacher, and composer.
He wrote the Ausbende Klavierschule
(1796).
Appendix
Hipkins, Alfred (James) (18261903)
English writer on musical instruments.
A pioneer in the revival of early keyboard
instruments, performing Bach on the
clavichord and harpsichord. Wrote many
articles for Grove 1 as well as articles on
pitch and the piano for Encyclopaedia
Britannica (9th ed.) He also published A
Description and History of the Pianoforte
(1896) and Musical Instruments: Historic,
Rare, and Unique (1896).
Hodermann, Georg Caspar (17401842)
German composer who composed sev
eral pieces for harpsichord, organ, or
piano. He wrote Kurzer Unterricht fr
Musik-Anfnger (1787).
Hllmandel, Nicolas-Joseph (17561823)
Alsatian composer and performer on
harpsichord, piano, and glass harmonica.
Lived and worked in London and Paris.
According to Ftis, he was one of C. P. E.
Bachs students and Mozarts patron.
His only compositions were for harpsi
chord or piano, sometimes with violin
accompaniment. Wrote Principles of Music Calculated for the Pianoforte or Harpsichord, and supplied the article Clavecin
for the Encyclopdie mthodique (Paris,
17911818).
Kapsperger, Giovanni Girolamo
(ca. 15801651)
German-born Italian composer, lutenist,
theorbist, and guitarist. Played a chief
role in the development of the theorbo as
a solo instrument.
Kirnberger, Johann Philipp (172183)
German composer and theorist. A lead
ing contributor to the Berlin circle of the
orists, which included Quantz, C. P. E.
143
Bach, and Marpurg. Studied violin,

organ, and harpsichord. According to
Marpurg, he studied composition and
performance with Bach for two years in
Leipzig. He wrote Die wahren Grundstze
(1773) with the assistance of J. A. P.
Schulz. Kirnberger held J. S. Bach in the
highest regard, admiring his ingenuity
as composer, performer, and teacher.
Kirnberger attempted to disseminate
Bachs method through his own teaching
and writing. His Clavierbungen (1762)
contains keyboard works arranged in
progressive levels of difficulty.
Knecht, Justin Heinrich (17521817)
German composer, music theorist,
and writer. Early training in organ,
keyboard, violin, and voice. Taught in
strumental lessons as well as courses in
music theory, acoustics, aesthetics, and
composition. Recognized for his teach
ing manuals, particularly his Orgelschule
(1795). Contributed to the Musikalische
Real-Zeitung, the Musikalische Korrespondenz der Teutschen Filarmonischen
Gesellschaft (178892), and Allgemeine
musikalische Zeitung.
Koch, Heinrich Christoph (17491816)
German theorist, composer, and violin
ist. Best known writings are his Versuch
einer Anleitung zur Composition (1782,
1787, 1793) and Musikalisches Lexikon
(1802).
Landowska, Wanda (18791959)
Polish harpsichordist, pianist, and com
poser. A leading figure in the twentiethcentury revival of the harpsichord.
Owned several Pleyel harpsichords,
which had pedals and the ability to pro
duce actual swells in dynamics.
144
Appendix
Lebgue, Nicolas (16311702)

French composer, organist, and harpsi
chordist. In 1678 appointed Organiste du
Roi. Composed two books for harpsi
chord and several manuscript pieces.
Le Gallois, Jean (16321707)
French academician, royal librarian,
abbot. Editor and founder of the Journal
des Savants. Wrote Lettre . . . Mademoiselle Regnault de Solier: touchant la
musique (1680), in which he discusses
various styles of harpsichord playing,
particularly that of Chambonnires and
Louis Couperin.
Lhlein, Georg Simon (172581)
German theorist, teacher, and composer.
Served as Kapellmeister to the Marien
kirche in Danzig. His Clavierschule
revised the material of C. P. E. Bachs
Versuch. Its second volume is a disserta
tion on playing figured bass.
Manfredini, Vincenzo (173799)
Italian singer, conductor, and harp
sichord teacher. His treatise Regole
armoniche, o sieno Precetti ragionati (1775,
enlarged 2/1797) focuses primarily on
figured bass but contains discussion of
Italian keyboard technique. It also con
tains harpsichord preludes, a description
of hand position, and discussions on
finger substitution and legato. He wrote
six harpsichord sonatas.
Marpurg, Friedrich Wilhelm (171895)
German theorist, composer, critic, and
journalist. Edited and contributed to
the periodicals Der critische Musicus an
der Spree (174950), Historisch-kritische
Beytrge zur Aufnahme der Musik (1754
62, 1778), and Kritische Briefe ber die
Tonkunst (176064). His Die Kunst das

Clavier zu spielen, durch den Verfasser des
critischen Musicus an der Spree (1750/1755;
Fr. trans., Berlin, 1756 as Principes du
clavecin) discusses keyboard perfor
mance, figured bass, and composition.
Mattheson, Johann (16811764)
German composer, theorist, critic, jour
nalist, and lexicographer. His writings
cover nearly every aspect of eighteenthcentury music. His Grosse General-BassSchule (1731), an expanded version of the
earlier Exemplarische Organisten-Probe
(1719), and the Kleine General-Bass-Schule
(1735) are valuable to keyboardists learn
ing to play from figured bass.
Merbach, Georg Friedrich
(fl. mid- to late-1700s)
German harpsichordist and pianist.
Wrote Clavierschule fr Kinder (1782).
Mersenne, Marin (15881648)
French music theorist, philosopher,
mathematician, and writer on science.
Author of Harmonie universelle (1637).
Merulo, Claudio (15331604)
Italian composer and publisher. Ex
panded simple keyboard genres based on
vocal models into larger-scaled virtuoso
pieces idiomatic to the keyboard. His
madrigals, masses, and motets reflect
the mature Venetian style of the late
sixteenth century.
Milchmeyer, Johann Peter (17501813)
German piano builder and teacher. Along
with Dussek, Clementi, and A. E. Mller,
advocated for modern piano fingerings,
which are discussed in his book Die wahre
Art das Pianoforte zu spielen (1797).
Appendix
Miller, Edward (17351807)
English organist, composer, and histo
rian. Published Institutes of Music, or
Easy Instructions for the Harpsichord, op.
4 (1780) and Elements of Thorough Bass
and Composition (1787).
Mller, August Eberhard (17671817)
German conductor, flutist, keyboardist,
and composer. Author of Klavier- und
Fortepiano-Schule (1804 [as 6th ed. of
G. S. Lhlein, Clavierschule, 1765];
8/1825, ed. C. Czerny).
Nassarre, Fr. Pablo (ca. 1654ca. 1730)
Spanish theorist, composer, and organ
ist. His Esquela msica, segn la prtica
moderna (1723) took him over fifty years
to write. More than one thousand pages
long, the treatise covers an enormous
range of musical topics, including several
pages devoted to organ technique.
Nivers, Guillaume-Gabriel
(ca. 16321714)
French organist and composer. Became
organist of the Chapelle Royale in 1678.
The first of his three livres dorgue con
tains a preface on music and technique.
Parsons, John (fl. mid-eighteenth
century)
English keyboardist. Author of The Elements of Music with Progressive Practical
Lessons for the Harpsichord or Piano Forte
(ca. 1794).
Pasquali, Nicol (171857)
Italian-born English composer, violin
ist, and theoretician. Of importance to
harpsichordists are his instruction book
Thorough-bass Made Easy (1757) and The
Art of Fingering the Harpsichord, Illus-
145
trated with Examples in Notes, to Which

Is Added an Approved Method of Tuning
That Instrument (1760).
Penna, Lorenzo (161393)
Italian composer and theorist. Served as
maestro di cappella at various churches.
Of importance to harpsichordists is the
information on continuo playing in his
theoretical work Li primi albori musicali
(1684).
Perrine, Sr. (d. after 1698)
French theorist and lute teacher. His
publications include Livre de musique
pour le lut, contenant une metode nouvelle et
facile pour aprendre toucher le lut sur les
notes de la musique (Paris, 1679/R), Table
pour aprendre toucher le lut sur la basse
contine pour accompagner la voix (Paris,
1682, 2/1698), and Pices de luth en musique
avec des regles pour les toucher parfaitement
sur le luth et sur le clavessin (Paris, 1680).
Petri, Johann Samuel (17381808)
Cantor, pianist, organist, teacher, and
writer on music; also played the violin,
flute, cello, and harp. His most impor
tant work was his pedagogical treatise
Anleitung zur practischen Musik, vor
neuangehende Snger und Instrumentspieler (1767, enlarged 2/1782/R), covering
topics such as thoroughbass, playing
keyboard instruments, strings, flute,
and building and playing organs. His
Anleitung is significant historically for its
inclusion of instructions on how to sing
and play various instruments.
Piccinini, Alessandro (1566ca. 1638)
Italian lutenist, composer, and writer on
music. Piccinini published two volumes:
Intavolatura di liuto . . . libro primo (1623)
146
Appendix
and Intavolatura di liuto (1639). Claimed

to have invented the archlute. His pref
ace includes a concise but informative
manual on performance practice.
Pleyel, Ignaz Josef (17571831)
Austrian composer, conductor, music
publisher, and piano maker. Studied
with Haydn. Active in France, Germany,
England, and Italy.
Praetorius, Michael (15711621)
German composer, organist, and writer.
Extremely prolific; his works were sig
nificant in the development of musical
forms based on Protestant hymns and to
the polychoral chorale concerto, a likely
result of his familiarity with Venetian
music and musicians, such as Giovanni
Gabrieli (ca. 15541612). Over a thou
sand chorale and song arrangements
are included in his nine-volume Musae
sioniae (160510). Also wrote Terpsichore
(1612), a compendium of over three hun
dred instrumental dances, as well as a
three-volume treatise Syntagma musicum
(161420), a highly informative text on
instruments, musical practices, music
history, and other topics important to
performance practice in the seventeenth
century.
Quantz, Johann Joachim (16971773)
German traverso player, flute maker,
and composer. Worked at the courts of
Dresden and Berlin. Wrote Versuch einer
Anweisung die Flte traversiere zu spielen
(1752).
Rameau, Jean-Philippe (16831764)
French theorist, harpsichordist, com
poser of solo, chamber, and opera music,
and author of several theoretical works,
including Trait de lharmonie (1722),

Dissertation (1732), and the preface to his
second book of Pices de clavecin (1724).
Rellstab, Johann Carl Friedrich
(17591813)
German music publisher, keyboardist,
theorist, and composer. Taught voice,
declamation, and continuo.
Ricci, Francesco Pasquale (17321817)
Italian composer. Visited Paris, London,
and The Hague. His name appears with
that of J. C. Bach on the title page of
Mthode ou recueil de connaissances lmentares pour le piano forte ou clavecin (ca.
1788). It is unclear whether he helped to
write the work or if he arranged and edit
ed it. The ascription to Bach may be false.
Ross, John (17631837)
Scottish composer and organist. Ar
ranged A Select Collection of Ancient &
Modern Scottish Airs for the voice and
piano, and published A Complete Book of
Instructions for Beginners on the Harpsichord or Pianoforte (1795).
Rousseau, Jean (164499)
French viol player, theorist, and compos
er. Dedicated his Trait de la viole (1687)
to the French viol player and composer
Jean de Sainte-Colombe (d. 1701), with
whom he studied. The treatise includes
discussion of bowing techniques as well
as ornamentation, based on the lute tra
dition and styles found in vocal music.
Rousseau, Jean-Jacques (171278)
Swiss philosopher, theorist, and com
poser. Among his many publications are
his Dissertation sur la musique moderne
(1743) and Dictionnaire de musique (1768).
Appendix
147
Saint-Lambert, Michel de (fl. ca. 1700)

French harpsichordist, teacher, and
composer. Important to harpsichordists
for his treatises Principes du clavecin contenant une explication exacte de tout ce qui
concerne la tablature & le clavier (1702)
and Nouveau trait de laccompagnement
du clavecin, de lorgue et des autres instruments (1707).
cluding Der critische Musikus, vol. 1 (1738)

and vol. 2 (1740) (completed 1745).
Samber, Johann Baptist (16541717)

Austrian theorist, organist, and teacher.
Studied with the composer Georg Muffat
(16531704). His Manuductio ad organum
(1704) and Continuatio ad manuductionem
organicam (1707) contain information
about music, including solmization, key
board instruction, and figured bass.
Speer, Daniel (16361707)

German composer and music theorist.
Author of Grundrichtiger Unterricht der
musicalischen Kunst (1697).
Sancta Maria, Toms de (ca. 151070)

Spanish theorist and composer. Re
membered for his treatise Arte de taer
fantasa (1565) on keyboard technique,
composition, and improvisation.
Scarlatti, Alessandro (16601725)
Italian composer of solo, chamber, and
opera works. Some of his keyboard toc
catas contain his fingerings, which pro
vide valuable insights into early Italian
fingering practice.
Scarlatti, Domenico (16851757)
Harpsichordist and composer of opera
and harpsichord music. Son of Ales
sandro Scarlatti. Composed close to
five hundred solo keyboard sonatas that
reflect the rich harmonies and rhythms
of the Iberian peninsula.
Scheibe, Johann Adolph (170876)
German composer, theorist, and organ
ist. Wrote several theoretical works, in
Schlick, Arnolt (ca. 1460ca. 1521)

German organist and composer. His
Spiegel der Orgelmacher und Organisten
(1511) was the first work about organ
building and playing to be published in
German.
Sulzer, Johann Georg (172079)

Swiss aesthetician, philosopher, lexicog
rapher, and mathematics professor. His
Allgemeine Theorie der schnen Knste
(1774) is an encyclopedia about the arts.
He relied on J. P. Kirnberger and the
German composer and conductor J. A. P.
Schulz (17471800) for the articles on
music.
Thielo, Carl August (170763)
Danish composer, theorist, organist,
music teacher, theater director, and
writer. Published the treatise Tanker og
Regler fra Grunden af om Musiken (1746).
Trk, Daniel Gottlob (17501813)
German theorist and composer. Wrote
Klavierschule (1789). Composed several
sonatas and individual keyboard pieces
(called Handstcke or Tonstcke).
Venegas de Henestrosa, Luis (151070)
Spanish composer and compiler of mu
sic. His book Libro de cifra nueva (1557)
features a tablature notation later used by
Antonio de Cabezn in his Obras de msica (1578). Venegass book was intended for
148
Appendix
keyboard, harp, vihuela, and possibly for

instrumental ensemble. It opens with a
preface on music theory and performance
practice and contains over one hundred
pieces by unnamed composers.
Wolf, Ernst Wilhelm (173592)
German composer of vocal and instru
mental works. Served as Kapellmeister
for Duchess Anna Amalia of Weimar.
His Anleitung zum guten Vortrag beym
Clavierspielen was published in 1755.
Wolf, Georg Friedrich (17611814)
German composer, writer on music,
organist, music teacher, and Kapellmeis
ter. His music dictionary Kurzgefasstes
musikalisches Lexicon (1787, 3/1806; rev.
as Allgemeines musikalisches Lexikon,

1800) was reprinted many times. Also
wrote pedagogical works for singers and
keyboard players. His Kurzer aber deutlicher Unterricht im Klavierspielen (1783) is
a manual for keyboard teachers with an
emphasis on theory. It includes a section
on correct body positions for playing the
keyboard.
Zarlino, Gioseffo (151790)
Italian composer and theorist. His trea
tise Le istitutioni harmoniche (1558) is a
significant contribution to music theory.
His contrapuntal techniques were
influenced greatly by the works of the
Flemish composer and teacher Adrian
Willaert (ca. 14901562).
Notes
after his death in 1750. He had firsthand

experience of C. P. E. Bach. Forkel
obtained much of his information on
Johann Sebastian from Ernst Ludwig
Gerber, whose father was one of Bachs
students. He may also have received in
formation about J. S. Bach from Johann
Joachim Quantz.
6. La douceur du toucher dpend
encore de tenir ses doigts le plus prs des
touches quil est possible. (The sweet
ness [or gentle manner, etc.] of playing
depends again on holding the fingers as
close to the keys as possible.) Franois
Couperin, Lart de toucher le clavecin
(Paris, 1716 and 1717; facsimile, New
York: Broude, 1969), 7.
7. Douceur: s. f. Qualit de ce qui
est doux. Il semploye au propre & au
figur dans la pluspart des sens de doux.
. . . La douceur du sucre. Doux, douce:
Il se dit aussi de tout ce qui fait une
impression agreable sur les autres sens,
& qui na rien daigre, de piquant, ni de
rude. . . doux parfum, voix douce, douce
harmonie, flte douce, doux murmure,
le doux murmure des eaux, un parler
doux . . . cela est doux au toucher. Dictionnaire de LAcadmie franaise, 1st ed.
(1694), ARTFL Project: University of
Introduction
1.Trk, School of Clavier Playing,
354.
2. Cited in Hogwood, The Keyboard
in Baroque Europe, 112.
3. On sait quoutre la science & la
nettet, il avoit une delicatesse de main
que les autres navoient pas . . . quil avoit
une adresse & une maniere dappliquer
les doigts sur les touches qui estoit
inconnu aux autres. Lettre . . . Mademoiselle Regnault de Solier touchant la
musique, 69. The author is assumed to be
Jean Le Gallois (16321707). The identity
of Mademoiselle Regnault de Solier re
mains unclear. Writing almost ten years
after Chambonnires death, Le Gallois
attempts to clarify the differences in
harpsichord playing between Chambon
nires and Louis Couperin, bringing to
light their unique traits as players.
4. Et cest dequoy nous avons un bel
exemple dans les personnes de Chambon
nires & de Couperin . . . il est certain
neanmoins quils avoient deux jeux dont
les differens caracteres ont donn lieu de
dire que lun touchoit le coeur, & lautre
touchoit loreille. Ibid., 85.
5.Forkel, Johann Sebastian Bach, 52.
Forkel was Bachs biographer fifty years
149
150
Notes to pages 36
Chicago, 2001; http://bert.lib.indiana

.edu:2532/efts/ARTFL/projects/dicos/
ACADEMIE/.
8.Rameau, Trait de lharmonie
(Paris, 1722); trans. by Gossett as Treatise
on Harmony, section On How to Use the
Hand and Fingers in Accompaniment.
introduction, 9. On pp. 1013 he gives
a list of keyboard instruments and
their definitions. Although many
parts of Trks Klavierschule offer
valuable lessons for various keyboard
instruments, his list defines klavier only
as the clavichord.
1. Preparing to Play
1. Lge propre commencer les
enfans, est de six, sept-ans: non pas
que cela doive exclure Les personnes
plus avances: mais, naturellement, pour
mouler; et former des mains lxercise
du clavecin, le plutot, est le mieux.
Couperin, Lart de toucher, 3.
2. Plus on commencera de bonne
heure joer du clavecin, plus on sera sr
dy faire des progrs, quoique lexprience
enseigne quelquefois le contraire, &
que beaucoup de personnes qui ont
commenc tard soient devenus habiles,
tandis que dautres qui sy sont pris ds
leur plus tendre enfance, sont restes
en arrire. Cependant avant lge de
six sept ans, on nest gure en droit de
se promettre des succs de son lve.
Marpurg, Principes du clavecin, 2.
3. A lgard de la disposition de la
Main, il ny a personne qui nen puisse
avoir, sil commence de bonne heure
sexercer. Cette disposition ntant autre
chose quune grande souplesse dans les
nerfs qui laisse aux doigts la libert de
se remuer subtilement: lenfance est le
temps le plus propre lacquerir. Cest

une exprience faite, que ceux qui ont
commenc de jeunesse sont devenus
habiles; & que ceux qui ne sy sont pris
que tard nont pas russi. On ne peut
assigner prcisment lge o il nest
plus temps de commencer, parce que
les dispositions sont diffrentes selon
les personnes . . . mais la saison la plus
favorable pour les une & pour les autres
est la grande enfance: cest dire, avant
dix ans, & mme ds cinq ou six. SaintLambert, Les principes du clavecin, iv.
4. Tambien por algunos accidentes
sucede, que aunque la edad no sea
mucha, no estn los nervios muy
flexibles: como es, el ocuparse en obras
serviles de manos dichos sugetos, las
quales los hazen duros, inflexibles:
y por esso importa mucho que los que
se han de ocupar en este exercicio,
no se ocupen en otros que les puedan
encallecer las manos, y entorpezer
los dedos: porque todo lo que es
manejar cosas duras, de peso, tocar
agues impuras, sobrademente frias,
excessivamente calientes, atraen
humores dichos miembros, los quales
impiden en los nervios la docilidad.
Nassarre, Esquela msica: segn la prtica
moderna, pt. 2, 472.
Many eighteenth-century physicians
believed the body had four major
humors: blood, phlegm, yellow bile,
and black bile. Doctors thought that
sickness occurred when the humors
were unbalanced. For instance, a
patient might have had too much
blood. To restore the bodys balance,
excess humors were removed through
bleeding, vomiting, blistering, urinating,
sweating, or salivating. If a patient were
insufficient in a humor, doctors would
Notes to pages 68
remedy the situation with certain food,
herbs, or medications.
5.Rameau, Dissertation sur les
diffrentes mthodes daccompagnement
pour le clavecin ou pour lorgue; trans. in
Jacobi, Complete Theoretical Writings
of Jean-Philippe Rameau, 5860. Trans.
revised.
6. Additional sets of strings and
options of registration allow for different
colors and timbres to be combined.
These include using the front eight or
the back eight, coupling two eight-foot
registers, playing pieces written in crois
style (hand-crossing or playing on two
manuals with one hand on each manual),
as found in some of the harpsichord
pieces by Rameau or Couperin, as well as
some of J. S. Bachs Goldberg Variations
and Italian Concerto. Single manual
harpsichords that were not virginals or
spinets usually had 8' + 8' (two eight-foot
sets of strings), 8' + 4', or 8' + 8' + 4'.
7. On a harpsichord, each string
has its own plectrum. These plectra
are approximately one centimeter long,
one and a half millimeters wide, and
half a millimeter thick. They are cut
to be wider at the base and narrow at
the tip, which is the plucking end. The
plectrum is held inside the tongue of the
jack, which allows it to pluck moving
upward and pass almost silently along
the string downward to its return
position. In the past, plectra were made
of feather quillshence the common
usage of the term quilling. The quills
were usually from crows, ravens, and
sometimes vultures. Italian instrument
maker Bartolomeo Cristofori (16551731)
was one such builder to use vulture
quills. Some harpsichords employed
plectra of leather, often on just one set of
151
strings as a special effect. Later French

harpsichords, such as those constructed
by Pascal Taskin (172393), often had
peau de buffle, a chamois-like material
from bison hide. Modern harpsichords
tend to use plastic, such as delrin or
celcon, for plectra material.
8. On ne doit se servir dabord
que dune pinette, ou dun seul
clavier de clavecin pour la premire
jeunesse; et que lune, ou lautre soient
emplums trs foiblement; cet article
tant dune consquence infinie, la belle
execution dpendant beaucoup plus de
la souplesse, et de la grande libert des
doigts, que de la force; en sorte que ds
les commencemens sy on laisse jouer
un enfant sur deux claviers, il faut de
toutte ncessit quil outre ses petites
mains pour faire parler les touches; et
de l viennent les mains mal-places,
et la duret du jeu. Couperin, Lart de
toucher, 67.
9. Hays, F. W. Marpurgs Anleitung
zum Clavierspielen (Berlin, 1755) and
Principes du clavecin (Berlin, 1756), 1:2.
10.Bach, Essay on the True Art of
Playing Keyboard Instruments, 37.
11.Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord, Proposals, vvi.
Pasquali recommends the smallest size
for children up through the age of seven
or eight, and the second size until the
age of twelve or thirteen, at which point
they may proceed to a normal size harp
sichord.
12. Pasqualis next paragraph justi
fies any opposition to his beliefs on this
matter: If it is objected that the transi
tion from narrow to wider keys might
give a child the bad custom of touching
sometimes two keys with one finger, or
of mistaking the keys, I answer that a
152
Notes to pages 811
few weeks diligent practice will prevent

those evils. Witness the manner that we
use in teaching children to play on the
violin, (which is a more difficult instru
ment than the harpsichord) . . . for, first,
they are taught to play on a very little
instrument; then, as they grow, a larger
one is made use of until the length of
their fingers enables them to manage a
violin of a common size.
13.An ottavino harpsichord was a
very small, Italian-made virginal or spinet
at four-foot pitch (an octave higher than
on a standard keyboard instrument). It
is sometimes called an octave spinet or
spinettina. This is not to be confused
with the child ottavino of a muselar (a
type of Flemish virginal) that may be
coupled with the mother virginal, or a
quint-pitch instrument (mezzo-ottavino).
Their various uses include child harpsi
chords, domestic instruments for singing
accompaniment, and toys, much like
the toy piano. See Vince Hos website at
http://www.rawbw.com/~hbv/earlymus/
ottavino/.
14. Il faut donc bien prendre garde
que la resistance des touches ne soppose
au mouvement des doigts; & par conse
quent le clavier sur lequel on sxerce ne
sauroit tre trop doux: mais mesure
que les doigts se fortifient dans leur
mouvement, on peut leur opposer un
clavier moins doux, & arriver ainsi par
degrez leur faire enfoncer les touches
les plus dures. Rameau, Pices de clavecin, 18.
15. Il faut tcher dacquerir le mou
vement necessaire dans les doigts, & de
donner chacun deux son mouvement
particulier, avant que de mettre leur
force lpreuve . . . comme on a dabord
de la peine les faire mouvoir chacun
en particulier, celle quon auroit encore

leur faire enfoncer les touches, seroit
capable de dtruire la perfection qui
doit se trouver dans leur mouvement.
Ibid., 18.
16.Trk, School of Clavier Playing, 19.
17. The late 1960s and early 1970s saw
a revival of harpsichord construction,
and there are now many builders both in
the United States and around the world.
Current trends favor the replication of
specific instruments, and many builders
continue to specialize in certain styles
year after year. A good builder seeks out
the finest wood, uses wooden (as op
posed to plastic) jacks, and is expert in
voicing and repair. A beautifully painted
instrument is a sight to behold but not
necessary for beautiful playing. Teachers
and players may also be able to offer ad
vice, and useful information is available
in libraries, the internet, and in various
shops that rent or sell early keyboards.
As always, instrument makers are happy
to receive inquiries about their instru
ments!
19. La distance laquelle une per
sonne forme doit tre du clavier est
peu prs de neuf-pouces, prendre de la
ceinture; et moindre proportion pour
les jeunes personnes. Couperin, Lart de
toucher, 4.
20. Hays, Marpurgs Anleitung, 1:13
and n. 24.
21. A famous piano manufacturing
company, founded in the early nine
teenth century by Ignaz Bsendorfer in
Vienna. They make many different mod
els, including a concert grand that has an
extra octave in the bass.
22. Ftis and Moscheles, Mthode des
Mthodes de Piano, 13.
Notes to pages 1113

23.Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 4v; trans.
in Sachs and Ife, Anthology of Early Keyboard Methods, 35.
24. Explicando lo que toca a la prim
era regla que he dicho, ha de ser la planta
del cuerpo, recto, en medio del teclado.
Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 456.
25.Hartong, Clavier-Anweisung, 6;
quoted and trans. in Lister, Traditions
of Keyboard Technique, 218.
26. Le milieu du corps, et celui du
clavier doivent se raporter. Couperin,
Lart de toucher, 4.
27. Il faut . . . se placer vis--vis le
milieu du clavier. Corrette, Les amusemens du Parnasse, p. B; Mthodes &
Traits, 2:10.
28. Hays, Marpurgs Anleitung, 1:13.
29.Bach, Essay, 42.
31. Although I do not include them
in this document, in my research I
looked through approximately fifty
iconographical images of keyboardists
sitting by or playing their instruments.
They sit on a wide variety of furniture,
including stools, armchairs, benches, a
base of a marble column, to no seat at all.
The works of art portray the musicians
sitting at different heights, from below
to parallel or above the keyboard.
32. Il faut sassoir sur un sige com
mode comme chaise ou tabouret car un
fauteuil gne les bras. Corrette, Les
amusemens du Parnasse, p. B.
34. On doit mettre qulque chose
de plus, ou de moins hault sous les pieds
des jeunes personnes, mesure quelles
croissent: afin que leurs pieds ntant
point en lair, puissent sotenir le corps
dans un juste quilibre. Couperin, Lart
de toucher, 3.
153

36. Et comme la bonne-grace est ne
cessaire il faut commencer par la position
du corps. Couperin, Lart de toucher, 3.
37.Diruta, Il Transilvano, pt. 1, f.
4v; trans. in Sachs and Ife, Anthology of
Early Keyboard Methods, 35.
38.Samber, Manuductio ad organum;
trans. in Lister, Traditions, 93.
39.Barthlemon, A New Tutor for the
Harpsichord or Piano Forte, 6.
40. Explicando lo que toca a la
primera regla que he dicho, ha de ser la
planta de el cuerpo, recto, en medio de
el teclado, de modo, que lo pueda pulsar
todo con las dos manos, sin mas exten
sion de el un brazo que el otro: importa
ser assi la planta para que sea menor el
movimiento de cada brazo al baxar,
subir los extremos de el teclado. Na
ssarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 456.
41. Alexander Technique takes its
name from Frederick Matthias Alexan
der (18691955), a Shakespearean orator
who began to lose his voice onstage. He
discovered that this problem was due to
an unnecessary tightening of his whole
body when preparing to recite or speak.
By 1900, he had cured himself of this
problem by applying his own ideas to
himself, and later taught them to others.
The technique teaches how intention
and habits affect physical coordination
and learning capacity. As students de
velop a sense of kinesthesia, they learn
to internally attune bodily location and
to judge the effort needed for moving.
Many postural problems may be traced
to over-tensed neck muscles that impede
free movement of the head in relationship
to the spine. Without this freedom, it is
difficult, if not impossible, to acquire last
ing ease elsewhere in the body. According
154
Notes to pages 1416
to Alexander Technique, this freedom of

movement requires that the head balance
lightly on the top of the spine, which, in
turn, allows all the other body reflexes to
function naturallythe spine lengthens,
the neck becomes freer, and the joints
and muscles function with a minimum
of excess tension. I studied Alexander
Technique when I was a piano student in
Jerusalem in 1991. After just a few months
of practicing Alexander methods, my
measured height had increased by a quar
ter of an inch, due to the way in which I
had been training to hold my back, neck,
and head. There are numerous Alexander
teachers as well as publications available.
For a quick reference, see http://www
.alexandertechnique.com/.
42. A mas de ser la planta del cuerpo
en medio de el teclado, has de estar con
rectitud perpendicular, sin inclinarlo
adelante, atrs, ni a los lados, teniendo la
cabeza de el mismo modo; porque es la
postura mas natural de el hombre, si
guiendo a la misma de el cuerpo, la de los
dems miembros; pues estando assi, ha
de venir naturalmente la de las manos en
el teclado, y assi mesmo sern naturales
los movimientos de los dedos. Nassarre,
Esquela, pt. 2, 457.
43. Le mouvement des doigts se
prend leur racine, cest--dire, la join
ture qui les attache la main, & jamais
ailleurs; celui de la main se prend la
jointure du poignet, & celui de bras,
suppose quil soit necessaire, se prend
la jointure du coude. Rameau, Pices de
clavecin, 17.
45.Manfredini, Regole armoniche, 23;
trans. in Soderlund, Organ Technique, 92.
46. Tambien se deve escusar todo
movimiento en los dems miembros que
no sean precisos. Unos ay que mueven el

cuerpo al comps de las manos; otros la
cabeza; otros que encogen los ombros,
y otros hazen movimientos con la boca.
Todo esto repugna la postura natural
del hombre, que governado por la razn,
deven conformarse en las acciones todos
los miembros con ella; porque de hazer
lo contrario, causa nota a los que lo ven,
y an al mismo sugeto diversion. Na
48. A legard des grimaces du vis
age on peut sen coriger soy-mme en
mettant un miroir sur le pupitre de
lepinette, ou du clavecin. Couperin,
Lart de toucher, 4.
49. Voice lessons are often occupied
with the body, whereas unfortunately
instrumentalists are often disassociated
from their bodies. In my many years of
accompanying singers, I have observed
their practice of recording their lessons
and practice sessions, both through au
dio and video tape. What an enormous
asset this could be for keyboardists, not
only to overcome facial grimaces! By
recording ourselves in lessons, practice
sessions, and in concerts, we gain a more
objective perspective on our playing.
50.Bach, Essay, 4243.
51. Sturm und Drang (literally:
storm and stress) was a Germany liter
ary movement that developed during the
second half of the eighteenth century.
It takes its name from a play by F. M.
von Klinger. Bachs concern was to write
music that would touch the heart and
stir the passions. He was a master of
juxtaposing starkly contrasting ideas.
53.Burney, The Present State of Music, 2:260.
Notes to pages 1619

35556.
55. Wilson, Lhleins Klavierschule,
12425.
56.Mattheson, Der vollkommene
Kapellmeister, 35; trans. in Trk, School
of Clavier Playing, 519n52.
57. Dussek and Pleyel, Mthode pour
le piano-forte, 14.
58. On doit tourner, un tant soit peu
le corps sur la droite tant au clavecin: ne
point avoir les genoux trop serrs; et te
nir ses pieds vis--vis lun de lautre; mais
surtout le pied droit bien en dehors.
59.Marpurg, Principes du clavecin,
chap. 1, 9; trans. in Hays, Marpurgs
Anleitung, 2:77.
60. Il faut sasseoir sur un siege com
mode comme chaise ou tabouret car un
fauteuil gne les bras, se placer vis-a-vis
le milieu de clavier, tenir le corps et la
tte droits, les pieds en dehors, lepaule
droite un peu plus tourne du ct de la
compagnie. Corrette, Les amusemens du
Parnasse, p. B.
61. As opposed to necessary tension,
which would be the minimal amount of
muscular strength needed to hold up the
limbs to play the keyboard.
62. Laurette Goldberg (19322005),
early music pioneer, founder of musical
enterprises including Music Sources, a
Center for Historically Informed Per
formances, Inc., and Philharmonia Ba
roque, harpsichordist, and teacher. She
made this comment during one of my
first harpsichord lessons in a discussion
about the differences between playing
modern piano and harpsichord.
63. Pour toucher agrablement, il le
faut faire facilement; pour toucher fac
ilement, il le faut faire commodment;
155
et pour cet effet disposer les doigts sur le

clavier de bonne grace, avec convenance
et egalit. Nivers, Livre dorgue, section
De la position des doigts. See also
Pruitt, The Organ Works of Guil
laume-Gabriel Nivers, 158.
64. Hewlett, The Vermehrter . . .
Wegweiser of 1689, 6. The Wegweiser
(1689), a brief instruction book on the
art of playing the organ, was published
eleven times through 1753. It had several
authors, including Giacomo Carissimi,
Johann Caspar Ferdinand Fischer, Jo
hann Jacob Froberger, and George Muf
fat, and was the first German source af
ter Arnolt Schlicke to describe keyboard
posture and hand formation. Several
ideas in it were similar to the writings of
Diruta and Nivers.
66.Hartong, Clavier-Anweisung, quot
ed and trans. in Lister, Traditions, 207.
67. Les personnes qui commencent
tard, ou qui ont t mal-montres feront
attention que comme les nerfs peuvent
tre endurcis, ou peuvent avoir pris de
mauvais plis, elles doivent se dnoer,
ou se faire dnoer les doigts par quelquun, avant que de se mttre au clavecin;
cest a dire se tirer, ou se faire tirer les
doigts de tous les sens; cela met dailleurs
les esprits en mouvement; et lon se
trouve plus de libert. Couperin, Lart de
toucher, 910.
68. Che molti organisti havendo
habituata la mano quei deffetti da
principio, rare volte il lor sonare fa quell
armonia, che doveria; la dove se havessero
accommodata la mano leggera, e molle, gli
verebbe ben fatto ogni cosa, per difficile,
che fosse. Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 9v;
trans. in Crozier, The Principles of Key
board Technique in Il Transilvano, 31.
156
Notes to pages 2024
69. Che non si indurischino . . . che

non battino li tasti. Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 8r.
70. E per dirui, come douete tener la
mano leggiera, e molle sopra la tastura,
vi dar un essempio. Quando si d una
guanciata in collera, se gli adopra gran
forza. Ma quando se uol fa carezze, e
vezzi, non si adopra forza, ma si tiene la
mano leggiera, in qualla guisa che so
gliamo accarezzare un fanciullo. Diruta,
Il Transilvano, f. 5r.
71.Mersenne, Harmonie universelle,
16162; trans. Chapman, 21314.
72.Denis, Treatise on Harpsichord
Tuning, 100.
73.Cabezn, Obras de musica para
tecla (Madrid, 1578), quoted and trans. in
Brauchli, Aspects (1992), 9293.
75. Ibid., introduction, 23, 21.
76. Les hommes qui veulent arriver
un certain degr de perfection ne de
vroient jamais faire aucun exercice p
nible de leurs mains. Celles des femmes,
par la raison contraire, sont gnrale
ment meilleures. Jai dja dit, que la
souplesse des nerfs contribu beaucoup
plus, au bien-joer, que la force; ma
prevue est sensible dans la difference des
mains des femmes, celles des hommes;
et de plus, la main gauche des hommes,
dont ils se servent moins dans les exer
cices, est communment la plus souple
au clavecin. Couperin, Lart de toucher,
1213.
77. Il ny a rien de plus libre dans
le jeu du clavecin, que la position des
doigts. Chacun ne recherche en cela que
sa commodit & la bonne grace. SaintLambert, Les principes, 40.
78. A lgard de la disposition de la
Main, il ny a personne qui nen puisse
avoir, sil commence de bonne heure

sexercer. Cette disposition ntant autre
chose quune grande souplesse dans les
nerfs qui laisser aux doigts la libert de
se remuer subtilement. Ibid., iv.
79. Il est dune extrme facilit
toucher, ne fatiguant point ceux qui
en joent, & nexigeant point comme
quelques autres une posture contrainte,
qui mme bien souvent ne convient pas
aux personnes modestes. Cest ce qui la
mis si fort en regne, que tout ce quil y a
de Gens de distinction veulent mainte
nant en scavoir joer. Ibid., iii.
80. De placer les deux mains sur
le clavier de maniere quon nait rien
de gn dans lattitude; ce qui oblige
dexclure communment le pouce de la
main droite, parce que les deux pouces
poss sur le clavier & principalement
sur les touches blanches donneroient
aux bras une situation contrainte & de
mauvaise grace. Rousseau, Doigter, in
Dictionnaire de musique.
81.Gasparini, The Practical Harmonist at the Keyboard, 19.
82.Manfredini, Regole armoniche,
23; trans. in Soderlund, How Did They
Play? 92.
83.Diruta, Il Transilvano; trans. in
Soehnlein, Diruta on the Art of Key
board-Playing, 127.
84. Les coudes et les poignets
doivent tre de niveau au clavier, mais il
faut pour la bonne grace que les coudes
soyent a ct du corps dune maniere
aise: On peut les dranger quand il
faut parcourir de grands intervals sur le
clavier, principalement dans les pieces
ou lon croise les mains. Corrette, Les
amusemens du Parnasse, p. B.
85.Petri, Anleitung zur praktischen
Musik vor neuangehende Snger und In-
Notes to pages 2426

strumentspieler; trans. in Brauchli, As
pects (1994), 106.
86.Pasquali, The Art of Fingering the
Harpsichord, vii.
87. Le poignet la hauteur du
coude; ce qui depend du siege quon
prend. Saint-Lambert, Les principes, 42.
88. New Instructions for Playing the
Harpsichord, Piano-forte, or Spinnet, 1
and 5.
89.Manfredini, Regole armoniche,
23; trans. in Soderlund, How Did They
Play? 92.
90. Die Hnd und Armb frey von
dem Leib. Samber, Manuductio ad organum, 91; quoted and trans. in Lister,
Traditions, 93.
91. Dtre assis la hauter, que les
coudes & le poignet soient un peu plus
levs que le niveau du clavier, afin que
la main tombe comme delle-mme sur
les touches. Bach and Ricci, Mthode
ou recueil de connoisances, 11; quoted and
trans. in Brauchli, Aspects (1994), 107.
92.Bach, Essay, 42.
93. I have changed Wilsons finger
board to keyboard.
94. Wilson, Lhleins Klavierschule,
12425.
95.Trk, Klavierschule, 2426; Trk,
School of Clavier Playing, 3133.
32.
97.Hartong, Clavier-Anweisung,
trans. in Lister, Traditions, 218.
98.Couperin, Lart de toucher; trans.
Roberts, 11.
99. Il faut dabord sasseoir auprs
du clavessin, de faon que les coudes soi
ent plus levs que le niveau du clavier, &
que la main puisse y tomber par le seul
mouvement naturel de la jointure du
poignet.
157
Cest afin que la main tombe comme

delle mme sur le clavier, quil faut
dabord avoir les coudes au dessus de son
niveau; & ils ne sont jamais trop levs,
ds que le 1. & le 5. peuvent se placer sur
le bord des touches.
En mme tems que le 1. & le 5. se pla
cent sur le bord des touches, il faut que
les coudes tombent nonchalamment sur
les cts, dans leur situation naturelle;
situation quil faut bien remarque, &
quon ne doit jamais dranger que par
une necessit absolu, comme lorsqon
est oblige de transporter la main dun
bout du clavier lautre.
Cette situation naturelle des coudes,
jointe la juste porte du 1. & du 5.
donne le point fixe o toute personne, de
quelque taille quelle soit, doit se placer
auprs du clavessin; & il ne sagit plus
que dy proportionner le siege. Rameau,
Pices de clavecin, 18.
100. Quand on se sent la main for
me, on diminu petit--petit la hauteur
du sige, jusqu ce que les coudes se
trouvent un peu au-dessous du niveau du
clavier; ce que engage pour lors tenir
la main comme cole au clavier, & ce qui
acheve de procurer au toucher toute la
liaison quon peut y introduire. Rameau,
101. Title page of Parthenia, or the
Maydenhead (London: George Lowe,
ca. late 1612 or early 1613). Parthenia is
a collection of twenty-one keyboard
pieces, mostly galliards and pavanes by
William Byrd, John Bull, and Orlando
Gibbons. According to Deutsch, Cecilia
and Parthenia, 59192, the work was
engraved by William Hole and published
by George Lowe. Of the first edition,
there is one surviving copy at the Hun
tington Library at San Marino, Calif.
158
Notes to pages 2829
There are other extant copies of later edi

tions. William Hole is assumed to be the
engraver of the title page. It is of a woman
seated at the virginal with an angelic look
on her face. According to Deutsch, the
woman has been said to represent Prin
cess Elizabeth, or Miss Evans (for whom
the work was published), or Parthenia
herself, but the engraving is actually a
copy of an engraving by Jacob Matham
(15711631) of St. Cecilia, designed ca.
1588 by Mathams stepfather, Hendrick
Goltzius (15581617). The original work
shows St. Cecilia sitting at the organ
with two angels behind her. The Parthenia engraving has her playing a virginal.
102. As previously mentioned, see
Brauchlis two-part article, Aspects
of Early Keyboard Technique: Hand
and Finger Positions as Seen in Early
Treatises and Iconographical Docu
ments, Journal of the American Musical
Instrument Society 18 (1992): 62102 and
20 (1994): 90220. Drawing conclusions
from iconography is a perpetual chal
lenge. Painters goals are often to show
off a wealthy patrons jewelry or expen
sive fabric, and the works of art so often
add symbolic images that they do not
necessarily provide a reliable source of
information about performance practice.
Nonetheless, the image of Cecilia, at the
very least, gives us a glimpse of the pos
sibility that hands at the keyboard were
not rigid or stiff and definitely not in a
position of strictly parallel fingers.
103. Celle-cy consiste tenir ses
mains droites sur le clavier; cest--dire,
ne penchant ny en dedans ny en dehors.
Saint-Lambert, Les principes, 42.
104.Wolf, Kurz aber deutlichen Unterricht im Klavierspielen; 5254; trans. in
Brauchli, Aspects, 106.
105. Il faut aussi que la main soit

horizontale avec le clavier, ce qui se re
connot aux jointures qui lattachent aux
doigts, o pour lors il faut la lever un peu
du ct du 1 par un simple mouvement
du poignet, sans quil y perde rien de sa
souplesse.
Cette dernire position cote un peu
aux commenans, par rapport au petit
tour de poignet en faveur du 1; mais aussi
cela ce 1 ne tomberoit plus perpendicu
lairement sur sa touche, & nauroit plus
la mme force ni la mme lgret que les
autres doigts. Rameau, Code de musique
pratique, 1112; facsimile, Mthodes &
traits, 2:5051. It is with this paragraph
that Jacques Duphlys paragraph Du
doigter in his Exercise Book for Lord
Fitzwilliam (1765) and Rousseaus entry
Doigter from his Dictionnaire de musique borrow Rameaus text verbatim.
106. La jointure du poignet doit
toujours tre souple: cette souplesse qui
se rpand pour lors sur les doigts, leur
donne toute la libert & toute la legeret
ncessaires: & la main qui par ce moyen
se trouve, pour ainsi dire, comme morte,
ne sert plus qua soutenir les doigts qui
lui sont attachs, & les conduire aux
endroits du clavier o ils ne peuvent at
teindre par le seul mouvement qui leur
est propre. Rameau, Pices de clavecin,
17.
107. Lxcution de ces differentes
batteries, & de ces differens roulemens,
dpend sur-tout de la souplesse du poi
gnet; en sy conduisant dailleurs par
des mouvemens doux & legers, & en
y conservant le point fixe la jointure
du coude, lorsque la batterie excde
ltendu de la main. Ibid., 19.
108. Dans toutes les positions, dans
les plus grands carts, la main obit aux
Notes to pages 2932

doigts, la jointure du poignet la main,
& celle du coude au poignet; jamais
lpaule ne doit y entrer pour rien.
Rameau, Code de musique pratique, 12;
facsimile, Mthodes & traits, 2:51.
109.Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 8r; trans.
Harpsichord, vii.
111.Denis, Treatise on Harpsichord
Tuning, 97. See also The Music Master
by Jan Steen (ca. 1666), under Harpsi
chord in The New Grove Dictionary of
Music and Musicians.
113. Sancta Maria uses the term
monocordio for clavichord, the primary
instrument (and organ) for which his
treatise was intended.
114. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasia, f. 36 & f. 37; trans. in Sachs and Ife,
Anthology of Early Keyboard Methods, 35.
See also The Art of Playing the Fantasia,
trans. Howell and Hultberg, 92.
115. Sancta Marias early keyboard
technique may have based its wrist posi
tion on ones seen in medieval icons of
portative organs. The players left arm
would hold the instrument and work
the bellows while the right hand played
the keys. Hickman notes that portative
organ technique held the instrument
elevated, almost perpendicular to the
body, making it more comfortable if
played with a low wrist. Also, once the
instrument began to be placed on a table
and positive organs began to appear, this
affected the hand position as well. See
Hickman, Das Portative; quoted and
trans. in Brauchli, Aspects (1992), 65.
Brauchlis article shows iconographical
examples of lower wrist positions when
159
the portative organ was held on the

knees and the player reached up to the
keys and drew them down from below.
116. La tercera condicion, que es
herir bien las teclas, consiste en seys
cosas. La primera es herir las teclas con
las yemas de los dedos, de tal manera que
las Uas no alleguen ni toquen c mucho
a las teclas, lo qual se hara baxando las
Muecas, y estendido los dedod del me
dio dedo adelte, porque hirien do desta
manera, suenan las bozes enteras, dulces,
y suaves. La razon desto es, porque como
la carne sea cosa blande, hiere con blan
dura y suavidad. Y de mas desto se tae
con limpieza, porque como dos dedos
hazen assiento en las teclas, no pueden
deslizar ni huyr a ninguna parte. Y por el
contrario, quando se hiere con las uas,
se comet dos grades defectos, y tambien
desmayadas y sin espiritu. Sancta Ma
ria, Arte de taer fantasia, f. 37.
117.Diritua, Il Transilvano, f. 5r; trans.
118.Diritua, Il Transilvano, f. 4v;
trans. in Sachs and Ife, Anthology of
Early Keyboard Methods, 35.
119.Diruta, Il Transilvano, in his sec
tion How to carry the hand loosely and
lightly, f. 5r.
120. El primer passo que es neces
sario dr para poner por demonstracion
la musica en el Organo, es la postura de
las manos; (que la planta de el cuerpo tan
solamente es disposicion.) La qual ha de
ser, segun dixe en el Capitulo undecimo,
llevando los dedos un poco arqueados,
no tanto que hiera con las uas en las
teclas, ni tampoco que hiera con el lleno
de la yema; porque de uno, y otro modo
se sigue inconveniente grande para le
execucion. Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 457.
160
Notes to pages 3335
121. Como son desiguales los dedos

de las manos, importa que la postura sea
proporcionada con todos ellos; para que
al tiempo que aya de mover cada uno, sea
el movimiento natural, no violento.
Si la postura de la mano fuere de
modo que los dedos estuvieren sobrada
mente arqueados hiriendo con las uas,
es de notar, que como es mas largo el
tercer dedo que los otros, es preciso que
est mas arqueado; y quando lo ha de
mover de una tecla para llevarlo otra,
ha de ser mayor el movimiento, por aver
le de estender mas que los otros, segn
regla mathematica, el qual movimiento
es violento, por ser improporcionado.
Y lo mismo es en todos los otros dedos,
que los movimientos son improporciona
dos, cada qual segn la proporcion que
tiene: de donde se ha de inferir, que en
semejante postura de manos, todos los
movimientos son violentos; y esta es la
causa de la falta de execucion, en los que
hazen habito de semejante postura.
Quando la postura de las manos es
llevar los dedos muy poco arqueados,
nada, se hiere la tecla con mas parte
de el dedo, y es con toda la yema, y por
la misma desigualdad de ellos, son los
movimientos mas desiguales, y mas vio
lentos, porque por la improporcionalidad
de la postura, son improporcionados los
movimientos, como efectos producidos
de ella; y estos movimientos violentos,
improporcionados, producen ciertos
efectos de tardana, ineptitud para la
agilidad.
Por esso conviene, que ni estn mu
cho, ni poco arqueados, si en un medio,
porque estando assi, es proporcionada la
postura de la mano, con todos los dedos;
que como son desiguales en longitud, es
necessario que convenga la proporcion
con cada uno, hiriendo todos con la ex

tremidad de la yema en igual proporcion;
lo que no puede ser siendo improporcio
nada la postura.
Pero siendo assi, se siguen tres efec
tos buenos: el primero, que hieren con
igualdad todos; conformandose en ser
con la extremidad de cada uno; y de aqu
se produce el segundo, que es el pulsar
con igual fuerza de todos ellos las teclas;
materia importantissima para que todos
los sonidos se perciban con igual cuerpo.
El tercer efecto es el ser los movimientos
de ellos naturales, y nada violentos, que
menos trabajo se consigue la docilidad
de los nervios, y agilidad en los dedos.
Por todas las razones dichas importa
mucho el cuydado en los Maestros de
Organo, quando ensean, y en los que
aprenden, que se hagen cargo de que
las posturas de las manos sean con
propiedad; porque si erraren en ello,
seria lo mismo que errar el fundamento
de la fabrica. Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2,
45758.
122. Die Hand mus rund gemacht
werden, und geschieht dies, so hat sich
Niemand ber die Krze des Daumens
und kleinen Fingers zu beklagen. Wolf,
Kurz aber deutlichen Unterricht im Klavierspielen (Halle, 1789), pt. 1, 52.
124. I have often wondered why Carl
Philipp Emanuel Bachs Essay on the
Right Manner of Playing the Clavier does
not elucidate the qualities that consti
tute a good touch. For he possessed in
high degree the technique that made his
father preeminent as a player. Forkel,
Johann Sebastian Bach, 50.
125. Ibid., 4951.
126.Forkel, ber Johann Sebastian
Bachs Leben; trans. in David and Men
Notes to pages 3538

del, The Bach Reader, 307308 (trans.
slightly revised).
128.Ibid.
129. La belle manire de poser les
mains sur le clavier est darrondir les
trois doigts du milieu de faon quils
soient presque a legalit du pouce et du
petit doigt, sur une mme ligne droite
audessus de cinq touches de suite, com
me par example ut, re, mi, fa, sol, car sil
se trouve plusieurs doigts sur une mme
touch seulement la main a mauvaise
grace, mais cela empche encore la lib
ert et la souplesse des doigts. Corrette,
Les amusemens du Parnasse, p. B; M
thodes & traits, 2:10.
130.Nivers, Livre dorgue I and Pruitt,
Organ Works, 158.
Harpsichord, v.
132.Samber, Manuductio ad organum,
9197; quoted and trans. in Lister, Tra
ditions, 94.
133. Il ny a rien de plus libre dans
le jeu du clavecin, que la position des
doigts. . . . La commodit de celuy qui
joe est la premire regle quil doit
suivre; la bonne grace est la seconde.
Saint-Lambert, Les principes, 40.
134. Les doigts courbez & tous
rangez au mme niveau, pris sur la lon
gueur du pouce. Ibid., 42.
135. La perfection du doigter consiste
en general dans un mouvement doux,
lger & rgulier. Le mouvement des
doigts se prende leur racine; cest--dire,
la jointure qui les attach la main.
Il faut que les doigts soient courbs na
turellement, et que chaque doigt ait un
mouvement propre et indpendant des
autres doigts. Jacques Duphly, Exercise
Book for Lord Fitzwilliam; facsimile,
161
Mthodes & traits, 2:71. Duphly takes

these ideas directly from Rameaus pref
ace to his Pices de clavecin, but he does
not acknowledge him as the author.
136. Le 1. & le 5. se trouvant sur le
bord des touches, engagent courber
les autres doigts, pour quils puis
sant se trouver galement sur le bord
des touches: mais en laissant tomber
la main, comme il a t dit, les doigts
sarondissent naturellement au point
quil faut: & pour lors on ne doit plus
ni les alonger, ni les arondir davantage,
except dans de certains cas, o lon ne
peut mieux faire. Rameau, Pices de
clavecin, 17.
137. Il faut regarder les doigts at
tachs la main, comme des ressorts
attachs un manche par des charnires
qui leur laissent une entire libert . . .
la main doit tre, pour ainsi dire, morte,
& le poignet dans la plus grande soup
lesse, pour que les doigts agissant de leur
prompre mouvement, puissent gagner
de la force, de la lgret & de lgalit
entre eux.
Cela tant, placez les cinq doigts sur
cinq touches conscutives du clavier, o
le pouce savance sur la sienne, longle
tout--fait en dehors, peu prs jusqu
sa premire jointure, pendant que les
autres doigts tombent perpendiculaire
ment sure les leurs, & cela de leur propre
poids, en sarrondissant deux-mmes
sans les contraindre, le 1 (f) [in chap. 1,
article 2, he counts the little finger as
1, the ring finger as 2, etc.] moins rond
que les autres, puisquil est plus petit.
Rameau, Code de musique pratique, 11;
quoted in Mthodes & Traits, 2:50.
138. Den Laerende mad venne sine
Fingere strat udi Begyndelsen af ClaverSpillene, at holde dem mere krumme
162
Notes to pages 3844
end lige udstrakte. For altering merk,

at Tommel-Fingern den holdes vel near
til Pege-Fingeren, ja udi Spillen meest
under same. Tommel-Fingeren maa vel
vennes til at bruges i Spillen, og ikke
(som somme af de Antique ClaveerMeestre laerer) at spille med de 4rd
Fingre foruden Tommel-Fingeren.
Thielo, Tanker og Regler fra Grunden
af om Musiken, pt. 2, 2527; quoted in
Lister, Traditions, 200; also quoted in
Brauchli, Aspects (1994), 102; trans. by
Eva Legene.
140. Les deux mains sur le clavier
de manire quon nait rien de gn dans
lhabitude: ce qui oblige dexclure com
munment un des pouces; les autres
doigts carts de la largeur des touches
& un peu recourbs sur elles, & chaque
doigt ayant son mouvement propre,
indpendant des autres. . . . On doit
lever la main entire le moins quil se
puet. Bach and Ricci, Mthode ou recueil
de connoisances, 11; quoted & trans. in
Brauchli, Aspects (1994), 107.
2. Touching the Instrument
1.Couperin, Lart de toucher, 910.
2. Jay toujours fait faire mes
lves de petites evolutions des doigts,
soit de passages, ou de batteries
diversifies commencer par les plus
simples, et sur les tons les plus naturels;
et insensiblement je les ay mens
jusquaux plus Lgers, et aux plus
transposs; ces petits Exercices quon ne
sauroit trop multiplier. Ibid., 89.
3. Evolutions ou petits exercices
pour former les mains. Ibid., 28. He
also refers to them in the first page of
his introductory section, Plan de cette
mthode (Plan of this method).
4. De petits exercices prliminaires,

et essentials, pour parvenir bien jouer.
Ibid., 1. Couperin mentions them again
in his treatise under the heading Petits
exercices quil faut pratiquer pour par
venir aux pieces (Little exercises that
one must practice in order to play [these]
pieces).
5. Tous ces progrs se doivent
xercer sur tous les tons, et demi-tons
du clavier. Ibid., 28. Also of interest are
some of his fingerings.
6.Miller, Institutes of Music, 21.
7. Hays, Marpurgs Anleitung, in
Structural Plan of This Work, T-x.
8. Marpurgs exercises 914 on
plate IX are derived from Couperins
evolutions.
9. Moroney, Couperin, Marpurg,
and Roeser, 12425. Plate VII, exercise
30 comes from the three-part ricercar
of the Musicalisches Opfer (1747). Plate
VII, exercises 32 and 33 come from the
G-major fugue and the F -minor fugue
in book 2 of Das wohltemperierte Klavier
(1742). Plate XIX/13 is the last bar of the
little trio on Allein Gott in der Hh (first
setting) from Clavierbung III (1739).
Plate VIII, exercises 41 and 42 and Plate
IX, exercises 22 and 23 are derived from
variations 17 and 23 of the Goldberg
Variations (1741).
See also Bachs Versuch and Kirnbergers
Die Kunst des reinen Satzes in der Musik,
both of which reflect Bachs supposed
teaching method.
12.Ibid.
13.Saint-Lambert, Les principes, 43;
trans. in Harris-Warrick, Principles, 76.
14. Il seroit tres utile de pouvoir
xercer les jeunes personnes faire des
Notes to page 45
tremblemens de tous les doigts: mais
comme cela depend en partie de la dis
position naturle; et que quelquesunes
ont plus ou moins de libert, et de force,
de certains doigts; Il faut laisser ce choix
aux personnes qui les instruisent. Cou
perin, Lart de toucher, 22.
15. (1) La perfection du toucher sur
le clavessin consiste principalement dans
un mouvement des doigts bien dirig. (2)
Ce mouvement peut sacqurir par une
simple mchanique; mais il faut quon
sache le mnager. (3) Cette mchanique
nest autre chose quun exercice frequent
dun mouvement rgulier: les disposi
tions quelle demande sont naturelles
un chacun; il en est comme de celles
quon a pour marcher, ou si lon veut,
pour courir. (4) La facult de marcher
ou de courir vient de la souplesse du jar
ret: celle de toucher le clavessin depend
de la souplesse des doigts leur racine.
(5) Lexercice continuel o lon est de
marcher, rend un chacun le mouvement
du jarret Presque galement libre. Le peu
dexercice que nous faisons, au contraire,
du mouvement necessaire aux doigts pour
toucher le clavessin, ne permet pas que
leur libert se developpe: dailleurs nos
habitudes particulieres font contracter
aux doigts des mouvemens si contraires
celui quexige le clavessin, que cette libert
en est sans cesse traverse. . . . (8) Il re
sulte donc de toutes ces remarques quun
exercice frequent & bien entendu est
lauteur infaillible de la parfaite execution
sur le clavessin: & cest del que jai conu
une mthode particuliere, pour renouvel
ler dans les doigts le mouvement dont la
nature les a douez, & pour en augmenter
la libert. . . . (19) Il faut que chaque
doigt ait son mouvement particulier &
indpendant de tout autre: de sorte que
163
quand mme on est oblig de transporter

la main un certain endroit du clavier, il
faut encore que le doigt dont on se sert
pour lors, tombe sur la touche par son
seul mouvement. . . . (24) Souvenez-vous
de faire agir chaque doigt par son mouve
ment particulier; & observez que le doigt
qui quitte une touche, en soit toujours si
proche, quil paroisse la toucher. . . . (26)
Observez une grande galit de mouve
mens entre chaque doigts, & sur-tout ne
precipits jamais ces mouvemens: car la
lgeret & la vitesse ne sacquierent que
par cette galit de mouvemens; & sou
vent pour trop se presser, on fuit ce quon
cherche. (27) Il faut tcher dacquerir le
mouvement necessaire dans les doigts, &
de donner chacun deux son mouvement
particulier, avant que de mettre leur force
lpreuve: de sorte que je ne propose de
les placer dabord sur le clavier, que pour
quon saccoutume proportionner la dis
tance de lun lautre celle des touches
de ce clavier. Mais comme on a dabord
de la peine les faire mouvoir chacun en
particulier, celle quon auroit encore
leur faire enfoncer les touches, seroit ca
pable de dtruire la perfection qui doit se
trouver dans leur mouvement. Rameau,
16. Ceci se rpte souvent sans dis
continuer, et avec galit de mouvement.
Rameau, Pices de clavecin, 17; trans. in
Williams, ed., Bach, Handel, Scarlatti,
223.
17. Cette leon se pratique dabord
de chaque main en particulier; & que
quand on se sent matre de conduire
ses doigts conformment lexplication
prcdent, on lxerce des deux mains
ensemble; on fait commencer une main
avant lautre dautant de notes que lon
veut, tantt plus, tantt moins; enfin
164
Notes to pages 4548
on sy prend de toutes les manires

possibles, jusqu ce quon reconnoisse
que les mains soient dans une si bonne
habitude, quil ny a plus lieu de craindre
quelles se gtent: ce qui ne sacquiert pas
en un jour, & ce qui cependant abrge
infiniment ltude ncessaire pour ar
river au point de perfection quon dsire.
Rameau, Pices de clavecin, 18.
18.Bach, Essay, 42.
19. Ibid., 4243.
20. In chapter 4, I discuss more fully
the technique of contracting the hand.
21. La principal causa para con
seguir grande execucin, es el mucho
exercicio de estudiar en el instrumento; y
segun fuere este, ser el efecto producido
de esta causa: Si fuere poco el exercicio,
conseguir poca execucin en los dedos;
y si fuera mucho, mucha.
Aunque tambien ay algunos sugetos,
que menos trabajo que otros, consiguen
mas execucion: y en estos procede de la
causa de tener mas flexibles los nervios
naturalmente, por la poca edad, so
brada robustez. Los que necessitan de
mayor exercicio, son todos aquellos que
no tienen tanta flexibilidad en los nervios,
por ser de complexion muy devil, por
aver comenado estudiar dicha facultad
fuera de el estado de la niz: y este de
fecto natural, no tiene otro modo para
corregirse, que el de mucha aplicacion al
estudio. Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 472.
22.Bach, Essay, 39.
23. La douceur du toucher dpend
touches quil est possible. Il est sens de
croire (lexperience part) qui une main
qui tombe de hault donne un coup plus
sec, que sy elle touchoit de prs; et que la
plume tire un Son plus dur de la corde.
24.Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 4v; trans.

25.Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 8; trans.
26. When the quill is plucked vio
lently or too quickly, one hears only the
percussive attack and not the tone. If the
finger leaves the key perpendicularly,
instead of horizontally toward the palm,
the sound is cut off too abruptly.
27. Ay unos, que pulsan las teclas,
no mas que medio sonar, otros, que
en las glossas de punto punto es mas
el tiempo que se calla, que el que suena,
otros hieren con tanta violencia, que
vezes descomponen los teclados; y otros,
que al tiempo de assentar el dedo, vio
lentan la tecla un lado, otro; causa
de donde se origina muchas vezes el que
darse algunas.
Estos, y otros defectos se hallan en
algunos Organistas, que pudieron los
Maestros reparalos los principios, y
por negligencia suya son las habilidades
defectuosas, que por esso conviene, que
los principios, en qualquiera ciencia de
monstrable, se elija buen Maestro, bien
experimentado, porque la doctrina la
admite el Discipulo qual se le ensea.
Porque, como dize el Angelico Doc
tor, la doctrina es un conocimiento
recibido de otro. Si esta se recibe Buena
los principios, se conserva siempre del
mismo modo. La enseana que deven
tener los Maestros con los Principiantes,
en quanto la pulsacion de las teclas ha
de ser, que al tiempo de el herir, sea el
dedo solo el que mueva; que algunos no
solo mueven la mano, si el brazo. Otros,
para mudar los dedos de las teclas, levan
tan la mano, y este movimiento es super
Notes to page 49
fluo, porque basta el de los dedos: que
por esso les di la naturaleza Facultad de
moverlos, sin necessitar del movimiento
de la mano. Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 461.
28. Harpsichords may also suffer
from key action that is too heavy. One
should try to voice the quills so they
are not over-plucking, or check to see
that the wood of the jacks or the slots
into which they fall are not swollen,
causing them to stick. Temperature
and humidity are two chief factors that
affect both the swelling and drying out
of wood. When working correctly, the
jacks should rise and fall back into their
slots smoothly and easily. There may be
other reasons for a stiff action on a harp
sichord. The answer to this problem is
not to force ones fingers to press harder,
although in live performance situations
where we do not always have the option
of maintaining the instrument as we so
desire, we may be forced to reconcile
these differences by altering our touch.
29. This resembles Rameaus discus
sion of the movement required for good
technique on both the harpsichord and
the organ. Rameau describes a motion
from finger to finger, key to key, that is
simultaneous in its movementas one
drops down, the previous one is raised.
Du doigt par lequel on a commenc,
on pass son voisin, & ainsi de lun
lautre; en observant que celui qui vient
denfoncer une touche, la quitte dans le
mme instant que son voisin en enfonce
une autre: car le lever dun doigt & le
toucher dun autre doivent tre executs
dans le mme moment. Rameau, Pices
de clavecin, 17.
30. Importa tambien, que la pul
sacin de las teclas en toda quanta musica
se executa, sea natural, y nada violenta.
165
Unos levantan la mano de el teclado

sobradamente para herir, otros aplican
tanta fuera los dedos, que se oyen mas
los golpes de las teclas, que los sonidos de
ellas, y otros las pulsan con tanta suavi
dad, que no las abaxan suficientemente
para formar los sonidos con propriedad.
Los que levantan las manos tocan im
proprissimamente, porque tanto quanto
mas se levante la mano de la tecla, tanto
mayor ha de ser el intervalo de tiempo de
sonido sonido, quitando las figuras de
su justo valor, y por esso los tales no dn
el ayre proprio la musica.
Los que aaden fuerza los dedos
para pulsar las teclas, haziendo habito
de ello, se impossibilitan para la mayor
velocidad de las glossas: porque por la
fuerza que aplican, se les cansan mas
prontamente las manos. Y aunque dan
la razon que lo hazen por poder executar
bien en los Organos que tienen los tecla
dos fuertes, no es razon que convence;
porque es con mas excesso la fuerza que
aplican, que la que es necessario para
abaxarlas por fuertes que estn.
. . . Las manos, ni los dedos nunca se
han de levanter del teclado para pulsar
las teclas, si tan solamente lo que baste
para que dexe de sonar la tecla, de modo,
que apenas se perciba el intervalo de
tiempo que ay de sonido sonido: ni
tampoco ha de ser tanta la fuerza, que
se aplique los dedos que sea excesiva, si
tan solamente aquella que sea necessaria
para abaxar la tecla.
. . . Ay unos sugetos, que natural
mente tienen la mano mas pesada,
alcanan mas fuerza en ella; y estos
menos aplicacion, pueden proporcionar
la pulsacin de las teclas. Otros, por el
extremo contrario, siendo la fuerzas muy
deviles, necessitan para regular la pulsa
166
Notes to pages 4951
cin de aplicar la fuerza con mas eficacia,

habituandose desde los principios, hasta
llegar conseguir con el habito, assi la
igualdad general de la pulsacin, como la
particular de algunos dedos, que natu
ralmente no alcanan tanta fuerza como
otros. Nassarre, Esquela, pt. 2, 47172.
32. Ne levant point les doigts trop
haut en joant, & nappuyant point aussi
trop fort sur les touches. Saint-Lam
bert, Les principes, 42.
33. Souvenez-vous de faire agir
chaque doigt par son mouvement par
ticulier; & observez que le doigt qui
quitte une touche, en soit toujours
si proche, quil paroisse la toucher.
34. Quand on se sent la main form,
on diminu petit--petit la hauteur du
siege, jusqu ce que les coudes se trou
vent un peu au-dessous du niveau du
clavier; ce qui engage pour lors tenir la
main comme cole au clavier, & ce qui
achve de procurer au toucher toute la
liaison quon peut y introduire. Ibid., 19.
35. Il faut que les doigts tombent
sur les touches, & non pas quils les frap
pent; il faut de plus quils coulent, pour
ainsi dire, de lun lautre en se suc
cedant: ce qui doit vous prvenir sur la
douceur avec laquelle vous devez vous y
prendre en commenant. Ibid., 17.
37. The original French uses jeu coulant (flowing playing).
38. Tout le monde sait que cet
illustre personage a excell pardessus
les autres, tant cause des pices quil
a composes, que parce quil a est la
source de la belle manire du toucher,
o il faisoit parotre un jeu brillant & un
jeu coulant si bien conduit & si bien m
nag lun avec lautre quil estoit impos

sible de mieux faire. On sait quoutre
la science & la nettet, il avoit une deli
catesse de main que les autres navoient
pas; de sorte que sil faisoit un accord,
quun autre en mme temps et imit
en faisant la mme chose, on y trouvoit
neanmoins une grande diffrence; & la
raison en est, comme jay dit, quil avoit
une adresse & une maniere dappliquer
les doigts sur les touches qui estoit in
connu aux autres. Le Gallois, Lettre,
6869; trans. in Moroney Couperin,
Marpurg, and Roeser. (See Moroney,
p. 112, on a belle manire.) Le Gallois
uses the expression belle manire du
toucher (a beautiful manner of play
ing). See also Moroney, Chambon
nires and his Belle manire.
39. Il sensuit donc evidemment
de tout ce que nous avons dit quencore
quil y ait parmy les Matres differentes
manieres de joer, il est vray nean
moins de dire que quelques unes de
ces manieres sont plus excellentes que
les autres; & mme quil y en a une qui
doit lemporter par dessus toutes, parce
quelle est plus naturelle, plus dlicate,
plus propre, & par consequent plus
agreable; & telle est celle de Chambon
nires. Le Gallois, Lettre, 82.
40. cause quils les passent trop
viste; ou quils nappuyent pas assez fort
pour les faire entendre, ou quils frap
pent les touches au lieu de les couler.
Ibid., 77.
41. Mais si le jeu brillant a ses
defauts, le jeu coulant a aussi les siens,
qui sont aisez remarquer dans ceux
qui laffectation fait couler leur jeu
avec beaucoup de gehenne. Car ils font
de si grandes contorsions de mains &
de doigts; ils les levent les uns sur les
Notes to pages 5161

autres avec tant dexcez, en les serrant
extraordinairement, que cela dgoute &
fait piti. Ibid., 79.
42. Et cest dequoy nous avons
un bel exemple dans les personnes de
Chambonnires & de Couperin, dont
nous avons parl, & que nous avons
proposez comme deux chefs de secte.
Ibid., 85.
43. Lun touchoit le coeur, & lautre
touchoit loreille. Ibid., 85.
44. Parce quelle est plus naturelle,
plus dlicate, plus propre, & par con
squent plus agreable; & telle est celle de
Chambonnires. Ibid., 82.
45. La premire est cette belle &
agreable maniere dont feu Chambon
nires se servoit. Tout le monde sait
que cet illustre personnage a excell par
dessus les autres . . . que parce quil a est
la source de la belle maniere du toucher.
Ibid., 6869.
46. On sait quoutre la science & la
nettet, il avoit une delicatesse de main
que les autres navoient pas. Ibid., 69.
47. Nappesentissez jamais le
toucher de vos doigts par leffort de votre
main; que ce soit au contraire votre main
que en soutenant vous doigts, rende leur
toucher plus leger: cela est dune grande
consquense. Rameau, Pices de clavecin, 17.
48.Mersenne, Harmonie universelle;
trans. in Chapman, 21314.
49.Parsons, The Elements of Music, 10.
51. Griepenkerl in his 1819 edition
of J. S. Bachs Chromatic Fantasy and
Fugue; trans. in Faulkner, Griepenkerl
on J. S. Bachs Keyboard Technique,
6364. Griepenkerls remarks on Bachs
keyboard technique are derived from
Forkels biography. In the title page of
167
his edition of the Chromatic Fantasy

and Fugue, Griepenkerl traces his lin
eage from J. S. Bach to Forkel through
Wilhelm Friedemann Bach, not C. P. E.
Bach.
52. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasia, fol. 49r; trans. in Sachs and Ife,
Anthology of Early Keyboard Methods,
24. See Delft, Schnellen: A Quintes
sential Articulation Technique in
Eighteenth-Century Keyboard Playing,
in Hogwood, The Keyboard in Baroque
Europe, 188n4. See also Art of Playing the
Fantasia, 120.
53. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasia, fol. 49v; trans. in Anthology of Early
Keyboard Methods, 25. See also Art of
Playing the Fantasia,131.
54.Bach, Essay, 46, 73.
55.Forkel, ber Johann Sebastian
Bachs Leben, 1213; trans. in David and
Mendel, eds., The Bach Reader, 307308.
Bachs Versuch, however, nowhere men
tions this scratch technique, other than
in playing mordents.
57. Griepenkerl; trans. in Faulkner,
Griepenkerl on J. S. Bachs Keyboard
Technique, 64.
58. Quantz, trans. in Reilly, On Playing the Flute, 25960. Quantz identifies
this player in his index as J. S. Bach, with
reference to his way of placing the fin
gers at the keyboard.
59. Mllers revised edition of Lh
leins Clavierschule, 52.
60.Hummel, A Complete Theoretical
and Practical Course of Instructions, on the
Art of Playing the Pianoforte, 65.
61. Mller and Czerny, Grosse Fortepiano-Schule, 39.
62.Nurmi, A Plain & Easy Introduction to the Harpsichord, 2223.
168
Notes to pages 6271
63.Buchner, Fundamentbuch (ca.

1520, 1551); trans. in Soderlund, How Did
They Play? 2324.
64. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasa. trans. in Soderlund, How Did They
Play? 40.
65.Saint-Lambert, Les principles,
100.
66.Forkel, Johann Sebastian Bach,
5253, 60.
67.Burney, An Account of the Musical
Performances in Westminster Abbey . . . in
Commemoration of Handel, 35.
68. La perfection du toucher sur le
clavessin consiste principalement dans un
mouvement des doigts bien dirig. . . .
La jointure de poignet doit toujours tre
souple: cette souplesse qui se rpand
pour lors sur les doigts, leur donne toute
la libert & toute la legeret ncessaires.
69.Broderip, Plain and Easy Instructions, 12.
70.Couperin, Pices de clavecin,
trans. Gilbert, xxiii.
71. Hays quoting Marpurg in his
periodical, Der critische Musicus an der
Spree, Berlin, 26 August 1749, 206.
73.Quantz, On Playing the Flute, 253;
C. P. E. Bach, Versuch, 2:36869.
74.Bach, Essay, 64.
75. Ibid., 64, fig. 179.
76. Hkkinen, The Clavichord and
the Harpsichord, 26.
77. Ibid., 24.
78. Ibid., 26.
79. David Fuller, Duphly, Grove
Music Online.
80. Marpurg (1754), quoted in Fuller,
Duphly.
81. My first harpsichord teacher,
Laurette Goldberg, made me agree to
give up piano for the first three years of

learning the harpsichord so as to make
the switch and not spoil my hand
with the muscles needed for playing the
larger Romantic repertoire on the piano.
I have since returned to playing the
modern piano, but my touch has become
more harpsichord-like: with less arm
weight, more delicate, and very fingeroriented.
1112.
85. Lhlein; trans. in Wilson, Lh
leins Klavierschule, 97.
86.Rellstab, Anleitung fr Clavierspieler, Anleitung, 2; trans. Jenkins, The
Legato Touch and the Ordinary Man
ner, 140.
87. G. F. Wolf, Unterricht, 2nd ed.,
Einleitung, 11; trans. Jenkins, 140.
3. Articulation
1. Classical rhetoric dates back to
pre-Socratic philosophers. In ancient
and medieval times, oratory was taught
as a subject that dealt with precise,
effective, and persuasive use of language
through the study of literary models,
invention of new knowledge, and a
process of question and answer. In
Western culture, it was later taught as
part of the trivium (rhetoric, logic, and
grammar). Modern studies of rhetoric
incorporate a wider range of meanings
than in ancient times. See George J.
Buelow, Rhetoric and Music, Grove
Music Online.
2.Rameau, Dissertation on the
Different Methods of Accompaniment,
trans. Hayes, 28.
3.Trk, Klavierschule, 329.
Notes to pages 7177

4. Buelow, Rhetoric and Music.
5. See Bruce Dickey and David La
socki, Tonguing, Grove Music Online.
7.Bach, Essay, 118.
8. Ibid., 149, 154, 155.
9. Ibid., 149.
10. Ibid., 117.
11. Ibid., 14849.
12.Ibid., 115.
13.Lhlein, Clavierschule (1765), 1:69;
quoted and trans. in Jenkins, Legato
Touch, 99.
14.Quantz, On Playing the Flute, 129.
15.Ibid.
16.Koch, Musikalisches Lexicon, s.v.
Adagio, 6364; trans. in Jenkins, Le
gato Touch, 267.
17. David Fallows, Tempo and Ex
pression Marks, Grove Music Online.
18. Cest un ornament considerable
et politesse du toucher, que demarquer
distinctement touttes les notes, et den
couler subtile quelques unes, ce que la
manire de chanter enseigne propre
ment. Pour distinguer et marquer les
notes, il faut leuer tost et non pas si
haut les doigts, cest a dire que (par
exemple) en faisant une diminution ou
roulade de notes consecutives, il faut
leuer promptement lune en frappant
lautre et ainsy des autres; car si vous
ne leuez lune quapres que vous aurez
frappe lautre, pour lors ce nest pas
distinguer mais confondre les notes.
Nivers, Livre dorgue I, section De la
distinction et du coulement des notes,
preface.
19.Sulzer, Allgemeine Theorie, Vor
trag, 1253; quoted and trans. in Jenkins,
Legato Touch, 266.
20. Just as ancient writers and orators
(e.g., Aristotle, Cicero, and Quintilian)
169
used rhetorical means to influence the

emotions of their listeners, the language
of several Baroque music treatises teach
es the composer to move the affects (Ger.
Affektenlehre), rationalized emotional
states or passion, such as sadness, anger,
hate, joy, love, and jealousy. Beginning in
the late sixteenth century, music theo
rists drew analogies between rhetoric
and music. From the mid-seventeenth
century onward, several treatises de
voted sections to describing affects as
they relate to musical expression. These
include writings by Mersenne, Kircher,
Werckmeister, Printz, Mattheson,
Marpurg, Scheibe, and Quantz. See also
George J. Buelow, Affects, Theory of
the, Grove Music Online.
347.
22. Ibid., 352.
23. Ibid., 348.
24. Ibid., 352.
25.Wolf, Unterricht (1784), 2nd ed.,
81; quoted and trans. in Jenkins, Legato
Touch, 267.
26. I suggest starting with these
sources: Walther, Musicalisches Lexicon;
Koch, Musikalisches Lexicon; Mersenne,
Harmonie universelle; Rousseau, Dictionnaire de musique; Brossard, Dictionnaire
de musique; Strahle, An Early Music
Dictionary.
27. The Collins German Dictionary,
8th reprint, 1988, defines ordentlich as
tidy, neat, or orderly. It defines gewhnlich as normal, ordinary, usual, ha
bitual, or common. See Jenkins, Legato
Touch, 247. He suspects that the or
dinary manner relates primarily to the
performance of fast passagework (269).
28.Diruta, Il Transilvano, 1:63; trans.
in Soderlund, How Did They Play? 69.
170
Notes to pages 7781
29. Otros dn por otro extremo, que

es no dr el movimiento bastante los
dedos, pues al herir una tecla, no levan
tan el de la que hirieron antes tiempo,
y se alcanan los sonidos uno otro. Se
ha de huir de estos dos extremos, porque
son inconvenientes, y no pequeos, regu
lando el tiempo de modo, que los sonidos
se sucedan uno otro, ni tampoco que se
alcancen, porque no aya confusion. Na
30.Marpurg, Anleitung, 25; quoted
and trans. in Jenkins, Legato Touch,
220.
31. Sowohl dem Schleifen als Ab
stossen ist das ordentliche fortgehen
entgegen gesetzet, welches darinnen
besteht, dass man ganz hurtig kurz vor
her, ehe man die folgende Note berh
ret, den Finger von der vorhergehenden
Taste aufhebet. Dieses ordentliche
Fortgehen wird, weil es allezeit voraus
gesetzet wird, niemahls angezeiget.
Marpurg, Anleitung, 29; trans. by Ted
die Hwang. There appears to be no
actual mention of a perceptible silence
in Marpurgs treatise other than in his
discussion of detached playing, when he
advocates shortening the note values by
one half if staccato dots are placed above
the notes.
33.Hodermann, Kurzer Unterricht
fr Musik-Anfnger; quoted and trans. in
Jenkins, Legato Touch, 258.
34. Portato produces smooth, evenly
toned notes, but, unlike legato, every
note is separated from the next by a very
short rest.
35.Hensel, Ausbende Klavierschule,
vol. 1: B, Regeln des Vortrages; quoted
and trans. in Jenkins, Legato Touch,
266.

335, 340, 345; Jenkins, Legato Touch,
238, 248.
37.Rellstab, Anleitung, pt. 3, xii; Jen
kins, Legato Touch, 248.
38. Sobald ein Finger seine Taste
angeschlagen hat, sobald muss er auch
wieder aufgehoben werden. Merbach,
Clavierschule, 16, 37; Jenkins, Legato
Touch, 248, 250.
39.Petschke, Versuch eines Unter
richts zum Klavierspielen, appendix, 8;
trans. Jenkins, Legato Touch, 250.
40. Du doigt par lequel on a com
menc, on pass son voisin, & ainsi de
lun lautre; en observant que celui qui
vient denfoncer une touche, la quitte
dans le mme instant que son voisin en
enfonce une autre: car le lever dun doigt
& le toucher dun autre doivent tre exe
cuts dans le mme moment. Rameau,
41.Legatissimo: a kind of super legato
in which the preceding note is held for a
short moment together with the follow
ing one. Apel and Daniel, Harvard Brief
Dictionary of Music, s.v. Legato.
42.Correa, Libro de tientos y discursos de msica practica, Intro. 65; quoted
and trans. in Brauchli, Aspects (1992):
92.
Harpsichord, 26.
44. Ibid., 19, 26.
45. Ibid., 21.
46. Il faut conserver une liaison par
faite dans ce quon y execute. Couperin,
Lart de toucher, 61.
47. Il faut que les doigts tombent sur
les touches & non quils les frappent, &
de plus quils coulent de lune lautre
en se succdant; cest--dire, quil ne faut
quitter une touche quaprs en avoir pris
Notes to pages 8286

une autre. Ceci regarde particulirement
le jeu franois.
48. Le mme instant que son voisin
en enfonce une autre. Rameau, Pices de
clavecin, 17.
49.Rameau, Treatise on Harmony,
377444.
50.Miller, Institutes, chap. 5, lesson
1x, 14.
51. Rameau includes this piece in
Pices de clavecin (1724) as part of his
table of ornaments. (As I mentioned in
chapter 2, Miller uses a fingering system
of +, 1, 2, 3, 4 to denote the thumb, in
dex, etc.)
52.Miller, Institutes, chap. 9, 20.
53. Ibid., chap. 10, 22.
54.Hllmandel, Principles of Music
Calculated for the Pianoforte or Harpsichord, 21; quoted and trans. in Jenkins,
Legato Touch, 258.
55.Marpurg, Clavierstcke mit einem
practischen Unterricht fr Anfnger und
Gebter, 3; quoted and trans. in Jenkins,
Legato Touch, 238.
56. Couler cest ne relever le doigt de
la note prcdente que lon nait touch la
suivante. Marpurg, Principes du clavecin,
34.
345.
58.Wolf, Unterricht, 84; quoted and
trans. in Jenkins, Legato Touch, 248.
59.Rigler, Anleitung zum Gesange,
und dem Klaviere oder die Orgel zu
spielen, 92. His treatise is probably more
for piano or organ than for harpsichord.
Nonetheless, he writes about overlap
ping notes, which pertain to multiple
keyboard possibilities.
60.Milchmeyer, Die wahre Art das
Pianoforte zu spielen, 6; quoted and trans.
in Jenkins, Legato Touch, 105.
171
61.Parsons, The Elements of Music,

10.
62. Finger substitution on the key
board applies to the method of changing
fingers upon a key that is being played
in order to facilitate the use of that (for
mer) finger for the following note, usu
ally for the sake of joining notes together
in a legato manner. Couperin gives sev
eral examples of this technique in Lart
de toucher le clavecin. See Rodgers, Early
Keyboard Fingering, ca. 15201620,
74, for a discussion on the application
of similar techniques used by Sancta
Maria and pp. 87 and 89 for its use by
Prencourt.
63. Remarqus quelle liaison les
changemens de doigts donnent au jeu!
Mais, on me dira quil faut plus dadrsse
que dans lancienne manire. Jen con
uiens. Couperin, Lart de toucher, 46.
64. Ces deux chifres, sur une mme
note, marquent le changement dun
doigt un autre: avec la difference, que,
le chifre le plus considerable tant pos
le premier, indique, quil faut monter en
suite; et que le moindre, au contraire,
sert descendre. Ibid., 31. Marpurg re
peats Couperins wording almost verba
tim in his Anleitung, introduction, chap.
7; trans. in Hays, Marpurgs Anleitung,
1:79.
65.Couperin, Lart de toucher, premier prlude, mm. 14. This piece is one
of eight preludes that Couperin com
posed as teaching pieces.
66. Dans le genre de musique har
monieux & li, il est bon de saccoutumer
substituer un doigt la place dun autre
sans relever la touche; cette manire
donne des facilits pour lexcution &
prolonge la dure des sons. Rousseau,
Dictionnaire de musique, s.v. Doigter.
172
Notes to pages 8689
67.Bach, Essay, 72.

68.Hartong, Clavier-Anweisung, 27;
quoted and trans. in Lister, Traditions,
222.
69. Mais si le jeu brillant a ses
defauts, le jeu coulant a aussi les siens,
qui sont aisez remarquer dans ceux
qui laffectation fait couler leur jeu avec
beaucoup de gehenne. Car ils font de
si grandes contortions de mains & de
doigts; ils les levent les uns sur les autres
avec tant dexcez, en les serrant extraordi
nairement, que cela dgoute & fait piti.
. . . Ainsi tout ce quon en peut dire est
quen effect leur jeu est si fort coul quil
ressemble pltost un jeu de viele, o
force de couler le jeu na point de mouve
ment, qu un veritable jeu de clavessin.
Le Gallois, Lettre, 79. See also Fuller,
French Harpsichord Playing in the Sev
enteenth Century after Le Gallois.
70. Wo die Noten / wie alhier /
zusammen gezogen seind / is solches
eine besondre art / gleich wie die Violis
ten mit dem Bogen schleiffen zu machen
pflegen. Wie dann solche Manier bey
furnehmen Violisten Deutscher Nation
/ nicht ungebreuchlich / gibt auch auf
gelindschlgigen Orgeln / Regalen /
Clavicymbaln und Instrumenten / einen
recht liebilichen und anmutigen con
centum, derentwegen ich dann solche
Manier mir selbsten gelieben lassen /
und angeiwehnet. Scheidt, Tabulatura
nova (1624); trans. in Paul Kenyon, Imitatio Violistica in Scheidts Tabulatura
nova, 45.
71. Une liaison qui embrasse deux
notes differentes . . . marque quil ne
faut lever le doigt de dessus la premire
quaprs avoir touch la seconde.
Rameau, Pices de clavecin, Table des
agrments.
72. Car le lever dun doigt & le

toucher dun autre doivent tre executs
dans le mme moment. Rameau, Pices
de clavecin, 17.
73. Un demi-circle qui embrasse
deux notes affises sur diffrens degrs,
signifie quil faut couler ces notes. Couler
cest ne relever le doigt de la note prc
dent que lon nait touch la suivante.
344.
76. Ibid., 345.
77. Une liaison qui embrasse plu
sieurs notes, marque quil faut les tenir
toutes dun bout de la liaison lautre.
Rameau, Pices de clavecin, Table des
agrments.
78. La regle gnrale est quon doit
garder toutes les notes que la liaison
embrasse, jusqu-ce quil soit temps de
lacher la dernire; mais il y a des occa
sions o il ne faut pas les garder toutes.
Quand la premire note & la dernire
sont longues; cest--dire rondes ou
blanches, & que les autres sont brves,
cest--dire croches ou doubles croches
. . . on ne doit garder que la premire &
la dernire, & lcher toutes les autres.
Mais sans examiner si la premire
& la dernire sont plus longues que les
autres, il suffit que les notes que la liaison
embrasse marchent par degrez successifs
pour obliger ne garder que la premire
& la dernire. Ainsi dans les exemples qui
suivent, quoi-que les notes soient toutes
dune mme valeur, on ne doit garder que
la premire & la dernire, de celles que la
liaison embrasse, parce quelles marchent
par degrez qui se succdent, & qui ne
sont point interrompus. Saint-Lambert,
Les principes, De la liaison, 13.
Notes to pages 9093

79. On touche toutes les notes que
la liaison embrasse, & ce qui est leffet de
la liaison; on garde toutes ces notes aprs
les avoir touches, quoi-que leur valeur
soit expire, & on ne les lche que lors
quil est temps de lcher la dernire.
Pour expliquer cecy plus clairement,
je suppose quatre notes enchanes par
une liaison ABCD, cydessus, selon
lordre o elles sont ranges. A, se doit
toucher la premire; B, la seconde; C,
la troisime, & D, la quatrime. Mais
en touchant B, il ne faut point lcher
A, ni en touchant C, lcher B, ny A, ny
en touchant D, lcher ny A ny B, ny C.
On doit garder toutes ces notes, & ne
les quitter que lorsquil est temps de
lcher la dernire; cest--dire, lorsque
D, a achev sa valeur. Alors on les lche
toutes la fois, quoi-quon les ait tou
ches lune aprs lautre. . . .
La liaison semploye particulirement
dans les prludes, & quelque fois aussi
dans les pices, mais plus rarement.
Saint-Lambert, Les principes, De la liai
son, 1314.
80. David Ledbetter, Style bris,
Grove Music Online.
81.Diruta, Il Transilvano, Manner
of Playing Quilled Instruments Musical
ly, trans. in Crozier, The Principles of
Keyboard Technique in Il Transilvano,
22. Diruta refers to an early Italian harp
sichord with a crisp, robust, and often
pungent tone that decays quite quickly.
This is partially due to the fulcrum
points of the key levers being forward
of center, and as a result, the plucking
point feels strong and creates a rapid key
action.
82. Li cominciamenti delle toccate
sieno fatte adagio, et arpeggiando e cosi
nelle ligature o vero durezze, come anche
173
nel mezzo del opera si batteranno in

sieme, per non lasciar voto listromento; il
qual battimento ripiglierassi a beneplacito
di chi suona. Frescobaldi, Toccate e partite dintavolatura di cimablo . . . libro primo
(Rome, 1615; rev. and enl. 1616). Giovanni
Scipione quotes Frescobaldi almost verba
tim in his Intavolatura di cembalo et organo
(Perugia, 1650). Lorenzo Pennas Li primi
albori musicali (Bologna, 1672), book 3,
chap. 20, no. 19, issues the same advice.
83. Cited in David Fallows, Adagio,
Grove Music Online.
84.The acciaccatura is sometimes
thought of as a crushed note. This
art of placing nonharmonic notes in an
arpeggio is discussed in various trea
tises, including C. P. E. Bachs Versuch
and Marpurgs Die Kunst das Clavier
zu spielen, to name a few. C. P. E. Bach
indicates this with an upward diagonal
stroke through the stem between the
chords harmonic notes. The Italian
theorists Francesco Gasparini (1708)
and Francesco Geminiani (1749) use the
term acciaccatura to imply the touching
dissonant notes, specifically, below the
harmonic notes in an arpeggio. For fur
ther reading, see Williams, The Harp
sichord Acciaccatura.
85. In Saint-Lamberts Les principes
du clavecin, De lharpg, 5456, he
suggests a manner of filling out the har
mony: dans lequel on emprunte dautres
notes que celles de laccord pour luy don
ner plus dagrment (in which one lends
other notes to those of the harmony to
give it more embellishment).
86. I see this habit most often among
advanced piano players, most probably
because so much of the Romantic and
later piano repertory demands large
chordal textures that require the fingers
174
Notes to pages 9396
to be spread out or ready to play another

chord. Years of piano exercises that call
for the hands to play chords and then
lift each finger one at a time (for the pur
pose of developing independent finger
strength) may also be a leading cause.
Only when absolutely necessary should
the fingers be outstretched when playing
harpsichord. This is discussed further in
the section entitled Contraction of the
Hand in chapter 4.
87. Roger North, quoted in Anthony
Newman, Bach and The Baroque (New
York: Pendragon Press, 1985), 87.
88. Cette pice doit tre joue avec
beaucoup de got et de sentiment: pour
en donner lintelligence, jay marqu des
petites Croix qui signifient quil faut que
les accords de la Basse, passent avant
ceux du dessus; et tous ceux o ils ne
sen trouvera point, le dessus doit passer
avant la Basse. Forqueray, Pices de
clavecin (1747).
89. Dans toutes les Pieces
dxcution gracieuse ou tendre, on
doit toucher la note de basse, avant
celle de dessus, sans alterer la mesure.
Foucquet, Pices de clavecin, second livre,
preface.
90. Jean Rousseau, Trait de la
viole (Paris, 1687; facsimile, Geneva:
Minkoff, 1975), 7475; trans. in Beverly
Scheibert, Jean-Henry DAnglebert and
the Seventeenth-Century Clavecin School
(Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
1986), 105.
91. For a more detailed discussion
of how ornaments are to be performed,
I refer readers to begin with the articles
by Kenneth Kreitner (Middle Ages and
Renaissance), Louis Jambou (Spain,
15001800), Desmond Hunter (Eng
lish virginalists), Stewart A. Carter
(Italy, 16001650), Peter Walls (Italy,

16501750), Kah-Ming Ng (English and
French Baroque), David Schulenberg
(German Baroque), and Clive Brown
(late eighteenth and nineteenth centu
ries); Ornamentation, Grove Music
Online. In addition to numerous pri
mary sources that offer ornamentation
tables or chapters dedicated to their
application, a great wealth of knowledge
may be gleaned from the manuscripts
themselves. Ornaments may appear as
musical markings attached above or next
to a note and as written-out notes within
the music, and as is often the case, they
may not be notated at all, in which case
they are left to the discretion of the per
former.
94. Although the fingers do not actu
ally touch the strings, which are inside
the instrument, I use this expression to
encourage harpsichordists when touch
ing each key to find the point at which
the plectra are prepared to pluck the
strings.
95.Bach, Essay, 84.
96. Ibid., 83.
97.Ibid., 88.
98.Quantz, On Playing the Flute, 95.
99. Among the French composers
of harpsichord pieces writing in the
Baroque, there is a difference of opinion
concerning the rhythmic application of
the port de voix. Saint-Lambert favors
playing the ornament before the beat,
taking the value from the preceding
note. Although in general there seems to
be a preference for playing ports de voix
on the beat in the seventeenth century
and before the beat for later compos
ers, there is evidence for both methods.
Notes to pages 9698

Some composers, such as Lebgue, even
suggest both ways of playing (see his
Premier livre de clavecin, Sarabande grave
in F Major, mm. 78, and Sarabande
grave in G Minor, m. 3). DAngleberts
ornament table gives on-the-beat ex
amples, but there are several instances
of written-out ports de voix in his pieces
that are clearly meant to be played before
the beat. In chapter 28, Concerning
the Aspiration, Saint-Lambert states
that the manner of playing this and
other ornaments changes from piece to
piece depending on the musical context:
But what is annoying about all this is
that the reader will never thoroughly
understand how all these agrments are
to be executed, because it is impossible
to explain them clearly in writing, since
the manner of executing them changes
according to the pieces in which they are
used. Trans. in Harris-Warrick, Principles of the Harpsichord, 99.
100. Ce trait de plume tir sur les
Notes dans lexpression du Port de Voix,
est une liaison qui signifie quil faut
couler ces Notes-l; cest--dire quil ne
faut pas lever les doigts en les touchant,
mais attendre que la seconde des deux
notes soit touche, pour lever le doigt qui
a touch la premire. Saint-Lambert,
Les principes, De Port de Voix, 49.
101. Dans les pices quon tudie,
on peut en faire aux endroits mme
o ils ne sont pas marquez; retrancher
ceux qui y sont, si lon trouve quils ne
sint pas bien la pice, & y en ajoter
dautres son gr. On peut mme, si
lon veut, negliger tous ceux que jay
enseignez icy (except seulement les
essentiels) & en composer soy-mme de
nouveaux selon son got, si lon se croit
capable den inventer de plus beaux;
175
mais il faut cependant prendre garde

ne se pas donner trop de libert sur ce
sujet, sur-tout dans le commencement;
de peur quen voulant rafiner trop tt,
on ne gtt ce quon voudroit embel
lir: Cest pourquoy il est bon, & mme
necessaire, de sassujettir dabord aux
agrmens des autres, & de ne les faire
quaux endroits o ils sont marquez
dans les pices, jusqu-ce quon soit
assez fort, pour juger sans se tromper,
que dautres ny seront point de mal. On
doit tre persuad, quelque bon got
quon ait pour le clavecin, que si lon
na que six mois dexercice, on ne peut
pas si bien discerner ce qui donne de la
grace au jeu, que ceux qui ont pratiqu
le mtier pendant vingt ou trente ans,
& qui on acquis par cette longue experi
ence, une connoissance plus sre de ce
qui peut embellir leur art. On suivra
donc, si lon men croit, les agrmens que
jenseigne en ce livre, & que je propose
avec dautant plus de libert, que jay peu
dintert quon les suive, y en ayant tres
peu qui soient de moy; & tout le reste
tant des plus clbres matres que notre
sicle ait produit, ce qui seul peut suffire
leur donner de lauthorit. Saint-Lam
bert, Les principes, De laspiration, 57.
102.Diruta, Il Transilvano, Modo di
sonar musicalmente nellistrumento da
penna, ff. 5v6r. Diruta gives examples
of various ornaments. His accenti cor
respond to the modern changing note
or escape note. He explains that the
tremolo is played with the upper auxil
iary note and takes up half the value of
the principal note.
104. Le tremblement coul ou pr
par, quand on reste un peu de tems sur
la note accidentelle avant que de faire le
176
Notes to pages 99102
battement, ou quand on commence par

un battement lent & que lon augmente
de vitesse par une espce de gradation.
105.Bacilly, Lart de bien chanter,
17879; trans. in Neumann, Ornamentation in Baroque and Post-Baroque Music,
24849.
107. Ibid., 20.
108. Johann Gottfried Buchholtz,
Unterricht, 1516.
109. Che le parti della cantilena
siano cantabile: cio che cantano bene.
Zarlino, Le istitutioni harmoniche; quoted
and trans. in David Fallows, Cantabile,
Grove Music Online.
110. Domenico Scarlattis sonatas
that bear the musical marking cantabile
are K144, K490, K544, and K546. Six
others have musical instructions that
include cantabile along with other Italian
musical terms, such as K170 (Andante
moderato e cantabile), K176 (Cantabile andante), K208 (Andante e cantabile), K277
(Cantable andantino), K384 (Cantabile
andante), K507 (Andantino cantabile).
111. Auffrichtige Anleitung wor
mit denen Liebhabern des Clavires,
besonders aber denen Lehrbegierigen
eine detliche Art gezeiget wird . . . am
allermeisten aber eine cantabile Art im
Spielen zu erlangen. Trans. in Derr,
The Two-Part Inventions: Bachs Com
posers Vademecom; trans. also in David
and Mendel, eds., The Bach Reader, 86.
112. On doit consulter la methode
de chanter, par ce quen ces rencontres
lorgue doit imiter la voix. Nivers, Livre
dorgue I, preface.
114. Ibid., 151.
115.Manfredini, Regole armoniche, 1:28.
116. It is especially fun to sing dif

ferent lines of multivoiced fugues or
other imitative pieces while playing the
other polyphonic lines. Aside from sheer
enjoyment, it is a playful challenge that
aids in coordination and the ability to
concentrate on each line in a horizontal
manner, as opposed to only hearing
them together as they sound vertically
with their blended harmonies.
117. Das vermaledeyte Hacken,
welches auch ausgezeichneten Clavier
spielern eigen ist, nicht ausstehen kann,
indem es weder das Ohr noch das Ge
mth ergtzt. Quoted in Deutsch, Schubert, 299; trans. in Blom, Schubert, 436.
118.Czerny, Memoirs; quoted in Jen
kins, Legato Touch, 226; trans. from
Sumner, The Pianoforte, 152.
119.Mreaux, Les clavecinistes de 1637
1790, Clementi, 75; quoted and trans.
in Jenkins, Legato Touch, 228.
120. Anderson, ed., Letters of Mozart
and His Family, 3:1181.
121. Ibid., Mozart to his father, 7 June
1783, 3:126768.
122. Berger, Erluterung eines Mo
zartschen urtheils ber Muzio Cle
menti, 468; quoted and trans. in
Jenkins, Legato Touch, 228.
123.Clementi, Introduction to the Art
of Playing on the Piano Forte, 89.
124.Knecht, Kleine theoretische Klavierschule fr die ersten Anfnger, pt. 3,
12; quoted and trans. in Jenkins, Legato
Touch, 266.
125.Sulzer, Allgemeine Theorie der
schne Knste in Einzeln (1771), Vor
trag, 1253; quoted and trans. in Jen
kins, Legato Touch, 266. See Sulzer,
Blankenburg, Schulz, and Kirnberger,
Allgemeine Theorie der schnen Knste
in Einzeln, and Baker and Christensen,

Aesthetics and the Art of Musical Composition in the German Enlightenment.
126. Marpurg in Der critische Musicus
an Der Spree, 337, commenting on Louis
Bollioud de Mermets essay De la corruption du got dans la musique franoise
(Lyons, 1746); quoted and trans. in Hays,
Marpurgs Anleitung, 2:12.
127.Wolf, Unterricht; trans. in Delft,
Schnellen, in Hogwood, The Keyboard
in Baroque Europe, 18797; Hogwood,
A Supplement, ibid., 145.
128. Hogwood, A Supplement, 146.
129. The French term cadence may
imply a turn or trill (see Jean Rousseau,
Mthode, 8586). It is in this context that
Saint-Lambert uses the word in his trea
tise Les principes du clavecin, 47, 48, 53. It
may also signify a chord progression at
the end of a phrase or a piece, as well as a
falling passage or a scale. Couperin uses
cadence in this context in Lart de toucher,
progrs de septimes, 34. He also
says, Je trouve que nous confondons la
mesure avec ce quon nomme cadence, ou
mouvement. Mesure dfinit la quantit,
et lgalit des temps, et cadence, est
proprement lesprit, et lme quil y faut
joindre. (I find that we confuse measure
with what is called cadence or move
ment. Measure defines the quantity and
the equality of the beats: and cadence is
properly speaking the spirit or the soul
which should be joined to it.) Couperin,
Lart de toucher, 40. It may also imply a
rate or rhythm. (Random House FrenchEnglish English-French Dictionary, 1st ed.,
s.v. Cadence).
130. Car quand on les examine de
bien prs on trouve que leurs cadences
sont souvent tres-presses, & par con
sequent tres-rudes, estant produites par
un trop grand feu: quelles sont battus
177
ingalement, & mal sotenus; ce qui

les prive de lagrement le plus beau quil
y ait dans le jeu; puis quil ny a rien qui
lembellisse plus, ny qui le fasse parotre
davantage que de battre galement & de
bien sotenir: quils ont un mouvement
press ou alter, qui fait que leur mesure
nest pas juste, parce quil la rend ingale,
& ne tient point les temps qui sont neces
saires dans la dernire justesse: que
leur jeu est souvent embroill, & passe
par dessus quantit de touches, quon
nentend qu demy, quelquefois point du
tout; cause quils les passent trop viste;
ou quils nappuyent pas assez fort pour
les faire entendre, ou quils frappent les
touches au lieu de les couler. Enfin on
nobserve dans leur jeu quune perpetuele
cadence, qui empche quon nentende
distinctement le chant de la pice: Et ils
y font continuelement des passages, par
ticulierement dune touch son octave;
ce que Chambonnires, appelloit avec
raison chaudronnier. Voila les dfauts o
sont ordinairement sujets ceux qui suiv
ent cette maniere brillante de joer, pour
bloir le monde, qui lignorance ne
permet pas de les reconnotre. Il y a trespeu de Matres qui ne tombent dans ces
dfauts. Le Gallois, Lettre, 7678.
131. Les sons du clavecin tant
dcids, chacun en particulier; et par
consequent ne pouvant tre enfls ny
diminus: il a paru presquinsoutenable,
jusqu present, quon put donner de
lme cet instrument. . . . Limpressionsensible que je propose, doit son ffet
la cessation; et la suspension des sons,
faites propos; et selon les caractres
quexigent les chants des prludes, et
des pices. Ces deux agrmens par leur
opposition, laissent loreille indtermi
ne: en sorte que dans les occasions ou
178
les instruments archet enflent leurs

sons, la suspension de ceux du clavecin
semble, (par un effect contraire) retracer
loreille la chose souhait. Couperin,
Lart de toucher, 1516.
132. Quant leffet-sensible de laspi
ration il faut dtacher la note, sur laquelle
elle est pose, moins vivement dans les
choses tendres, et lentes, que dans celles
qui sont lgres, et rapides. Ibid., 18.
133. A Lgard de la suspension! elle
nest gueres usite que dans les morceaux
tendres, et lents. Le silence qui prcde
la note sur laquelle elle est marque doit
tre rgl par le got de la personne qui
excute. Ibid., 18.
134.Saint-Lambert, Les principes, 57.
135. Ibid., 56; DAnglebert, Pices de
clavecin, Table des agrments.
136. La pratique de ce dtach est
fort necessaire dans de certaine pieces
dun mouvement gay, particulirement
lorsque la note qui precede le tremble
ment est un degr plus haut, & celle qui
precede le pinc un degr plus bas. Il na
pas mauvaise grce non plus en dautres
pieces & en dautres occasions; mais
cest au bon got juger des endroits o
il faut lemployer. Saint-Lambert, Les
principes, 56.
137. Marie-Dominique-Joseph En
gramelle, Tonotechnie ou Lart de noter
les cylindres, and Dom Bdos de Celles
(Benedictine monk), Lart du facteur
dorgues (quatrime partie), quoted and
See also Hans-Peter Schmitz and Arthur
W. J. G. Ord-Hume, Engramelle, MarieDominique-Joseph, Grove Music Online.
138. Ludger Lohman, in his entry
Touch in Kipnis, Harpsichord and
Clavichord: An Encyclopedia, says, For
the sake of general sound quality, ex
tremely slow and extremely fast key

releases should be avoided in order to
minimize quill or damper noises. This
is sound advice as a generalization, but
there are numerous instances in which
these extreme touches (both in contact
and release) are necessary for the sake
of drama and musical expression.
139. Halte man sich bey einem
solchen accentuirten Tone einem Mo
ment lnger auf, als es seine stimmte
Zeitdauer erfordert. Koch, Musikali
sches Lexicon, s.v. Accent, 49.
140. In continuo playing, there are
numerous ways to emphasize a note or
a chord: playing more notes to make
chords fuller, changing tessitura, playing
a different inversion, adding agogics, etc.
However, my book focuses on solo play
ing, not playing from a figured bass, al
though the issues pertaining to beautiful
harpsichord technique apply to continuo
playing as well.
142.Bach, Essay, 157. Bach differen
tiates notes that are fully held with
those that are connected (Die Noten,
welche weder, gestossen noch geschlieff
noch ausgehalten).
143. Ibid., 129.
356. Trk is referring here to principal
notes, not grace notes, the lengths of
which vary depending on different
criteria.
145.Rellstab, Anleitung, pt. 3, xii;
146. Es mus jede Note genau so lange
gehalten werden, als ihr werth dauert, es
msste denn sein, das andere Umstnde
es verhinderten. Wolf, Unterricht, 27.
147. Ingal (French, literally uneven)
is a term used primarily in French music

from the mid-seventeenth through late
eighteenth centuries. Pairs of notes of
identical time duration, such as eighth
notes, are played unequally. As a con
sequence, dotted notes are played overdotted, sometimes with a rest between
the dotted note and the shorter note to
follow, even though no rest is notated.
There are instances in which ingal is not
to be used. The most obvious is when the
word gal (equal) is given. Ingalit is pre
cluded if the tempo is too fast or if several
notes are under a slur. It is unlikely that
passages of an arpeggiated nature, whose
purpose is harmonic rather than melodic
or improvisatory in nature, such as in un
measured preludes, are also to be played
as written or at least without a noticeable
inequality. (Expressive playing and rubato
do not mean the same thing as ingal.)
Elsewhere, it applies only to the notes
that divide the main pulse or beat in
two. For example, if the pulse of a43 slow
movement is measured in quarter notes,
the eighth notes are played ingal, unless
the music has been significally affected
by Italian practice. Although the term
ingales refers specifically to performance
practices of the French Baroque, uneven
playing of equally notated notes and
rhythmic alteration is outlined in French,
Italian, and Spanish sources of the late
seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
Caccini, in his Nuove Musiche of 1601,
discusses ways of singing a long-short
dotted pattern to an otherwise undotted
passage. Frescobaldi, in his preface to
his Toccatas of 1614, talks about playing
short-long patterns (lombardic rhythms)
to sixteenth notes (combined with eighth
notes) in certain sections. For more
detailed information, see David Fuller,
Notes ingales, Grove Music Online.
179
148.Pasquali, The Art of Fingering;

trans. in Soderlund, How Did They Play?
63. In a slightly later edition, The Art of
Fingering the Harpsichord (1760), 2125,
he discusses the tone of the harpsichord
in relationship to the holding of notes
for their notated duration. He professes
that fugues are unsuitable for the harp
sichord because of the quickly decaying
string vibration; this, he claims, causes
an audible confusion of the separate
voices, making them sound as though
they are joined rather than indepen
dent polyphonic lines. Despite his
admiration for legato playing as a basic
principle, he discusses different types
of articulation in his section On the
different touches.
Harpsichord, 26.
150. Et ne point rester sur des notes
dont la valeur soit finie. Couperin, Lart
de toucher, 61.
151. La douceur du toucher depend
touches quil est possible. Ibid., 7.
4. Fingering
1. Sancta Maria; trans. in Howell
and Hultberg, Art of Playing the
Fantasia, 104.
2.Bedbrook, Keyboard Music from
the Middle Ages to the Beginnings of the
Baroque, 139.
3.Bach, Essay, intro., 1.
4. Marpurg, The Practical
Principles of Keyboard Playing, or
Instructions of Fingering, in Hays,
Marpurgs Anleitung, 2:23.
129.
6. Cest faire marcher dune
manire convenable & rgulire les
180
doigts sur quelque instrument, &

principalement sur lorgue ou le clavecin,
pour en jouer le plus facilement & le
plus nettement quil est possible. . . .
Sur lorgue ou le clavecin, le doigter
est autre chose. Il y a deux manires
de jouer sur ces instrumens; savoir,
laccompagnement & les pices. Pour
jouer des pices on a gard la facilit
de lexcution & la bonne grace
de la main. . . . De ne point porter
successivement le mme doigt sur deux
touches consecutives, mais demployer
tous les doigts de chaque main.
Rousseau, Dictionnaire de musique, s.v.
Doigter.
7. A muselar is a type of virginal of
the late sixteenth and early seventeenth
centuries, in which the keyboard is
placed to the right, so that the strings
are plucked in the middle of their
sounding length. This results in putting
the left-hand action in the center of
the very resonant soundboard, which
sometimes produces clicking sounds.
The mechanical motion of the vibrating
string interferes with the ability of the
plectrum to connect again, making
repetition of the bass notes problematic.
The unique timbre of the muselar, with
its pipe-like flute tones in the treble and
its full, slow speaking quality in the
bass, is enhanced by the deep chest-like
soundbox. Because of the instruments
various idiosyncrasies of tone quality,
articulation, and damping, it may be a
challenge to play very fast or complicated
repertoire on it. It is more idiomatic
for pieces with simple textures, such as
those with a melody and undecorated
bassline.
8. Most harpsichords of the
late sixteenth to early seventeenth
centuries had one manual with a range

of four octaves. In the seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries, builders often
made harpsichords with a wider range
(by as much as an octave or more) and
with two manuals.
9. Mi restarebbe dirvi qual siano
le dita buone, e cattive, poiche de dita
favelliamo, somigliantemente delle note
buone, e cattive per esser cosa necessaria
ad organisti, come anco sonatori di
balli. Diruta, Il Transilvano (facsimile,
1983), f. 6. Just a few paragraphs earlier in
his treatise, Diruta discusses some of the
different keyboard techniques required
for organists and harpsichordists, who
tend to play more dance music or pieces of
lighter character and dance-like rhythms.
See his section Perche cause il Sonatori
de Balli non riescono nel sonar Organi
(The Reason Why Dance Players Do Not
Succeed at the Organ), f. 5.
10. Avuertite per che il dito terzo,
medio h da fare, tutte le note cattive
tanto ascendendo, quanto descendendo;
& anco le note, cattive che saltano. Oltra
che questo il pi affaticato dito, poiche
non si pu far cosa alcuna, che non
sadopri, ascendendo, descendendo, e
saltando. Diruta, Il Transilvano, Come
il dito di mezzo il pi affaticaro de
glaltri, f. 6.
11. Questo quello, che dicevo
nel principio, dunhuomo ben pro
portionate, e poi non staispedito di
lingua, in guisa, che non pu esprimere
il suo concetto; la lingua dellorgano
come sapete sono le mani, se queste
non bene si reggono, defetta non poco.
Listesso auerr adun principiante, che
suoni cose studiate, & imparate scon
ciamente, che se vorr sonare regolar
mente gli far necessario lasciar tutto

limparato, & pigliare le primi principi
secondo questa regola, come anco ad
uno, che non habbi principio, che osser
vando queste mie regole, in brevissimo
tempo diverr perfetto. (This is what
I said in the beginning about someone
who is highly educated but not fluent
in language, so that he cannot express
his idea effectively. The language of the
organ, as you know, is the hands. If
these are not well controlled, one lacks
a great deal. The same will happen to a
beginner who plays messily in an unor
ganized manner all that he has studied
and learned. If one wants to play by the
rules, one must relinquish all that he
has learned thus far and adhere to the
first principles of this method. Also,
for someone who has no foundation
whatsoever, if he follows my method, he
will quickly reach perfection.) Diruta,
Il Transilvano, f. 36.
12. Che le cattive danno ben spesso
gratia alle buone; poi che nel diminu
ire pi sattende far passaggi vaghi,
e legiadri, che allosservanza, che voi
dite. Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 36. Other
sixteenth-century sources also mention
that rules are different for diminutions.
See, for example, Sylvestro di Ganassi,
Opera intitulata Fontegara (Venice, 1535)
or Diego Ortiz, Tratado de glosas (Rome,
1553).
13. Cited in Mark Lindley and Glyn
Jenkins, Fingering, in New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians, 2nd ed.
14.Buchners Fundament Buch (Fundamentum) is dated 1551, over a decade
after his death. It was probably written
closer to 1520.
15.Diruta, Il Transilvano, ff. 67;
trans. in Soehnlein, Diruta on the Art
of Keyboard-Playing, 1:134.
181
16. E perch trov con longa espe

rienza una difficult, e questa circa il por
tar le dita della mano destra, che quando
suonano, & vanno ascendendo, tengono
disteso, & sforzato il dito secondo, &
anco il dito grosso sotto la mano sforzato,
& il quinto dito troppo ritirato, i quali
stando in tal guisa, e delluna, e dellaltra
mano, vengano indurire, e tirare li nervi
in modo, che laltre dita non possono
caminare con agilit. E di qui , che molti
organisti havendo habituata la mano
quei deffetti da principio, rare volte il
lor sonare fa quellarmonia, che doveria;
ha dove se hvessero accommodate a la
mano leggera, e molle, gli verebbe ben
fatto ogni cosa, per difficile, che fosse.
Diruta, Il Transilvano, f. 9v.
17.Bermudo, Declaracin de instrumentos musicales (Osuna, 1555); Venegas
de Henestrosa et al., Libro de cifra nueva
para tecla, harpa y vihuela (Alcal de
Henares, 1557); Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasa (Valladolid, 1565); Cabezn,
Obras de msica para tecla, harpa y vihuela (Madrid, 1578), preface; Correa, Libro
de tientos y discursos de msica practica,
y theorica de organo intitulado facultad
orgnica (Alcal, 1626); Nassarre, Esquela
(Zaragoza, 1723). Arauxos treatise,
Facultad orgnica, is geared to the inter
mediate or advanced player. The works
(obras) of Cabezn are mostly editions
of his father Antonios compositions.
Hernando posthumously published
them and added a preface, intended for
beginners.
18. Sancta Maria; trans. in Howell
and Hultberg, Art of Playing the Fantasia, 98.
19. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasa, f. 40v. See Howell and Hultberg,
Art of Playing the Fantasia, 100115.
182
20.Corrette, Les amusemens du Parnasse (1984), Autre maniere de doigter

loctave, f. E and Suite en Ut pour les
Commenans, 1.
21. Quand je commenay appren
dre, les maistres disoient pour maxime,
que lon ne jooit jamais du poulse de la
main droite; mais jay recognu depuis,
que si on auoit autant de mains quen
auoit Briare, on les emploiroit toutes,
quoy quil ny ait pas tant de touches
au clavier. Denis, Trait de laccord de
lspinette, 37. Briareus was a Greek
mythological giant who had fifty heads
and one hundred arms.
22.Couperin, Lart de toucher, 29.
23. Mais comme il na encor paru
jusquici nulle mthode de clavecin.
Lart de toucher (1716 ed.), in his section
Evolutions. See The Art of Playing the
Harpsichord, ed. Halford, 42n.
24.Couperin, Lart de toucher, Cette
manire ancienne nauoit nulle liaison.
Celle qui suit est la vraye. (The old style
did not allow for legato playing. The fol
lowing manner is the true way.)
25. Je suis persuad que peu de
personnes dans Paris restent entts
des vieilles maxims; Paris tant le centre du bon. Mais comme il ma encore
paru jusquici nulle mthode qui traitte
du bien-jouer, et que cellecy pourra
passer ailleurs, jay cru ny devoir rien
omettre. Couperin, Lart de toucher,
29.
26. Ibid., prludes 1 and 5.
27. See The Buildings, Priscilla
Bunburys Virginal Book, mm. 1113;
cited in Rodgers, Early Keyboard Fin
gering, ca. 15201620, 141.
28.Hartong, Clavier-Anweisung;
quoted and trans. in Lister, P. C.
Hartong and Transition in Eighteenth-
Century Keyboard Instruction, 41. See

also Lister, Traditions, 239.
29. Car si lon examine tout ce quil
y a dhabiles matres Paris, on trouvera
que cux dentre eux qui se distinguent le
plus par la beaut du touch, & la sret
de lxcution, sont ceux qui se servent
galement bien de tous leurs doitgs
[sic]. Saint-Lambert, Les principes, Re
marques, 6465. This comment appears
in a discussion about practicing trills with
every finger combination. Chapters 1921
are more conservative: his section Re
marques is more inclusive of the thumb.
30. Ibid., 42.
31. The thumb of the right hand
should be used only on certain occasions
of which we shall speak later. When the
performer is obliged to use his thumb
because the hand is small, it makes it
harder for him to acquire good habits,
which are as important for performance
as knowledge, Rameau, Trait de
lharmonie (1722); trans. in Gossett, Treatise on Harmony, 38587.
32.A roulement is when the player
plays adjacent notes rapidly in a passage,
as opposed to notes that are disjointed,
which he calls a batterie. In essence, it is
a scale-like passage played quickly.
33. Pour continuer un roulement
plus tendu que celui de la Leon, il ny
a qu saccoutumer passer le 1. pardessous tel autre doigt que lon veut,
& passer lun de ces autres doigts
par-dessus le 1. Cette manire est excel
lente, sur-tout quand il sy rencontre des
dizes ou des bemols; elle facilite mme
encore la pratique de certaines batteries.
35. Ibid., 42.

37. Sancta Maria, Arte de taer fantasa, f. 39r; trans. in Howell and Hultberg,
Art of Playing the Fantasia, 100.
38.Bach, Essay, 35.
39. Ibid., 57.
40. Trk gives an example very simi
lar to this one, in which he provides the
right and wrong way to finger such
a passage at the octave. The example he
gives is an octave on F sharp in the left
hand, to which he shows the little finger
and index finger as the correct manner,
but the little finger and thumb as the
incorrect manner. He does this for the
right hand, too. Trk, Klavierschule, 173.
41.Bach, Essay, 21, 41.
Harpsichord, 64.
44. Ibid., 133. In addition to his
advice about the thumb on raised keys,
Trk frowns upon its use in certain
ornaments, such as for the inverted
mordent. He writes, It demands above
all rapidity, strength, and elasticity of
fingers from the players, if it is to realize
its purposeto make certain passages
even more spirited (brilliant)in a fit
ting manner. The thumb and little finger
should not be used to play the inverted
mordent for this reason, or only in
cases of direst need. See Trks section
Concerning the Inverted Mordent [Schneller], 244.
45.Le petit doigt tant plus proche
du clavier que le pouce, on peut par con
squent sen servir sur les petites touches
avec plus de commodit que du pouce.
Mais comme il faut tojours appuyer sur
celles-ci avec un peu plus de force que
sur les grandes, & que le petit doigt est
le plus foible de tous, cest aussi la raison
pourquoi il ne faut pas lemployer sur
183
les feintes tant que lon peut faire le pas

sage plus commodment avec les autres
doigts. Mais ds que ce cas nexiste plus,
on est libre de porter le petit doigt sur les
feintes, soit en parcourant les tons par
dgrs successifs, soit dans des batteries,
ou des Tenus, une ou deux parties,
par dgrs conjoints & disjoints &c.
46.Miller, Institutes of Music, chap. 9,
Rules for Fingering, 20.
47. Matthew Camidge, Instructions
for the Piano-forte or Harpsichord (Lon
don: Longman and Broderip, 1795), ix.
48. Aunque lo que es quintas, y sex
tas, quando la voz de arriba estuviere en
la tecla negra, es mas natural ponerlas
con el indice, y el pequeo, por escusar el
movimiento violento al assentar la mano
en dichas posturas. Nassarre, Esquela,
pt. 2, 45960. The preceding paragraphs
discuss which fingers to use for playing
all the intervals. The following para
graphs continue with this discourse but
focus on fingering passages in various
situations, especially those with orna
ments or diminutions.
49. Evitez, autant que cela se peut,
de toucher un dize & un bemol du 1.
ou du 5. surtout dans les roulemens; &
faites ensorte que le 1. se trouve pour lors
sur la touche qui prcde ce dize ou ce
bemol; parce que cela peut faciliter votre
xcution. Rameau, Pices de clavecin, 18.
50.Rameau, Dissertation, Of Oc
taves; trans. in Hayes, Dissertation on
the Different Methods of Accompaniment,
86 (modified).
Harpsichord, Of Contracting the Fin
gers, 910.
52. Ibid., Of Improving the Rules,
19.
184
53. A mesure que la main souvre, les

doigts perdent de leur rondeur;
mais quand on les laisse agir de leur
propre mouvement, ils dterminent
pour lors la main sy prter dans les
intervalles plus ou moins grands quils
embrassent, & tout marche laise; le 5
mme sy prte son tour, en savanant
moins sur sa touche. Rameau, Code de
musique pratique, chap. 2, De la position
de la main sur le clavecin ou lorgue, 11;
quoted in Mthodes & traits, 2:50.
54.Miller, Institutes of Music, 22.

Harpsichord, Of Improving the Rules,
20.
56. Jacques Ogg, harpsichordist, at a
public master class at Indiana University
Jacobs School of Music, Bloomington, 25
February 2008.
Conclusion
1.Forkel, Johann Sebastian Bach,
56.
Bibliography
Barthlemon, Franois-Hippolyte. A
New Tutor for the Harpsichord or Piano Forte Wherein the First Principles
of Music Are Fully Explained with an
Easy Method for Fingering in a Set of
Progressive Lessons in Which Is Introduced Two Easy Methods for Tuning.
London, 1800.
Bemetzrieder, Anton. Leons de clavecin
et principes dharmonie. Paris, 1771.
Facsimile, New York: Broude Brothers, 1966.
Bermudo, Juan. Declaracin de instrumentos musicales. Osuna, 1555.
Documenta musicologica, 11. Kassel:
Brenreiter, 1957.
Broderip, Robert. Plain and Easy Instructions for Young Performers on the
Piano-forte or Harpsichord. London:
Longman & Broderip, 1788.
Brossard, Sbastien de. Dictionnaire de
musique. Paris, 1703. Facsimile of 2nd
ed. (1705), Hilversum: Frits Knuf,
1965.
Buchholtz, Johann Gottfried. Unterricht
fr diejenigen weiche die Musik und
das Clavier erlernen wollen. Hamburg,
1782.
Buchner, Hans. Abschrifft M. Hansen
von Constantz des wyt beriempten Or-
Primary Sources
Anglebert, Jean Henry d. Pices de clavecin. Paris, 1689.
Bach, Carl Philipp Emanuel. Versuch
ber die wahre Art das Clavier zu spielen. 2 vols. Berlin: G. L. Winter, 1753
and 1762. Facsimile edited by Walter
Niemann. Leipzig: C. F. Kahnt, 1906
and 1925.
Bach, Carl Philipp Emanuel, and
Wolfgang Horn. 1994. Versuch ber
die wahre Art das Clavier zu spielen.
Faksimile-Reprint der Ausgaben von
Teil I, Berlin 1753 (mit den Ergnzungen der Auflage Leipzig 1787) und Teil
II, Berlin 1762 (mit den Ergnzungen
der Auflage Leipzig 1797). Kassel:
Brenreiter.
. Essay on the True Art of Playing
Keyboard Instruments. Translated
by William J. Mitchell. New York:
W. W. Norton, 1949.
Bach, Johann Christian, and FrancescoPasquale Ricci. Mthode ou recueil de
connaissances lmentaires pour le piano
forte ou clavecin. Paris, 1788. Facsimile,
Geneva: Minkoff, 1974.
Bacilly, Bnigne de. Lart de bien chanter.
Paris, 1679. Facsimile, Geneva:
Minkoff, 1974.
185
186
Bibliography
ganisten fundament buch sinen kinden

verlossen. ca. 1520, 1551.
Burney, Charles. An Account of the Musical Performances in Westminster Abbey
. . . in Commemoration of Handel. London, 1785. Amsterdam: Fritz A. M.
Knuf, 1964.
. The Present State of Music in
Germany, the Netherlands, and United
Provinces. 2 vols. London, 1775. Facsimile, New York: Broude Brothers,
1969.
Cabezn, Hernando de. Obras de msica para tecla, harpa y vihuela de Antonia de Cabezn, msico de cmara del
rey Don Philippe, nuestro seor. Madrid, 1578. Edited by Felipe Pedrell
and Higinio Angls. Monumentos
de la msica espaola, 27. Barcelona:
Instituto Espaol de Musicologa,
1966.
Clementi, Muzio. Introduction to the Art
of Playing on the Piano Forte. London,
1801. Facsimile, New York: Da Capo
Press, 1974.
Correa de Arauxo, Francisco. Libro de
tientos y discursos de msica practica, y
theorica de organo intitulado facultad
organica. Alcal, 1626. Translated by
Macario Santiago Kastner. Barcelona: Instituto Espaol de Musicolga,
1948.
Corrette, Michel. Les amusemens du
Parnasse: mthode courte et facile pour
apprendre toucher le clavecin avec les
plus jolis airs a la mode. Paris, 1749.
. Les amusemens du Parnasse.
Facsimile edited by Olivier Baumont.
Paris: ditions Henry Lemoine, 1984.
Couperin, Franois. Lart de toucher le
clavecin. Paris: Foucault, 1716 and 1717.
Facsimile, New York: Broude Brothers, 1969.
. Lart de toucher le clavecin, premier livre. Translated and edited by

Kenneth Gilbert. Paris: Heugel, 1972.
. Lart de toucher le clavecin = Die
Kunst das Clavecin zu spielen = The
art of playing the harpsichord. German
translation by Anna Linde. English
translation by Mevanwy Roberts.
Leipzig: Breitkopf & Hartel, ca. 1933.
. The Art of Playing the Harpsichord. Translated and edited by Margery Halford. Port Washington, N.Y.:
Alfred, 1974.
Crozier, Catherine Pearl. The Principles of Keyboard Technique in Il
Transilvano by Girolamo Diruta.
MM thesis, Eastman School of Music
of the University of Rochester, 1941.
Denis, Jean. Trait de laccord de
lspinette. Paris: Ballard, 1650. Facsimile edited by Alan Curtis. New
York: Da Capo Press, 1969.
. Treatise on Harpsichord Tuning.
Translated by Vincent J. Panetta.
Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1987.
Diruta, Girolamo. Il Transilvano. Venice, 1593, 1609. Facsimile edited by
Luisa Cervelli. Bologna: Libreria
Editrice Forni, 1969. Facsimile, The
Netherlands: Frits Knuf, 1983.
. The Transylvanian. Translated
and edited by Murray C. Bradshaw
and Edward J. Soehnlein. Henryville,
Pa.: Institute of Medieval Music,
1984.
Duphly, Jacques. Exercise Book for
Lord Fitzwilliam. Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge. Mus. Ms. 30 F 9.
1765.
Dussek, Jan Ladislav, and Ignaz Pleyel.
Mthode pour le piano-forte. Paris:
Pleyel, 1797.
Bibliography
Ftis, Franois-Joseph, and Ignaz Moscheles. Mthode des Mthodes de
Piano, ou Trait de lArt de jouer de cet
Instrument. Paris: Schlesinger, 1837.
Forkel, Johann Nikolaus. ber Johann
Sebastian Bachs Leben, Kunst, und
Kunstwerke. Leipzig, 1802.
. Johann Sebastian Bach: His Life,
Art, and Work. Translated by Charles
Sanford Terry. London, 1920. New
York: Da Capo Press, 1970.
Forqueray, Antoine. Pices de clavecin.
1747.
Foucquet, Pierre-Claude. Pices de
clavecin, second livre. Paris: Boyvin, le
Clerc, de Bretonne, 1751. Facsimile,
Geneva: Minkoff, 1982.
Frescobaldi, Girolamo. Toccate e partite
dintavolatura di cimablo . . . libro primo. Rome, 1615; rev. and enl. 1616.
Ganassi dal Fontego, Sylvestro di. Opera
intitulata Fontegara. Venice, 1535.
Gasparini, Francesco. Larmonico pratico
al cimbalo. Venice, 1708.
. The Practical Harmonist at the
Keyboard. Translated by Frank S.
Stillings. Edited by David L. Burrows.
New Haven, Conn.: Yale University
Press, 1963.
Hartong, Philipp Christoph. Dess musici theoretico-pratico . . . enthaltend
eine methodische Clavier-Anweisung.
Nuremberg, 1749.
Hays, Elizabeth Loretta. F. W. Marpurgs Anleitung zum Clavierspielen
(Berlin, 1755) and Principes du clavecin
(Berlin, 1756). PhD diss., Stanford
University, 1977.
Hensel, Johann Daniel. Ausbende Klavierschule, erster Gang. Leipzig: Breitkopf & Hrtel, 1796.
Hodermann, Georg Caspar. Kurzer Unterricht fr Musik-Anfnger: wie sie das
187
Clavier spielen auf eine sehr leichte Art

erlernen knnen: mit 24 Handstcken
und beigefgter Fingersetzung. Amsterdam: C. Hagen, 1787.
Hllmandel, Nicholas Joseph. Principles
of Music Calculated for the Pianoforte
or Harpsichord. London, 1796.
Hummel, Johann Nepomuk. A Complete
Theoretical and Practical Course of Instructions, on the Art of Playing the Pianoforte: Commencing with the Simplest
Elementary Principles and Including
Every Information Requisite to the Most
Finished Style of Performance. London:
T. Boosey, 1820.
Kirnberger, Johann P. Die Kunst des
reinen Satzes in der Musik. Berlin, 1771.
Koch, Heinrich Christoph. Musikal
isches Lexicon. Frankfurt, 1802.
Lebgue, Nicolas. Les pices de clavecin.
Paris: Baillon, 1677. Facsimile, Courlay, France: Jean-Marc Fuzeau, 1995.
Le Gallois, Jean. Lettre de Monsieur Le
Gallois Mademoiselle Regnault de
Solier touchant la musique. Paris:
E. Michallet & G. Quinet, 1680.
Facsimile, Geneva: Minkoff, 1984.
Lhlein, Georg Simon. Clavierschule,
oder Kurze und grndliche Anweisung
zur Melodie und Harmonie, durch
ghends mit practischen Beyspielen er
klret. Leipzig and Zllichau, 1765.
Manfredini, Vincenzo. Regole armo
niche. Venice: Presso Adolfo Cesare,
1775/1797.
Marpurg, Friedrich Wilhelm. Anleitung
zum Klavierspielen. Berlin: Haude &
Spener, 1765.
. Clavierstcke mit einem practischen Unterricht fr Anfnger und Gebter.
Berlin: Haude & Spener, 1762.
. Der critische Musicus an der
Spree 42 (December 1749): 337.
188
Bibliography
. Die Kunst das Clavier zu spielen.

Berlin: Haude & Spener, 1751.
. Principes du clavecin. Berlin:
Haude & Spener, 1756. Facsimile, Geneva: Minkoff, 1974.
Mattheson, Johann. Kleine General-BassSchule. Hamburg, 1735.
. Der vollkommene Kapellmeister.
Hamburg, 1739.
Merbach, George Friedrich. Clavierschule fr Kinder. Leipzig, 1782.
Mreaux, Jean-Amde Le Froid de.
Les clavecinistes de 1637 1790 (Paris,
18647/R).
Mersenne, Marin. Harmonie universelle.
Paris: Ballard, 1637.
. Harmonie Universelle: The Books
on Instruments. Translated by Roger
E. Chapman. The Hague: M. Nijhoff,
1957.
Mthodes & traits 12, Srie I, France,
16001800: Mthodes et leons pour
piano-forte ou clavecin. 2 vols. Edited
by Jeanne Roudet, Jean Saint-Arroman, and Philippe Lescat. Courlay,
France: Jean-Marc Fuzeau, 2003.
Miller, Edward. Institutes of Music, or
Easy Instructions for the Harpsichord:
In which everything necessary for well
grounding the scholar in the Rudiments
of the Science is fully treated of in a new
and familiar manner by way of Questions and Answers: To which are added
easy and pleasing Lessons for Practice:
properly fingered for young beginners.
London: Longman & Broderip,
1780.
Mller, August Eberhard. Klavierund Fortepiano-Schule. Jena, 1804, as
6th ed. of Lhlein, Clavierschule. Edited by Carl Czerny as Grosse Fortepiano-Schule. Leipzig: C. F. Peters,
1825.
. Kleines Elementarbuch fr Klavierspieler als wesentliche Grundlage der

Kunst das Klavier oder Pianoforte zu
spielen. Leipzig: C. F. Peters, 1807.
Nassarre, Fr. Pablo. Esquela msica:
segn la prtica moderna. Zaragoza,
1723. Facsimile edited by Lothar
Siemens. Diputacin Provincial de
Zaragoza: Institucin Fernando el
Catlico, 1980.
New Instructions for Playing the Harpsichord, Piano-forte, or Spinnet. London,
1798. Facsimile, New York: Broude
Brothers, 1967.
Nivers, Guillaume-Gabriel. Livre dorgue
I. Paris: R. Ballard, 1665; Paris:
Nivers, 1665. Facsimile edited by
Norbert Dufourcq. Paris: Editions
Bornemann, 1963. Facsimile, Courlay,
France: Jean-Marc Fuzeau, 1987, 1996.
Ortiz, Diego. Tratado de glosas sobre
clausulas y otros gneros de puntos en la
msica de violones. Rome, 1553.
Parsons, John. The Elements of Music
with Progressive Practice Lessons for the
Harpsichord or Piano Forte. London:
Parsons, 1794.
Pasquali, Nicol. The Art of Fingering the
Harpsichord: Illustrated with Examples
in Notes: To Which Is Added an Approved Method of Tuning That Instrument. Edinburgh: Printed for Rob.
Bremner, 1760.
Penna, Lorenzo. Li primi albori musicali.
Bologna: Monti, 1672. Facsimile of
1684 ed. edited by G. Vecchi. Bologna:
Forni, 1969.
Petri, Johann Samuel. Anleitung zur
praktischen Musik vor neuangehende
Snger und Instrumentspieler. Lauben,
1767; 2nd ed. enl., 1782. Giebing ber
Prien am Chiemsee: Emil Katzbichler, 1967.
Bibliography
Petschke, Adolph Friedrich. Versuch
eines Unterrichts zum Klavierspielen.
Leipzig, 1783.
Praetorius, Michael. Syntagma musicum. Vol. 1: Syntagmatis musici tomus
primus: musicae artis analecta. Wittenberg & Wolfenbttel, 161415. Vol.
2: Syntagmatis musici tomus secundus:
de organographia. Wolfenbttel, 1618
[with pictorial suppl., Theatrum instrumentorum]. Vol. 3: Syntagmatis musici
tomus tertius: termini musici. Wolfenbttel, 1619.
. Syntagma musicum III. Translated by Jeffery T. Kite-Powell. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 2004.
Prencourt, F. Short, Easy & Plaine Rules
to learne in a few days time the true
principles of Musick and chiefly what
relates to the use of the Spinette, Harpsichord, or Organ. British Library, Add.
Ms. 32531.
Quantz, Johann Joachim. Versuch einer
Anweisung die Flte traversiere zu
spielen. Berlin, 1752; 3rd ed., 1789. Facsimile of 3rd ed. edited by Hans-Peter
Schmitz. Kassel: Brenreiter, 1953.
. On Playing the Flute. Translated
by Edward R. Reilly. New York:
Schirmer Books, 1985.
Rameau, Jean-Philippe. Code de musique pratique. Paris, 1760. Facsimile,
New York: Broude Brothers, 1965.
Facsimile edited by Erwin R. Jacobi.
Rome: American Institute of Musicology, 1969.
. De la mechanique des doigts sur
le clavessin. Appended to the 1st ed. of
Pices de clavecin (1724). Edited and
translated by Erwin R. Jacobi. Kassel:
Brenreiter, 1972.
. Dissertation sur les diffrentes
mthodes daccompagnement pour le
189
clavecin ou pour lorgue, avec le plan

dune nouvelle mthode tablie sur une
mchanique des doigts; que fournit la
succession fondamentale de lharmonie,
et laide de laquelle on peut devenir
savant composeur, & habileaccompagnateur, mme sans savoir lire la musique. Paris: Bailleux, 1732.
. Dissertation on the Different
Methods of Accompaniment. Translated by Deborah Hayes. Ann Arbor,
Mich.: University Microfilms, 1974.
. Pices de clavecin: avec une mthode sur la mchanique des doigts.
Paris, 1724. Monuments of Music and
Music Literature. Facsimile, Kassel:
Brenreiter, 1966; New York: Broude
Brothers, 1967.
. Pices de clavecin: avec une m
thode sur la mchanique des doigts.
Introduction by Kenneth Gilbert.
Paris: Heugel, 1972.
. Trait de lharmonie reduite ses
principes naturels. Paris, 1722.
. Treatise on Harmony. Translated
by Philip Gossett. New York: Dover,
1971.
Rellstab, Johann Carl Friedrich. Anleitung fr Clavierspieler, den Gebrauch
der Bachschen Fingersetzung, die
Manieren und den Vortrag betreffend.
Berlin, 1790. Reprint, Berlin: Rellstabsche Musikhandlung und verb.
Musikdruckerey, 1979.
Ross, John. A Complete Book of Instructions for Beginners on the Harpsichord
or Fortepiano. London, 1795.
Rousseau, Jean. Mthode claire, certaine
et facile pour apprendre chanter la
musique. 5th ed. Amsterdam ed., 1710.
. Trait de la viole. Facsimile of
Paris edition, 1687. Introduction by
190
Bibliography
Franois Lesure. Geneva: Minkoff,

1975.
Rousseau, Jean-Jacques. Dictionnaire de
musique. Paris: la veuve Duchesne,
1768.
. A Complete Dictionary of Music:
Consisting of a Copious Explanation
of All Words Necessary to a True
Knowledge and Understanding of Music. Translated by William Waring.
London, 1771 and 1779. New York:
AMS, 1975.
Saint-Lambert, Michel de. Les principes
du clavecin. 1702. Geneva: Minkoff,
1972.
. Principles of the Harpsichord.
Translated by Rebecca Harris-Warwick. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984.
Samber, Johann Baptist. Manuductio
ad organum, das ist Grndlich- und
sichere Handleitung durch die hchstnothwendige Solmisation, zu der edlen
Schlag-Kunst. Salzburg: J. B. Mayrs,
1704.
Sancta Maria, Fray Toms de. Libro
llamado arte de taer fantasa, assi
para tecla como para vihuela. Valladolid, 1565. Facsimile, Farborough,
Hampshire: Gregg, 1972, and Geneva:
Minkoff, 1973.
. The Art of Playing the Fantasia.
Translated by Almonte C. Howell Jr.
and Warren E. Hultberg. Pittsburgh:
Latin American Literary Review
Press, 1991.
Schlick, Arnolt. Spiegel der Orgelmacher
und Organisten. Mainz, 1511. Facsimile
and English translated by Elizabeth
Berry Barber. Buren, The Netherlands: Frits Knuf, 1980.
Scipione, Giovanni. Intavolatura di cembalo, et organo. Perugia, 1650.
Soehnlein, Edward John. Diruta on the

Art of Keyboard-Playing: An Annotated Translation and Transcription
of Il Transilvano. 2 vols. PhD diss.,
University of Michigan, 1975.
Speer, Daniel. Grundrichtiger Unterricht
der musicalischen Kunst. Gppingen:
Khnen, 1697. Facsimile edited by F.
Burkhardt, Leipzig: Peters, 1974.
Thielo, Carl August. Tanker og Regler fra
Grunden af om Musiken. Copenhagen:
J. G. Groth, 1746.
Trk, Daniel Gottlob, Klavierschule,
oder Anweisung zum Klavierspielen
fr Lehrer und Lernende. Leipzig,
1789. Facsimile, Kassel: Brenreiter,
1967.
. School of Clavier Playing; or,
Instructions in Playing the Clavier for
Teachers & Students. Translated by
Raymond H. Haggh. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1982.
Venegas de Henestrosa, Luis, et al. Libro
de cifra nueva para tecla, harpa y vihuela. Alcal de Henares, 1557.
Wilson, Dora Jean. Georg Simon Lhleins Klavierschule: Translation and
Commentary. PhD diss., University
of Southern California, 1979.
Wolf, Georg Friedrich. Kurzer aber deutlichen Unterricht im Klavierspielen.
Pt. 1, 2nd ed., Halle, 1784; 3rd ed.,
Halle, 1789.
Zach, Johann Christian, and FrancescoPasquale Ricci. Mthode ou recueil
de connoisances, elementaires pour le
forte-piano ou clavecin. Paris, 1786.
Secondary Sources
Ahlgrimm, Isolde. Current Trends in
Performance of Baroque Music. Diapason 73 (April 1982): 1.
Bibliography
Anderson, Emily. The Letters of Mozart
and His Family. Vol. 3. New York:
Norton, 1985.
Apel, Willi, and Ralph T. Daniel. The
Harvard Brief Dictionary of Music.
Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1960.
. The History of Keyboard Music to
1700. Bloomington: Indiana University
Press, 1972.
Baker, Nancy Kovaleff, and Thomas S.
Christensen. Aesthetics and the Art
of Musical Composition in the German Enlightenment: Selected Writings
of Johann Georg Sulzer and Heinrich
Christoph Koch. Cambridge Studies in
Music Theory and Analysis 7. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1995.
Bedbrook, Gerald Stares. Keyboard
Music from the Middle Ages to the Beginnings of the Baroque. New York: Da
Capo Press, 1973.
Benoit, Marcelle. Dictionnaire de la musique en France aux XVIIe et XVIIIe
sicles. France: Arthme Fayard, 1992.
Berger, Ludwig. Erluterung eines
Mozartschen Urtheils ber Muzio
Clementi. Allgemeine musikalisches
Zeitung 31, no. 28 (July 1829): 468.
Bond, Ann. A Guide to the Harpsichord.
Portland, Ore.: Amadeus Press, 1997.
Boxall, Maria. Harpsichord Method:
Based on Sixteenth to Eighteenth Century Sources. New York: Schott, 1977.
Boxall, Maria, and Mark Lindley. Early
Keyboard Fingerings: An Anthology.
New York: Schott, 1982.
. Early Keyboard Fingerings: A
Comprehensive Guide. New York:
Schott, 1992.
Brauchli, Bernard. Aspects of Early
Keyboard Technique: Hand and Fin-
191
ger Positions as Seen in Early Treatises and Iconographical Documents.

Journal of the American Musical Instrument Society 18 (1992): 62102; 20
(1994): 90220.
Brown, Clive. Dots and Strokes in Late
18th- and 19th-Century Music. Early
Music 21 (November 1993): 593610.
Buelow, George J. Music, Rhetoric,
and the Concept of the Affections:
A Selective Bibliography. Notes 30
(197374): 25059.
Camidge, Matthew. Instructions for the
Piano-forte or Harpsichord. London:
Longman & Broderip, 1795.
Clavecin: mthodes, traits, dictionnaires et
encyclopdies, ouvrages gnraux. 2 vols.
Courlay, France: ditions Fuzeau,
2002.
Colt, Jonathan. Forever Young. New
York: Random House, 1977.
Dart, Thurston. The Interpretation of
Music. 4th ed. London: Hutchinson,
1967.
David, Hans T., and Arthur Mendel,
eds. The Bach Reader: A Life of Johann Sebastian Bach in Letters and
Documents. Rev. ed. New York: W. W.
Norton, 1966.
Delft, Menno van. Schnellen: A Quintessential Articulation Technique
in Eighteenth-Century Keyboard
Playing. In The Keyboard in Baroque
Europe, ed. Christopher Hogwood,
18797. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
Derr, Elwood. The Two-Part Inventions: Bachs Composers Vademecom. Music Theory Spectrum 3 (1981):
2648.
Deutsch, Otto Erich. Cecilia and
Parthenia. Musical Times 100 (November 1959): 59192.
192
Bibliography
. Schubert: die Dokumente seines

Lebens. Kassel: Brenreiter, 1964.
. Schubert: A Documentary Biography. Translated by Eric Blom. London: Dent, 1946. New York: Da Capo
Press, 1977.
Dickens, Theodore Pierce. A Brief
Overview of Keyboard Technique as
Applied to Playing the Harpsichord,
the Piano, and the Organ. DMA document, University of Alabama, 2001.
Dolmetsch, Arnold. The Interpretation
of the Music of the XVII and XVIII
Centuries. London: Novello, [1915].
Seattle: University of Washington
Press, 1969.
Donington, Robert. Baroque Music: Style
and Performance: A Handbook. New
York: W.W. Norton, 1982.
. The Interpretation of Early Music.
New ed. London: Faber, 1974.
. A Performers Guide to Baroque
Music. New York: Charles Scribners
Sons, 1973.
Faulkner, Quentin. Griepenkerl on
J. S. Bachs Keyboard Technique:
A Translation and Commentary.
American Organist 22, no. 1 (January
1988): 6364.
. J. S. Bachs Keyboard Technique:
A Historical Introduction. St. Louis:
Concordia, 1989.
Ferguson, Howard. Keyboard Interpretation from the Fourteenth to the Nineteenth Century: An Introduction. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1975.
Ftis, Franois Joseph. Biographie universelle des musicians et bibliographie
gnrale de la musique. Paris, 1873.
Facsimile, Brussels: Culture et civilisation, 1972.
Fuller, David. French Harpsichord
Playing in the Seventeenth Century
after Le Gallois. Early Music 4, no. 1

(January 1986): 2226.
Grove Music Online. Edited by Laura
Macy.
Hkkinen, Aapo. The Clavichord and
the Harpsichord: Basic Keyboard
Technique in the Eighteenth Century:
Including interviews with Derek
Adlam, Pierre Hanta, Gustav Leonhardt, and Mikls Spnyi. Clavichord
International 5, no. 1 (November 1997):
2326.
Halford, Margery. The Harpsichord
Manual: An Introduction to the
Technique, Ornamentation, and Performance Practices. Sherman Oaks,
Calif.: Alfred, 1980.
Harich-Schneider, Eta. The Harpsichord:
An Introduction to Technique, Style,
and the Historical Sources. 2nd ed. St.
Louis: Concordia, 1954.
. Die Kunst des Cembalo-Spiels:
Nach den vorhandenen Quellen darge
stellt und erlutert. Kassel: Brenreiter,
1958.
Haynes, Bruce. The End of Early Music:
A Period Performers History of Music
for the Twenty-first Century. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 2007.
Hewlett, Walter B. The Vermehrter . . .
Wegweiser of 1689. DMA document,
Stanford University, 1980.
Hickmann, Hans. Das Portative. Kassel:
Brenreiter, 1936.
Hipkins, Alfred James. The Old Clavier
or Keyboard Instruments: Their Use
by Composers and Technique. Proceedings of the Musical Association 12
(188586): 13948.
Hoag, Barbara Brewster. The Performance Practice of Iberian Keyboard
Music of the Seventeenth Century.
PhD diss., New York University, 1980.
Bibliography
Hogwood, Christopher. French Music
and the Fitzwilliam. Cambridge: Fitzwilliam Museum, 1975.
, ed. The Keyboard in Baroque
Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
Huang, Hao, and Harold Lee. How
Piano Technique Changed over 300
Years. Clavier 36, no. 2 (February
1997): 3133.
Hubbard, Frank. Three Centuries of Harp
sichord Making. Cambridge, Mass.:
Harvard University Press, 1965.
Jacobi, Erwin R., ed. The Complete
Theoretical Writings of Jean-Philippe
Rameau. 6 vols. Rome: American Institute of Musicology, 196772.
Jacobs, Charles. The Performance Practice of Spanish Renaissance Keyboard
Music. PhD diss., New York University, 1962.
Jenkins, Glyn. The Legato Touch and
the Ordinary Manner of Keyboard
Playing from 17501850. PhD diss.,
University of Cambridge, 1976. Textfiche.
Johnson, Calvert. Early Italian Keyboard Fingering, Early Keyboard Journal 10 (1992): 788.
Kastner, Macario Santiago. The
Interpretation of Sixteenth- and
Seventeenth-Century Iberian Keyboard
Music. Monographs in Musicology, 4.
Stuyvesant, N.Y.: Pendragon Press,
1987.
Keller, Hermann. Phrasing and Articulation: A Contribution to a Rhetoric
of Music with 152 Musical Examples.
Translated by Leigh Gerdine. New
York: W. W. Norton, 1965.
Kenyon, Paul. Imitatio Violistica in
Scheidts Tabulatura nova. Musical
Times 130, no. 1751 (January 1989).
193
Kipnis, Igor. Harpsichord and Clavichord:

An Encyclopedia. New York: Routledge, 2007.
Kirkpatrick, Ralph. Domenico Scarlatti.
Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University
Press, 1953.
. Fifty Years of Harpsichord
Playing. Early Music 11 (January
1983): 3141.
Knecht, Justin Heinrich. Kleine theoretische Klavierschule fr die ersten Anfnger worin die Anfangsgrnde sowohl
der Musik berhaupt, als des Klavierspielens ins besondere auf eine fassliche
Weise gelehret werden. Munich: in der
Falterischen Musikhandlung, 1800.
Koch, Heinrich Christoph. Musikali
sches Lexikon. Frankfurt, 1802.
Kong, Joanne Lan-Funn. A Comparison of the Technical and Interpretive
Qualities of the Piano and Harpsichord: Accompanied by Performance
Editions of the Chromatic Fantasy
and Fugue (BWV 903) by Johann Sebastian Bach. PhD diss., University
of Oregon, 1986.
Kottick, Edward L. A History of the
Harpsichord. Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 2003.
Kroll, Mark. Playing the Harpsichord
Expressively: A Practical and Historical Guide. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow
Press, 2004.
Landowska, Wanda. Landowska on
Music. Translated by Denise Restout,
assisted by Robert Hawkins. New
York: Stein & Day, 1964.
Lawson, Colin, and Robin Stowell. The
Historical Performance of Music: An
Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge
Lister, Craig. P. C. Hartong and Transition in Eighteenth-Century Keyboard
194
Bibliography
Instruction. Early Keyboard Journal 4

(198586): 2842.
. Traditions of Keyboard Technique from 16501750. PhD diss.,
University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 1979.
Lohman, Ludger. Touch. In The Harpsichord and Clavichord: An Encyclopedia, ed. Igor Kipnis. New York: Taylor
& Francis, 2007.
Lubin, Ernest. Hammers or Quills.
Music Journal 35 (January 1977): 14.
Matthay, Tobias. Music Interpretation:
Its Laws and Principles and Their Application in Teaching and Performing.
Boston: Boston Music, 1913.
Metzger, Nancy. Harpsichord Technique:
A Guide to Expressivity. 2nd ed. Portland, Ore.: Musica Dulce, 1998.
Moroney, Davitt. Chambonnires and
his Belle manire. In Jean-Baptiste
Lully, Actes du Colloque, Saint-Germain-en-LayeHeidelberg, 1987, ed.
Jrme de la Gorce and Herbert
Schneider, 201208. Laaber: LaaberVerlag, 1990.
. Couperin, Marpurg, and Roeser: A Germanic Art de toucher le
clavecin, or a French Wahre Art? In
The Keyboard in Baroque Europe, ed.
Christopher Hogwood, 11132. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
2003.
Nandi, Jean. Starting on the Harpsichord:
A First Book for the Beginner. Berkeley,
Calif.: Bon Got, 1989.
Neumann, Frederick. Ornamentation
in Baroque and Post-Baroque Music.
Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University
Press, 1978.
Newman, Anthony. Bach and the Baroque. New York: Pendragon Press,
1985.
Nurmi, Ruth, A Plain & Easy Introduction to the Harpsichord. Albuquerque:

University of New Mexico Press, 1974.
Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1986.
Parkins, Robert. Keyboard Fingering in
Early Spanish Sources. Early Music
11, no. 3 (July 1983): 32331.
Powell, Newman W. Early Keyboard
Fingering and Its Effect on Articulation.
Stanford: Stanford University Press,
1954.
Pruitt, William H. The Organ Works
of Guillaume-Gabriel Nivers (1632
1714). PhD diss., University of Pittsburgh, 1969.
Rigler, Franz Paul. Anleitung zum Gesange, und dem Klaviere oder die Orgel
zu spielen. Vienna, 1798.
Ripin, Edwin M. , et al., eds. The New
Grove Dictionary of Early Keyboard Instruments. London: Macmillan, 1989.
Rodgers, Julane. Early Keyboard Fingering, ca. 15201620. PhD diss.,
University of Oregon, 1971.
Rosen, Charles. The Classical Style:
Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven. New York:
W. W. Norton, 1972.
Rosenhart, Kees. The Amsterdam Harpsichord Tutor. Amsterdam: Saul B.
Groen, 1977; 2nd ed., 1982.
Russell, Raymond. The Harpsichord and
Clavichord: An Introductory Study.
London: Faber & Faber, 1973.
Sachs, Barbara, and Barry Ife, trans.
Anthology of Early Keyboard Methods.
Cambridge: Gamut, 1981.
Scheibert, Beverly. Jean-Henry
DAnglebert and the SeventeenthCentury Clavecin School. Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1986.
Schott, Howard. Playing the Harpsichord. London: Faber & Faber, 1971.
New York: St. Martins Press, 1979.
Bibliography
Soderlund, Sandra. How Did They
Play? How Did They Teach? A History
of Keyboard Technique. Chapel Hill,
N.C.: Hinshaw Music, 2006.
. Organ Technique: An Historical
Approach. Chapel Hill, N.C.: Hinshaw Music, 1980.
Speer, Klaus. HarpsichordSome
Additional Thoughts. American
Music Teacher 12 (May/June 1963):
2223.
Strahle, Graham. An Early Music Dictionary: Musical Terms from British
Sources, 15001740. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.
Sulzer, Johann Georg, Christian
Friedrich von Blankenburg, J. A. P.
Schulz, and Johann Philipp Kirnberger. Allgemeine Theorie der schnen
Knste in Einzeln, nach alphabetischer
Ordnung der Kunstwrter aufein
anderfolgenden, Artikeln abgehandelt.
1774. Hildesheim: Georg Olms,
1967.
195
Sumner, William Leslie. The Pianoforte.

London: McDonald, 1966.
Tagliavini, Luigi Fernando. The Art of
Not Leaving the Instrument Empty:
Comments on Early Italian Harpsichord Playing. Early Music 11 (July
1983): 299308.
Troeger, Richard. Technique and Interpretation on the Harpsichord and
Clavichord. Bloomington: Indiana
Valenti, Fernando. The Harpsichord: A
Dialogue for Beginners. Hackensack,
N.J.: Jerona Music, 1982.
Walther, Johann Gottfried. Musicali
sches Lexicon. Leipzig: W. Deer, 1732.
Kassel: Brenreiter, 2001.
Williams, Peter F. The Harpsichord
Acciaccatura: Theory and Practice in
Harmony, 16501750. Musical Quarterly 54 (1968): 50323.
, ed. Bach, Handel, Scarlatti: Tercentenary Essays. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985.
Index
Page numbers in italics indicate figures and musical examples.

Agricola, Johann Friedrich, 137
Alexander, Frederick Matthias, 153n41
Alexander Technique, 13, 153n41
allegro, 7276, 99, 103, 109
Allgemeine Theorie der schnen Knste in
Einzeln (Sulzer), 75, 102
Ammerbach, Elias Nikolaus, 115, 137
Les amusements du Parnasse (Corrette),
24
Anglebert, Jean Henry d, 92, 105,
174n99
Anleitung (Petri), 24
Anleitung fr Clavierspielen (Rellstab),
69, 109
Anleitung zum Gesange (Rigler), 84
Applikatur (fingering), 112. See also
fingering
appoggiaturas, 9496, 95, 98; port de
voix, 96, 174n99
aptitude, of hands, 22
Arauxo, Francisco Correa de. See Correa
de Arauxo, Francisco
arch: of fingers, 37, 39, 60; of hand, 24,
31, 3637, 39
Larmonico pratico al cimbalo (Gasparini),
23
arms: guiding the hands, 29, 31, 4748;
holding and moving, 2; movement of,
2, 1314, 29, 36, 84; position at key-
das Abstossen, 103. See also dtach

accents: accented appoggiaturas, 96;
accenti, 97, 175n102; agogic accents,
107108, 178n140; notation of, 109
acciaccatura, 92, 173n84
accidentals (raised keys), fingering for,
126130, 183nn40,44,48
action: heavy keyboard action, effect,
49, 165n28; of Italian harpsichords,
173n81; maintenance, basic skills, 50;
plucking action, 1, 910, 33; quilling, 8
adagio, 7275, 91, 109
affects (Affektenlehre), 169n20
Affekt (character), 75
age, for beginning lessons, 56
agility: fingering, 112; fingers, 31, 33, 63,
85, 112, 116; hands, 63; knees, 44;
wrists, 29
agogic accents, 107108, 178n140
agrments: appoggiaturas, 95, 96; aspiration, 104106, 105, 174n99; coul
(coul sur tierce or tierce coul), 92,
123; dtach, 103, 105106; execution according to context, 174n99;
port de voix, 96, 174n99; suspension,
93, 104105, 105; tremblement, 106;
trills, 19, 4344, 94, 9799, 104, 115,
135, 177n129, 182n29. See also ornamentation
197
198
Index
board, 10, 12, 2326, 52, 55; relaxation of, 18; thumb position and, 22,
36; weight, 5253, 59, 62, 168n81
arpeggios: articulation of, 9093; batteries, 29; finger use in, 9293, 129;
harmony and, 97, 173n84; in legato
playing, 84; little fingers in, 129;
nonharmonic notes in, 173n84 (see
also acciaccatura); roulements, 29; slurs
and ties (liaisons), 8889; and staggered playing, 93; style bris, 90, 92;
sustaining by ornaments, 97
Lart de toucher le clavecin (Couperin, F.),
2, 41, 81, 8485, 86, 103, 122123,
122123
The Art of Fingering the Harpsichord,
Spinet, or Organ (Pasquali), 8, 80,
124, 128129, 131, 179n148
Arte de taer fantasia. See Libro llamado
arte de taer fantasia (Sancta Maria)
articulation, 4; in absence of designated
musical direction, 72; adagio, 72;
agogic accents, 107108, 178n140; allegro, 7276, 99, 103, 109; arpeggios,
9093; artistic license, 9697, 133
135; brilliant style, 51, 103104, 113;
cantabile, 99101, 176nn110,116;
detached playing, 101104, 108; and
differences in harpsichords, 113;
dynamics, 65, 96; finger motion, 71;
fingering and, 65, 113, 118120, 122,
134135; and good performance, 73;
of grace notes, trills, 9499; harmony, 9192, 95, 173n85; legato playing,
8087; musical terms, 7576; note
lengths, timing of, 108110; ordinary
manner, 72, 7779; piano playing
and, 65; preparedness, 104; purpose
and scope of, 7076; signs, effect
on, 72; silences, 104108; slides, 92;
slurs, 8790; speed of, 60; staggered
playing, 9394; stroking the keys,
60; style bris (broken style), 90, 92;
tempo markings, 7374; text and

syntax, 74; timing, 108110; varied
articulations, 65, 73, 136
artistic license, 9699, 130135
artistry, 70110
Aspects (Brauchli), 159n115
aspiration, 104106, 105, 174n99
Bach, Carl Philipp Emanuel: about, 65,
137; on articulation, 72; on clavichord, 31, 6668; on curvature of
hand, 34; on detached notes, 72; on
dynamics, 65; on facial expressions,
1516; on finger extension, contraction, 21, 3435, 4546, 125; on
finger technique, 34, 160n24, 167n55;
on fingering, 86, 112, 120, 125128;
on forearm position, 25; on J. S. Bach,
125126; on memorization, 46; on
note lengths, 108; on ordinary manner, 72; on ornaments, 58, 9495,
9798; on performance, 73; on playing different keyboard instruments,
6668; on position at keyboard, 11
12; on quilling, 8; on singing, 100; on
slurs, 72, 88, 88
Bach, Johann Christian, 25, 39, 137
Bach, Johann Sebastian: about, 137;
appoggiaturas in Sonata BWV 1027,
95, 95; calm hand of, 63; cantabile,
100; on fingering, 125126; fingering technique of, 111; Forkel as biographer of, 149n5; hand technique
of, 3435, 49, 53, 5960, 63, 136,
167n51; playing of described, 1;
posture of, 14; teaching method of,
4243
The Bach Reader (David and Mendel,
eds.), 111
Bacilly, Bnigne de, 9899
balance point: of fingers, 55; of hands,
53, 54, 55
Ballard, Robert, 92
Index
Banchieri, Adriano, 115, 137
Barthlemon, Franois-Hippolyte, 13
batteries, 29, 124, 182n32
beautiful playing, 2, 4, 7, 20, 23, 36, 44,
5152, 66, 85, 182n29; belle manire
du toucher (a beautiful manner of
playing), 166n38; fingers and, 23; of
ornaments, 9499
Bdos de Celles, Franois (Dom Bdos),
106
Beethoven, Ludwig van, 101102
Bermudo, Juan, 116, 137, 181n17
body. See posture
le bon air, 17
le bon got, 17, 94
Bsendorfer, Ignaz, 152n21
Boyvin, Jacques, 138
Brauchli, Bernard, 159n115
breathing: and cantabile, 100101; freedom in, 17; rests, 71; tension and, 18;
voice studies, 99
Briareus, 121, 182n20
brilliant style, 51, 55, 5960, 86, 101,
103104, 113
Broderip, M. Robert, 3, 64, 138
broken chords, 8788, 90
broken style. See style bris (broken style)
Brossard, Sbastien de, 91
Buchner, Hans, 62, 115, 138
Buelow, George, 71
Bull, John, 115, 121, 138, 157n101
Burney, Charles, 16, 63, 138
Byrd, William, 119, 120, 138, 157n101
Cabezn, Antonio de, 138, 181n17
Cabezn, Hernando de, 20, 116, 138,
181n17
Caccini, Giulio, 178n147
cadence, 104, 177n129
calm hand position, 50, 6263
Camidge, Matthew, 130, 138
cantabile, 99101, 176nn110,116
cats paw position, 3031
199
Cecilia, St., 157n101, 158n102

chamber organ, 3
Chambonnires, Jacques Champion de,
1, 5152, 92, 104, 138139, 149n3
character (Affekt), 75
children: instruments for, 8, 66,
151nn11,12; small hands of, effect,
130; stretching of fingers, hands,
4546; teaching of, 5, 8, 1213, 66,
151nn11,12
Chopin, Fryderyk, 113, 139
choppy playing, 35, 8182, 101102,
108
chords: broken chords, 88, 90; dissonance, 65; emphasized by agogic
accent, 178n140; fingering, 135; in
legato playing, 84; ornamenting of,
9192; in slurs, 8788; staggered
playing of, 93
clavichord: bebung (vibrato), 68; C. P. E.
Bachs performance on, 16, 65; dtach, 103; elbow position for, 23, 25;
finger, 3033; J. S. Bachs technique
on, 34; as a learning instrument, 5,
9, 66; ornaments, playing on, 58;
playing, avoiding hard labor, 21; and
playing on different keyboard instruments, 10, 6569; sliding motion on,
58; slurs, pressure and, 88; touch for,
10, 23; as the true Klavier, 3, 150n9
clavier. See Klavier
Clavier-Anweisung (Hartong), 11, 123
Clavierschule (Lhlein), 3, 60
Clavierschule (rev. Mller), 3
Clavierstcke (Marpurg), 83
Clementi, Muzio, 102, 139
Code de musique pratique (Rameau), 29,
38, 131
comfort: adagio, 91; of arch of hand, 36;
of arm position, 10; of chair, seating,
1112, 17; of elbow position, 26; in
finger position, 11, 22; in fingering,
111113, 125, 128129, 134; of play-
200
Index
ing, 19; position at keyboard, 13; of

posture, 136
A Complete Book of Instructions for Beginners on the Harpsichord or Fortepiano
(Ross), 3
composition, conveying meaning of, 71
Concerning the Technique of the Fingers on the Harpsichord (Rameau),
4445
Conclusioni nel suono dellorgano
(Banchieri), 115
connected playing: articulation, 118; in
legato, 8090; in ordinary manner,
7779
connection: of limbs and joints, 14;
musical phrases, 7475, 7879; with
plectra and strings, 1, 33, 4749,
174n94
consonance, fingering and, 114, 119
consonant harmonies, 71, 95
Constanze, Hans Buchner van. See Buchner, Hans
contact with keys, 26, 47, 4950, 52,
8082, 104, 107, 109110, 136
continuo, 6, 65, 82, 130, 178n140
contraction, 15, 21, 38, 4142, 55, 83,
130133, 131134
Correa de Arauxo, Francisco, 80, 116,
121, 139, 181n17
Corrette, Michelle, 1112, 17, 24, 36,
121, 139
coul sur tierce, 92, 123
Couperin, Charles, 51
Couperin, Franois: about, 139; on
age to begin lessons, 5; on aspiration
and suspension, 104105, 105; on
beginners, 7; on cadence, 177n129;
on detached playing, 103, 103; on la
douceur du toucher, 2, 47; on dynamics
of harpsichord, 64; on elbow, wrist,
finger position, 26; on facial grimaces,
15; on finger flexibility, 19, 40; on
finger substitution, 8485, 8586,
171n62; on fingering, 8081, 122

123, 122123; on good taste, 122;
on key contact, 47; on legato playing,
8182; on note lengths, 109110; on
position of feet, 1213; on posture
at keyboard, 1013, 17; on sitting
height, 26
Couperin, Louis, 1, 5152, 139, 149n3
courantes, 92
crab walk, 133
creative process, and warm-up exercises,
46
crescendo, 97, 105, 120
Cristofori, Bartolomeo, 151n7
crossing: of fingers, 46, 127, 133; of
hands, 24, 29, 4849, 126127,
151n6
crushed note (acciaccatura), 173n84
curvature: cats paw position, 3031; of
fingers, 19, 21, 2939, 33, 39, 83, 107;
of hands, 28, 3039, 33, 39, 53; of
palms, 39
curved lines, notation, effect, 8485, 85
Czerny, Carl, 60, 101102, 139140
Dagincourt, Franois, 67, 140
dance: dance movement, 106; dancelike rhythms, 180n9; hands of ballet
dancers, 136; performance styles,
touches for, 74, 113114
DAnglebert. See Anglebert, Jean
Henry d
Daquin, Louis-Claude, 67, 140
darted notes, 58
decaying tone, 87, 90, 97, 173n81,
179n148
delicacy of touch, 2, 4, 20, 28, 31, 47, 52,
69, 71, 110, 136
Denis, Jean, 20, 29, 82, 121, 140
depressing of keys, 38, 4749, 79, 109
detached playing, 72, 103; in allegro, 72;
articulation in, 101104, 108; and
aspiration and suspension, 105; avoid-
Index
ing when not marked, 81; in brilliant
style, 51, 86, 103104, 113; compared
to legato, ordinary manners of playing, 77; and contraction of hand, 132;
dtach in, 103, 105106; detached
notes, how much to detach, 104; distance to keys, effect on, 83; fingering
for, 103, 103, 113, 132; in leaping passages and rapid tempos, 72; in nonlegato fingering, 81; before ornaments,
106; of silences, 170n31
Deutsch, Otto Erich, 157n101
dictionaries, musical, 76, 81, 91, 112,
158n105
Dictionnaire (Brossard), 91
Dictionnaire de LAcadmie franaise, 2
Dictionnaire de musique (Rousseau, J.),
81, 112, 158n105
Of different Evolutions, and the manner of contracting the Fingers (Miller), 4142
On the different touches (Pasquali),
179n148
diminuendo, 9697, 120
diminutions, 4749, 115, 181n12,
183n48
Diruta, Girolamo: about, 140; on accenti,
97, 175n102; on arm guiding hand,
29; on articulation, 77; on cats paw
position, 31; on elbow, arm, wrist position, 24; on fingering, 31, 114118; on
hand position, 29, 31, 36, 155n64; on
making gestures and movements, 13
14; on minimizing lifting of fingers,
4748; on ornaments, 97, 175n102; on
position at keyboard, 11; on posture at
keyboard, 1314, 155n64; on supple,
light hand, 1920; on sustaining
sound, 9091, 173n81; on techniques
for organ, harpsichord, 180n9; on
trills, 97, 175n102; writing on playing
other keyboard instruments, 2
Dissertation (Rameau), 70, 82, 130
201
dissonance: acciaccatura in touching

dissonant notes, 173n84; in appoggiaturas, 9596; articulation of, 91,
95; dissonant harmonies, 65, 71, 119;
fingering and, 114, 119; weak and
strong notes, 114, 119
distance: chair, from keyboard, 10;
between fingers and keys, 83; of key
width, fingers positioned at, 39; between torso and keyboard, 10
On the Distinction and Slurring of the
Notes (Nivers), 74
ditto buono, 114
ditto cattivo, 114
Du doigt (Duphly), 81
Doigter (Duphly), 81, 158n105
Doigter (Rousseau, J.-J.), 81, 158n105
Du doigter (Duphly), 158n105
Dom Bdos (Franois Bdos de Celles),
106
dotted rhythms, 98
double-manual keyboards, 7, 12, 65,
151n6
la douceur du toucher, 2, 4, 20, 28, 31, 47,
52, 69, 71, 110, 136
Dowland, John, 119, 120, 140
dramatic nuance, 64
Duphly, Jacques, 37, 67, 8182, 93, 140,
161n135
Dussek, Frantiek Xavers, 17, 140
Dutch virginal school, 121
dynamics, 3, 52, 6369, 74, 9798, 100,
105, 120
effortless playing, 2
elasticity, of fingers, 9, 38, 46, 53, 102,
183n44
elbows, 3; to follow wrists, 29, 52; forearm motion and, 14; position at keyboard, 10, 12, 2326, 2930; relative
to body, 24, 62; tension and, 18
elegance: in finger position, 22; of hand
motion, 112
202
Index
The Elements of Music with Progressive

Practical Lessons for the Harpsichord or
Piano Forte (Parsons), 85
embellishments: articulation in playing,
9499; artistic license and, 9697;
and expression, 64; quilling effect
on, 8; tremblements (trills), 44; trills,
4344; uses of, 99. See also ornamentation
Engel, Carl, 140
English fortepiano, 102
English spinet, 5657
English virginal school, 115, 121, 123
Engramelle, Marie-Dominique-Joseph,
106, 140141
equality, of finger motion, 4445
Esquela msica: segn la prtica moderna
(Nassarre), 6, 145
evenness: and speed, 45; of touch in instrument, 10
evolutions, 41, 41, 42
Exercise Book for Lord Fitzwilliam
(Duphly), 81, 161n135
exercises, 4, 8; for contraction of hand,
131; and creative process, 46; for finger substitution, 84, 85; for fingers,
4046, 4142, 60, 135; by J. S. Bach,
4243; for legato playing, 8283,
8283; ornaments as, 4344; for
thumbs, 2223
expression: and affects (Affektenlehre),
169n20; agogic accents, 107108,
178n140; arpeggiation, 90; articulation, 70110; artistic license,
133135; clavichord, 9; dynamics,
6466; facial expressions, 16, 28; fingering patterns, 111, 134; and good
performance, 73; in note lengths,
and timing of, 108110, 178n147,
178nn142,144, 179n148; ornaments,
effect on, 9899; refinement of on
fortepiano and harpsichord, 6869;
in schwer and leicht styles, 75; silences
and, 104107; in staggered playing,

9394
extension: of fingers, 21, 35, 45; of
hands, 15, 21
facial expressions, 1418, 28
facility in playing, 21
Facultad orgnica (Arauxo), 181n17
Fallows, David, 74
Farnaby, Giles, 121
fast passages, 22, 55, 6061, 169n27
feet, 2, 10, 1213, 17
Ftis, Franois-Joseph, 141
Fifteen Two-Part Inventions (Bach, J. S.),
4243
figured bass, 6, 65, 82, 178n140
finger motion, 14, 80; amount of, 1415;
and articulation, 77, 104; crab walk,
133; curvature of fingers, 35; in dtach, 103; equality of, 4445; in finger
exercises, 60; in fingering patterns,
112; independence of, 9, 39, 4445,
98, 136; individual finger movement,
50; of J. S. Bach, 1; in legato playing,
81, 85; light and unrestrained, 71; in
ordinary manner, 7778; perpendicular, 35, 38, 55, 59, 164n26; pressing
the keys, 4849; relaxation and finger
control, 2123, 63; releasing keys,
6061, 71, 107; in scale passages,
4950; in schwer and leicht styles, 75;
in slurs, 8384; strength and elasticity, 9; stroking the keys, 9, 5561,
5657, 6162; sustained notes, resting on keys, 79; tension and, 18; in
trills, 9798
finger pads, 3033; finger pedaling, 80
finger patterns, 8081; in detached or
legato playing styles, 103; historical
fingering patterns, 28, 36, 113114,
116119, 117, 121123, 135; thumbunder patterns, shift to, 113. See also
finger substitution; fingering
Index
finger strength, 30, 53, 68, 98, 136
finger substitution, 46, 8485, 8586,
128, 171n62
finger weight, 3, 52, 79
fingering, 4; of accidentals, 126130,
127129, 183nn40,44,48; and agility,
112; Applikatur, 112; and articulation,
65, 113, 118120, 122, 134135; and
artistic license, 130133; for brilliant
style, 113; for comfort, 111113,
128129, 134; consonance and, 114,
119; context, affected by, 113, 115,
125; for contraction of the hand,
130133, 131134; convenience in,
112; crab walk, 133; crossing of fingers, 127, 133; for detached playing,
103, 103, 113, 132; and differences
in harpsichords, 113; for different
intervals, 115, 119, 128, 130131,
183n48; diminuendo, for, 120; for
diminutions, 115, 181n12, 183n48;
dissonance and, 114, 119; diversity
in, 136; evolving practices of, 122;
expressive fingerings, 134; finger
substitution, 46, 8485, 8586, 128,
171n62; flowing facility of, 111; good
and bad fingers, 114115; in legato
playing, 8485, 8586, 171n62; for
lombardic rhythms, 115; non-legato
fingering, detached notes in, 81; for
ornaments, 84, 98; paired patterns,
28, 113114, 116119, 117, 121123,
135; for phrasing, 119, 122; preparedness, 6263; for quiebro, 56, 58;
raised keys, for, 126130, 127129;
for redoble, 58; for scales, 115, 118,
118119, 123124, 124, 126127,
129; in Silvains (Woodland nymphs),
81; speed, effect on, 43; for strong
and weak notes, 114120, 117120;
techniques for, 111135; tension in,
effect, 116; for thumb use, 42, 42,
113, 120130, 122124, 127129;
203
and trends in detached or legato playing, 103, 103; for trills, 115, 182n29;
varied articulations and, 65; in warmup exercises by Miller, 42
fingers: achieving proper touch with,
19; agility of, 19, 22, 31, 33, 44, 51,
53, 63, 85, 112, 116, 119, 125; arch
of, 15, 37, 39, 60; in arpeggios, 9293,
129; balance point of, 55; connection
with keys, 47, 5051, 104, 109110,
135136; contraction, 38, 4142,
130133, 131134; crossing of, 46,
127, 133; curvature of, 19, 21, 2939,
33, 39, 82, 107; distance between
keys and, 83; elasticity of, 9, 38, 46,
53, 102, 183n44; in extension, 21;
extension of, 35, 45; flow of, 50, 81,
111; force of, 3435; freedom of, 7,
23; good and bad fingers, 114115;
gravity, 35, 5253; hands as support
for, 2829, 5255; leaps, 4546, 125,
129; in legato playing, 86; lifting of,
4749, 60; lightness of, 28, 45, 63,
71; parallel alignment of, 28; pivot
fingers, 126127, 130; placement on
keys, 34, 37; pressure of, 32, 35, 49,
59, 69; relaxation, 1921, 38, 50, 83,
9293, 136; strength development of,
9; stretching of, 19, 35, 40, 4546;
stroking the keys, 9, 3435, 5561,
5657, 6162, 107, 164n26; suppleness of, 5, 7, 19, 120; and sweet tone
on harpsichord, 20; touching the
keys, 4769; uneven length of, effect,
3233, 3637, 151n12. See also middle fingers; small fingers; thumbs
fingertips: avoiding using, 3133; control
of, maximizing, 135; curve of, 29, 36;
depressing key with, 109; pads of fingertips, 37; sliding of, 59; in stroking
the keys, 55
Fischer, Johann Caspar Ferdinand, 92,
141
204
Index
Flemish harpsichord, 7, 12, 113

flow: of breathing, 1718; of fingers, 50,
8081; of notes, 51; of playing, 51; of
tones, 127
flowing manner of playing, 51, 73, 80
83, 103104, 111112, 166n37
forearms, 14, 23, 25
Forkel, Johann Nicolaus: about, 141,
149n5; on articulation of musical
phrase, 72; on a basic articulation, 78;
as biographer of J. S. Bach, 149n5; on
C. P. E. Bach, 34, 78, 160n124; on
J. S. Bach, 1, 14, 3435, 4243, 49,
53, 59, 63, 136, 149n5, 167n51; on
stroking the keys, 59; technique of, 59
Forqueray, Antoine, 93, 141
Forqueray, Jean-Baptiste (-Antoine),
141142
fortepiano, 3, 64; detached playing on,
101102; emergence of, 65; English
fortepiano, 102; and heavy and light
styles, 75; legato playing on, 101;
method books for, 3; popularity of, effect on harpsichord, 68; refinement of
touch and expression on, 6869; and
release toward the palm, 60; sustaining power of, 101. See also piano
Foucquet, Pierre-Claude, 9394
France, trend to legato playing, 86
Franois le Grand. See Couperin, Franois
French agrments. See agrments
French keyboard tradition, 92, 130,
178n147
French lute playing, 92
French national style, 76, 81
French unmeasured preludes, 8485,
85, 92
Frescobaldi, Girolamo, 7, 91, 118, 142,
178n147
fringing, 9394. See also staggered playing
Froberger, Johann Jakob, 91, 91, 118, 142
Fundamentbuch (Buchner), 62, 115,

181n14
Gasparini, Francesco, 23, 142, 173n84
Geminiani, Francesco, 173n84
Gerber, Ernst Ludwig, 149n5
German composers, fingering for good
and bad notes, 115
German national style, 76
geschnellte notes, 58
gestures, making, 13, 1517, 20, 55, 106,
122
gewhnliche, 77, 169n27. See also ordinary
manner of playing
ghost sound, 49
Gibbons, Orlando, 115, 142, 157n101
gliding technique. See stroking the keys
Goldberg, Laurette, 155n62, 168n81
good notes, 114115, 119
grace notes, 9499, 119, 135, 178n144.
See also agrments; ornamentation
graceful playing, 12, 28, 3637, 63, 111
Les Grces (Duphly), 93
gravity, and touch, 5253, 55
Griepenkerl, Friedrich Konrad, 53, 59,
142, 167n51
grimaces, facial, 1418, 154n49
Hkkinen, Aapo, 66
Handel, George Frideric, 63, 76, 102,
126, 142
hands: on age to begin lessons, 56; agility of, 14, 31, 63, 102; aptitude of, 22;
arch of, 24, 31, 3637, 39; in arpeggios,
9293; balance point, shifting to assist fingers, 53, 54, 55; calm hand, 15,
23, 25, 28, 33, 50, 6263; care of, 21;
cats paw position, 3031; circulation, 25; contraction of, 15, 21, 55, 83,
130133, 131134; crossing of, 24, 29,
4849, 126127, 151n6; curvature
of, 28, 3039, 33, 39, 53; delicate skill
of, 5152, 112; extension of, 15, 21;
Index
falling onto keys, 23, 26; fast hand,
20; to follow fingers, 29, 52, 5455;
formation of, 155n64; free from body,
25; guided by arms, 23, 29, 31, 48; and
harsh physical labor, 2122; heavy
hand, 20; height of, 10, 29, 50; holding
and moving, 2; lightness of, 1920,
48, 52, 102; menial labor on, 6; mens
hands, 2122; placement on keyboard,
2223, 36; poised over one note, 54;
poorly trained, effect, 24; position at
the keyboard, 10, 14, 2223, 27, 28
31, 6263, 158n102, 159n115; proper
use of, 19; Rameau on, 3; relaxation
of, 18, 20, 33, 75, 93, 125; rounded,
2829, 33, 34, 63, 131; shape of, and
comfort in fingering, 134; shifting
weight over fingers, 5354, 54; sideways motion, 62; sitting height and,
12; small hands, effect, 130; and soft
quills for beginners, 78; strength of,
29, 46; stretching of, 4546; suppleness of, 19, 28, 31; as support for fingers, 2829; tension and, 18; weight,
5253; womens hands, 2122; young
students, 78
Hanon, Charles-Louis, 142
hardness, of playing, 20
harmonies: and agogic accents, 107; arpeggiated harmonies, 84, 88, 89, 90,
97, 173n84, 178n147; consonance,
71, 95; dissonant harmonies, 71, 95,
119; fundamental harmonies, 8485,
85, 92; and good and bad notes, 114,
119; in legato playing, 8485, 85;
musical delivery and declamation,
106; nonharmonic passing notes, 92,
173n84; note value and, 109; opening harmony, 91; ornaments, and, 92,
97, 173n85; prolonging of, 9092,
173n85; slurs in, 88, 89; in staggered
playing, 93; sustaining by ornaments,
97; sweet harmony, 2
205
harpsichord: acoustics of, and stroking

and perpendicular finger motions,
35, 38, 55, 59, 164n26; lme (soul),
giving to, 104; for beginning students, 79; body, appearance and
decoration of, 7; builders, 152n17; as
complete instrument, 68; decaying
tone of, 87, 90, 97, 173n81, 179n148;
differences in, effect, 50; doublemanual keyboard, 7, 12, 65; dynamics
and, 6467; Flemish harpsichord, 7,
12, 113; French harpsichord, 7, 113;
gravity, 52; Italian harpsichord, 7,
113, 152n13, 173n81; maintenance,
basic skills, 50; ottavino harpsichord,
8, 152n13; playing on one register, 9;
plectrum/plectra, 47, 50, 98, 151n7,
174n94; quills, 79, 151n7; and refinement of touch and expression,
6869; registrations, 65, 151n6;
regulating of, 50, 152n17; selecting, criteria, 610; single-manual
keyboard, 7, 65, 151n6; slurs, considerations when playing, 90; and
sustaining sound, 9091; volume of
sound, 6466
The Harpsichord (Harich-Schneider),
80
Hartong, Philipp Christoph, 11, 19, 25,
86, 123, 142
head, 2, 1314, 153n41
heaviness, 20
heavy (schwer) style, 75
height: Alexander Technique effect on,
154n41; of arms, 10; of hands, 10, 29,
50; sitting height, 1113, 2526, 29,
153n31; tone when key struck from
height, 4748, 164n26; of wrists, 29,
50
Henestrosa, Luis Venegas de. See Venegas de Henestrosa, Luis
Hensel, Johann Daniel, 78, 142
Hickman, Hans, 159n115
206
Index
Hipkins, Alfred James, 143

Hodermann, Georg Caspar, 78, 143
Hole, William, 157n101
How the Arm Must Guide the Hand
(Diruta), 24
Hllmandel, Nicolas-Joseph, 83, 143
Hummel, Johann Nepomuk, 60
humming, 18
humors, 6, 150n4
hurdy-gurdy, 86
Italian national style, 76, 178n147

Italian toccatas, 98
iconography, 153n31, 158n102, 159n115

Imitatio violistica (Scheidt), 87
improvisatory pieces, 74, 85; French
unmeasured preludes, 8485, 85, 92;
toccatas, 74, 91, 9192, 98, 118119,
118119, 178n147
independence, of fingers, 9, 39, 4445,
98, 136
ingal, 109, 178n147
Institutes of Music (Miller), 41, 4142,
82, 8283, 124, 124, 132, 132
Instructions for the Piano-forte or Harpsichord (Camidge), 130
instrument makers, 152n17
interconnectedness, of limbs and joints,
14
interpretation: articulation and, 70110;
of curved line notation, 85; and fingering choices, 113; flexibility in, 74;
of musical pieces, 71, 110, 113; of
slurred notes, 88
intervals: elbow and wrist movement
when playing large intervals, 24; fingering, 21, 24, 71, 92, 115, 119, 128,
130131, 183n48
Inventions (Bach, J. S.), 100
inversions, different, playing, 178n140
Le istitutioni harmoniche (Zarlino), 99
Italian harpsichord, 7, 113, 152n13,
173n81
Italian musical terms, 74, 76, 99,
176n110
Kapsperger, Giovanni Girolamo, 92, 143

key depth, 7, 9, 25, 50
key reaction, quilling effect on, 8
key size, 78, 39, 151nn11,12
keyboard: arms, position at, 2326;
beautiful manner of placing hands on,
36; body position at, 3, 1013; chair,
distance from, 10; distance between
torso and keyboard, 10; doublemanual, 7, 12, 65; elbows, position at,
10, 12, 2326, 2930; German keyboards, 7; hands, position at, 2223,
25, 2831, 158n102, 159n115; little
fingers, position at, 36; palms, position at, 24, 2829; playing, vs. striking, 50; playing on different keyboard
instruments, 6669; portative organs,
hand position for, 159n115; position
at, 13; posture at, 1318, 151n41,
153nn31,41, 155n64; single-manual,
7, 65, 151n6; sitting at, height for,
1113, 2526, 29; thumbs, position
at, 2223, 28, 37; wrist position at,
2329, 27
keyboard instruments: for beginning
students, 79; finger weight for, 3;
multiple, effect of study on musicianship, 10; playing aspects applicable to
all, 3; small instruments, 8
keys: constant contact with quill, string,
26, 47, 135136; depressing of, 38,
4749, 79, 109; distance between
jacks, 8, 107, 151n7, 152n17, 165n28;

clavichordist, problem operating, 68
jeu coulant (flowing playing), 103,
166n37
le jeu franois, 81
joints, interconnectedness of limbs and,
14
Index
fingers and, 83; distance to in detached playing, effect on, 83; dryer
tone when key struck from height, 47;
finger weight, 23, 26, 3435; fingers,
constant contact with, 34, 37, 47, 50,
104, 109110; overlapping touch, 79;
raised keys (accidentals), fingering
for, 126130, 127129, 183nn40,44;
release of, 35, 45, 58, 6061, 65,
8687, 100; small fingers, placement
on, 26, 28, 3738; sticking, causes,
48, 165n28; striking the keys, 1112,
20, 40, 4748, 60; stroking the keys,
9, 5561, 5657, 6162, 107; thumbs,
placement on, 26, 28, 3539; touching, 8, 20, 23, 4769, 54, 5657,
6162, 6162, 65, 165nn28,29; worn
key edges, 56, 57
Kirnberger, Johann Philipp, 143
Klavier, 3, 150n9
Klavier- und Fortepiano-Schule (Mller), 3
Klavierschule (Hensel), 78
Klavierschule (Lhlein), 16
Klavierschule (Trk), 1, 83
klebricht Spielart (notes held beyond
value), 84
Kleine theoretische Klavierschule
(Knecht), 102
Kleines Elementarbuch (Mller), 3
Knecht, Justin Heinrich, 102, 143
knees, 17, 44
knuckles, and wrist position, 29
Koch, Heinrich Christoph, 74, 99, 107,
143
Die Kunst das Clavier zu spielen (Marpurg), 173n84
Kurzer Unterricht fr Musik-Anfnger
(Hodermann), 78
labor, avoiding harsh, 2122
Landowska, Wanda, 80, 143
Le Gallois, Jean, 1, 5152, 86, 103104,
144, 149n3
207
leaps, 72, 89; bad notes that leap, 114;

hand to follow fingers, 29; little fingers in, 129; tendons and fingers in,
4546, 125, 129; too quickly played,
effect, 48
Lebgue, Nicolas, 144, 174n99
left hand, suppleness of, 22
legato: articulation and production of,
71, 8087, 161n135; cantabile playing,
101; compared to legato, 7780; and
contraction of hand, 132; fast passages, release when playing, 61; finger
exercises for, 82, 8283; finger pedaling and, 80; finger substitution in
playing, 8485, 8586, 171n62; fingering, 103, 103, 113; as flowing playing (jeu coulant), 103, 166n37; French
style of playing, as feature of, 81; and
good performance, 73; not part of
basic touch/articulation, 72; and note
length, 8485, 109; over-legato, 65, 80,
8384, 89; relaxation, 80; release in,
8687; slurs, playing, 8485, 8790;
and stroking the keys, 56; thumb use
in, 83; as tied or equal touch, 81
leicht (light) style, 75
length: of arm, effect, 10; of fingers, uneven, effect, 3233, 3637, 151n12;
of instruments, 7; from keyboard, 11;
lengthened pose of body, 13. See also
note length
La Leon (Forqueray, A.), 93
Leonhardt, Gustav, 6567
less is more, 136
lessons, 3, 8, 11, 19, 124, 150n9; age for
beginning, 56, 46; hand position in,
63; single manual use in, 65; in treatises, 133; trills, introducing in, 46,
98; voice lessons, 14, 154n9; written
by J. S. Bach, 43
Lettre . . . Mademoiselle Regnault de
Solier touchant la musique (Le Gallois),
1, 51, 86, 103, 149n3
208
Index
Lexicon (Walther), 99. See also Musikalisches Lexikon (Koch)

De la liaison (Saint-Lambert), 89
liaison parfaite, 81
liaisons, 84, 8889. See also slurs
liberty, of fingers, 22
Libro de tientos y discursos de msica practica (Correa), 80
Libro llamado arte de taer fantasia
(Sancta Maria), 23, 30, 111
light (leicht) style, 75
lightness: of fingers, 28, 45, 63, 71; of
hands, 1920, 48, 52, 102; of touch,
28, 67, 79
limbs, movement of, 1315
Liszt, Franz, 11
little fingers. See small fingers
Little preliminary and essential exercises to arrive at playing well (Couperin, F.), 41
Little progressions appropriate for
forming the hand (Marpurg), 42
Livre dorgue I (Nivers), 18, 100, 118
Lhlein, Georg Simon, 3, 16, 25, 60,
6869, 73, 144
lombardic rhythms, 115, 178n147
Lowe, George, 157n101
lute, 20, 92
maintenance, basic skills, 50
Manfredini, Vincenzo, 1415, 23, 25,
100, 144
manuals, registrations, changing, effect,
65, 151n6
Manuductio ad organum (Samber), 13, 37
Marpurg, Friedrich Wilhelm: about,
144; on acciaccaturas, 173n84; on accidentals (raised keys), 129; on age
to begin lessons, 5; on Chambonnires, 104; on curvature of hand, 38;
on detached playing, 102103; on
Duphly, 67; on dynamic expression,
6465; on fingering, 83, 112; on fin-
gers flying upwards, avoiding, 50; on

gestures, 15; on hand position, 29; on
the harpsichord vs. clavichord, 67; on
ordinary manner, 72, 7778; on position at keyboard, 1011; on position
of feet, 13; on posture at keyboard,
17; on silences, 170n31; on sitting
height, 12; on slurs, 83, 87; on soft
quills for beginners, 78; on trills, 98;
on warm-up exercises, 42; on wrist
position, 29
Mattheson, Johann, 1617, 144
meaningful playing, 66
De la mechanique des doigts sur le
clavessin (Rameau), 44
Mein Junges Leben (Sweelinck), 121
menial labor, effect on hands, 6
mens hands, suppleness of, 2122
mental preparedness, 40, 104
Merbach, Georg Friedrich, 79, 144
Mersenne, Marin, 1, 20, 52, 144
Merulo, Claudio, 144
metronome markings, 74
mezzo-ottavino (quint-pitch instrument),
152n13
middle C, 1112, 22
middle fingers: contact with keys, 117;
curvature, 3537; dexterity of, 134;
drawn inward, 24, 34; fingering for,
36, 42, 113, 118, 121, 126, 134; and
good and bad fingers and notes, 114
115; middle fingertips, 37; stretching
of in intervals, 21; stroking the keys,
62; wrist parallel with, 29
middle road (die Mittlestrasse) of playing, 79
Milchmeyer, Johann Peter, 84, 144
Miller, Edward, 41, 4142, 8283, 124,
124, 129, 132, 132, 145, 171n51
La Milordine (Couperin, F.), 85
minuet, touches for, 74
mordents, 19, 56, 58, 94, 106
mouth, movements of, 1518
Index
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 76,
101102
Mller, August Eberhard, 3, 60, 145
muscles, 15, 19, 2123, 94
muselar, 113, 187n7; child ottavino of,
152n13
music: articulation and, 70110; and
expression, 64; grammar of, 7071;
memorizing, 46; and rhetoric, 70,
168n1, 169n20; singing, 101
music stand, removing, effect, 46
musical dictionaries, 76, 81, 91, 112,
158n105
musical expression. See expression
musical instructions, 99100, 176n110
musical keys, exercises, practicing in different keys, 4142
musical language, understanding, interpreting, 71
musical phrases, 72, 7879
musical phrasing, and differences in
harpsichords, 113
musical terms, 7476, 99, 176n110
musicality, and note lengths, 110
musicianship: effect of playing on different keyboard instruments, 69; and
good performance, 73; multiple keyboard study and, 10
Musikalisches Lexikon (Koch), 74, 99, 107
My staccato is always legato. (Landow
ska), 80
Nassarre, Fr. Pablo: about, 145; on accidentals (raised keys), 130, 183n48;
on care of the hands, 21; on curvature
of hand, fingers, 3133; on depressing
the keys, 4849; on effect of menial
labor on hands, 6; on finger size,
3233; on fingering, 116, 181n17;
on movement of arms, 13; on movement of limbs, 15; on playing neither
connected nor detached, 77; on position at keyboard, 11; on posture at
209
keyboard, 1314; on practice at keyboard, 46

national styles, 7576, 81, 178n147
natural manner of playing, 32, 36, 52
New Instructions for Playing the Harpsichord, Piano-forte, or Spinnet (Anonymous), 24
New Tutor (Barthlemon), 13
Nivers, Guillaume-Gabriel: about, 145;
on cantabile playing, 100; on curvature of fingers, 36; on demarcation
and connecting of notes, 7475; on
fingering, 117118, 118; on hand
position, 155n64; on playing effortlessly, 1819; on posture at keyboard,
155n64; writing on playing other keyboard instruments, 2
nonharmonic passing notes, 92, 173n84
non-legato, fingering of, 81
North, Roger, 93
notation: for accenting or prolonging
notes, 109; of agogic accents, 107;
curved lines, effect, 8485, 85; imprecision of, 78; and ingal, 109, 178n147;
note lengths, and timing of, 108110;
of silence, 105, 106; staggered playing, 93
note length: in agogic accents, 109; in
arpeggiated chords, 119; in arpeggio, 92; contraction of hand, effect
on, 131132; in detached playing,
102103; and ingal, 109, 178n147; in
legato, 85, 109; notation for accenting
or prolonging notes, 109; in ordinary
manner, 79, 81; in ornaments, 95;
resonating length of, 65; and rubato,
94, 109, 178n147; shortening for
expression, 109; in silences, 106; in
slurs, 88; and speed of release, 109;
timing of, 108110, 178n142,144,147,
179n148
notes: in broken chords, 87; crushed
note (acciaccatura), 92, 173n84; de-
210
Index
marcation and connecting of, 7475;

detached notes, 72, 103106; emphasized by agogic accent, 107, 178n140;
final notes, release of, effect, 107; finger substitution for, 85; fingering for,
111135; flow of, 51; overlapping of,
75, 8485, 85, 87, 89, 171n59; pairs,
109, 178n147; preparing to play, 107;
reiterating in toccatas, 91; resonating
length of, 65; rounded notes, 78; in
schwer and leicht styles, 75; and silences, 104107; slurred notes, 72; staggered playing of, 9394; strong and
weak notes, fingering for, 114120,
117120; sustaining, curved lines as
notation, effect, 8485, 85; varied
articulations and, 65
nuance, 64
Nurmi, Ruth, 6061
Obras de msica para tecla (Cabezn,
H.), 20
Ogg, Jacques, 134
opening harmony, 91
ordentliche, 77, 169n27
ordinary manner of playing, 72, 7780,
169n27
organ: chamber organ, 3; differing techniques for organ, harpsichord, 180n9;
dynamics of, 6566; finger position
for, 32; finger strength for, 30; fingernails, avoiding using, 32; hand position for, 3, 32; heavy keyboard action,
effect, 49; how sound is produced, 3;
keys, pressing on, 47; and ordinary
manner of playing, 77; portative organs, 159n115; and sustaining sound,
9091; touch progress affected by use
of, 10
ornamentation: accenti, 97, 175n102; acciaccaturas, 92, 173n84; agrments, 93;
appoggiaturas, 9496, 95, 98; appuy
(prepared, supported trill), 99; articu-
lation, 9499, 106, 174n91; artistic

license, 9699; aspiration, 104106,
105, 174n99; beautiful playing of,
94; cadence, 104, 177n129; chords,
ornamenting of, 9192; coul (coul
sur tierce or tierce coul), 102; dtach,
103, 105106; finger substitution, 85;
fingering, 8485, 115, 135; harmony,
filling out of, 92, 173n85; mordents,
19, 56, 58, 94, 106, 167n55, 183n44;
port de voix, 96, 174n99; practicing,
43, 9798; quiebro, 56, 58; redoble, 58;
roulements, 123124, 182n32; Schnellen, 58, 58; silences as, 104107;
silences darticulation, 106; slides, 92;
stroking the keys, 58; suspension,
93, 104105, 105; techniques for
playing, 56, 58, 9499; tightness,
avoiding in playing, 19; tremblement,
44, 106; tremoli (trills), 97, 175n102;
trills, 4344, 94, 9798, 175n102;
turn, 177n129; uses of, Trk, on, 99;
Vorschlge, 95, 95
ottavino harpsichord, 8, 152n13
overlapping notes, 75, 8485, 85, 8788,
171n59
overlapping sounds, 56, 75, 77, 8081,
9596
over-legato, 65, 72, 7980, 8384,
8990
oxygen, flow of, 1718
paired fingering, 28, 113114, 116117,
117, 118119, 121123, 135
palms: curvature of, 38, 39, 53; opening, closing of, 130; peeling fingers
towards, 3435, 55, 59, 61, 107, 117,
164n26; pinky finger, 30; position at
keyboard, 24, 2829; sitting height
and, 12; thumb under, 30, 124
Parsons, John, 53, 85, 145
Parthenia, or the Maydenhead (collection), 26, 27, 28, 157n101, 158n102
Index
partitas, 126
Pasquali, Nicol: about, 145; on accidentals (raised keys), 128; on
arm, elbow position, 24; on artistic
license, 133134; on contraction of
hand, 130131, 131; on curvature of
fingers, 37; on fingering, 124, 124,
128129, 128131, 131; on fugues on
harpsichord, 179n148; on legato playing, 8081, 109, 179n148; on note
lengths, 109; on teaching children, 8,
151nn11,12; on thumb use, 124, 124,
128, 128, 129; on tone of harpsichord,
179n148; on wrist position, 29
passagework: in allegro, articulation
of, 73; arpeggiated passages, 128,
178n147; artistic license in fingering,
135; detached notes, 72; fast passages,
22, 29, 55, 6061, 81, 113, 126, 135,
169n27; improvisatory passagework,
85; leaping passages, 72, 89; in legato,
61, 85; and ordinary manner, 169n27;
phrasing, 135; scale passages, 29,
4950, 7475, 86; slow passages, 56;
slurred passages, 8890; stepwise
passages, 72; and stroking the keys,
60; strong and weak notes in, 119;
thumbs, passing in passages, 81
passing nonharmonic tones, 92, 173n84
Pavana Lachrymae (Dowland, set by
Byrd), 119, 120
pedagogues, 2, 4, 12, 69
Penna, Lorenzo, 115, 145
perfection, of touch, 44
performance: articulation and, 70110;
context, fingering affected by, 113; expression in, articulation for, 70110;
gestures during, 13, 1517, 20, 55,
106, 122; good performance, elements
of, 6768, 73; listening to other musicians, 136; memorization and, 46;
over-legato use, effect on, 72; period
costume, effect on, 113; and playing
211
on different keyboard instruments,

6669; poorly trained hands, effect
on, 24; pre-performance testing of
instrument, 73; release of final notes,
effect of, 107; slurs, considerations
when playing, 90; tonotechnie (performance reproducing machine), 106
performers: effect of playing on different
keyboard instruments, 69; individual
sense of style of, 4; and la douceur du
toucher, 2, 4, 47, 52, 71, 136; ornaments, discretion in adding, playing,
174n91; role of, 71; selecting a harpsichord, criteria, 610, 152n17; slurs,
considerations when playing, 90;
tempo and dynamic changes, sensitivity of, 74
period costume, effect on performance,
fingering, 113
perpendicular motion, 35, 38, 55, 59,
164n26
Perrine, Sr., 92, 145
Petites evolutions propres former la main
(Marpurg), 42
Petri, Johann Samuel, 24, 145
Petschke, Adolph Friedrich, 79
phrasing: articulation and, 70110;
and differences in harpsichords, 113;
fingering for, 119, 122; of musical
passages, 135; over-legato use, effect
on, 72
physical labor, harsh, avoiding, 2122
physical preparedness, 40
physical tension, effects of, 18
piano: Bsendorfer concert grands,
11, 152n21; detached playing on,
101102; dynamics of, 3, 52; exercises on, effect on hands and fingers,
174n87; harpsichord articulation and,
65; holding notes beyond value, 84;
keys, number of, effect on body position at keyboard, 11; legato playing on,
101; playing, effect on harpsichord
212
Index
technique, 168n81; sound production,

gravity and, 52; touch progress affected by use of, 10. See also fortepiano
piano (dynamic marking), 65
pianoforte, 3, 9, 69, 101
Piccinini, Alessandro, 145146
Pices de clavecin (Rameau), 26, 44
Pices de luth en musique (Perrine), 92
pivot fingers, thumbs as, 126127, 130
Plain and Easy Instructions for Young
Performers on the Pianoforte or Harpsichord (Broderip), 3
A Plain & Easy Introduction to Harpsichord (Nurmi), 60
playing: according to the rules, 20; on
age to begin lessons, 56; articulation
and, 70110; aspects applicable to all
keyboard instruments, 3; basic touch
in, 72; beautifully, 2, 4, 7, 5152, 66;
belle manire du toucher (a beautiful manner of playing), 166n38; in
brilliant style, 51, 86, 101, 103104,
113; cantabile playing, 99101,
176nn110,116; choppy playing, 8,
8182, 101, 108; comfort while
playing, 19; contrasting shades, 65;
convenience of the player, 37; delicate
style of, 28; on different keyboard
instruments, 6669; diminutions,
4749, 115, 181n12, 183n48; dynamics in, 6466; energy, amount to play
keys, 49; evenness of, 45; finesse in, 9;
finger pads, using, 3033; fingertips,
avoiding using, 3033, 37; flowing
manner of, 51, 73, 104, 112; flowing ordinary manner of, 80; French
national style of, 76, 81; fugues,
suitability of, 179n148; German national style of, 76; graceful playing,
1, 1819, 28, 3637, 63, 111; gravity
and touch, 5253, 55; harsh manner
of, 78, 20; intervals, fingers in extension when, 21; Italian national style
of, 76, 178n147; jeu coulant (flowing

playing), 103, 166n37; and la douceur
du toucher, 2, 4, 47, 136; leicht (light)
style, 75; less is more, 136; listening
to other musicians, 136; meaningful
playing, 66; memorization, 46; muscular preparedness for, 23; muselar,
113, 187n7; music stand, removing,
effect, 46; of national styles, 7576,
81, 178n147; natural manner of playing, 32, 36, 52; in ordinary manner,
72, 7779; of ornaments, 9499;
pairs of notes, 109, 178n147; personalized method, 4; preparing to play,
3, 539, 46; registrations, changing,
effect, 65, 151n6; relaxation and,
1823, 28; round manner of playing,
8, 61, 73, 78, 102, 112, 125; schwer
style, 75; semidetached manner of
playing, 108; sliding action of fingers,
35; smooth playing, 30; staggered
playing, 9394; standing at Flemish
harpsichord, 12; sticky playing, 72,
79; stroking the keys, 9, 5561, 56
57, 6162; in style bris (broken style),
90, 92; suavity of, 2; sweet playing,
30; tasteful playing, 112, 122; tension
and, 18; thumbs, using, 38; tightness,
avoiding, 19; too much force, effect,
4849, 164n26; touching the keys,
4769; using different types of touch,
73; velocity, 43; vocal skills, emulating
in, 100; voice leading in, 82. See also
particular topics
plectra/plectrum: action, 1, 10; connection with, 1, 33, 4749, 151n7,
174n94; control of and dynamic
contrasts, 98; and decay of sound, 90;
described, 151n7; initiation of, 65; of
muselar, 187n7; point, 9, 49, 173n81;
quilling of (see quills, quilling); voicing of, 50
Pleyel, Ignaz Josef, 17, 146
Index
port de voix, 96, 174n99
portative organs, 159n115
portato, 76, 78, 170n34
portraying the music, articulation and,
70110
position: of arms, 10, 2226, 36, 52, 55;
of body, 3, 1013, 24, 62, 159n115;
calm hand position, 50, 6263; cats
paw position, 3031; comfort, 1011,
13, 22, 26; of elbows, 10, 12, 2326,
2930; of feet, 10, 1213; finger position, 11, 22, 34; of forearms, 23, 25;
hand position, 3, 78, 10, 14, 20, 23,
25, 27, 2831, 33, 50, 6263, 9293,
158n102, 159n115; of little fingers,
31, 3538, 117; at organ, 3, 32; of
palms, 24, 2829; relaxation and,
1823; of thumbs, 2223, 3031,
3438; of torso, 1013; of wrists,
2329, 27, 6263, 159n115
posture: of body at keyboard, 1318, 37,
153n41; and breathing, 17; comfort,
136; constrained, 22; distance between torso and keyboard, 10; elbow
position, 24, 62; as foundation, 32;
gently turned, effect, 1718; hands
and arms, 25; holding and moving, 2;
of J. S. Bach, 14; position at the keyboard, 3, 1013; posture, 1318, 37,
153n41; relaxation of, 1823, 153n41;
stretching of, 40; tension, 18, 20, 40;
tree imagery and, 14; unnecessary
movements of, 18, 14; voice lessons
and, 154n49
practice room, 41
practicing: of arpeggiation, 9293; and
artistic license in fingering, 135; dtach, 106; in different keys, 4142;
frequently, 136; ornaments, 9798;
perfect technique and, 45; slowly, 43;
for success at keyboard, 46; trills,
4344, 9798, 182n29; warm-up
exercises, 4142
213
Praetorius, Michael, 111, 146

preludes: French unmeasured preludes,
8485, 85, 92; slur used in, 90
Premier livre de clavecin (Lebgue),
174n99
Premier livre de pices de clavecin (Couperin, F.), 105
Prencourt, F., 171n62
preparedness: mental, 40, 104; muscular, 23; physical, 40; preparing to play,
3, 539, 46, 107
pressing of keys, 20, 4749, 5253, 65,
165nn2829
pressure, 88; of fingers, 32, 35, 49, 59,
69; on keys, 8; in rapid passages, 73;
in slurs, 88; from thumbs, 23
Li primi albori musicali per li principianti della musica figurata (Penna),
115
Principes du clavecin (Marburg), 5, 83
Les principes du clavecin (Saint-Lambert),
vii, 5, 89, 96, 123, 173n85
Principles of Music Calculated for the Pianoforte or Harpsichord (Hllmandel),
83
pris, 8182
Progressions or short exercises to form
the hands (Couperin, F.), 41
Purcell, Henry, 94
pushing: keys, to key bed, 23; keys, well
down, 5657; of thumbs against each
other, 23
Quantz, Johann Joachim, 60, 65, 7374,
96, 146, 149n5, 167n58
quiebro, 56, 58
quills, quilling: for beginning students,
79, 19, 94, 151n7; connection with
plucking action, 1, 26, 33, 47, 136;
equal force of sound production, 64;
ghost sound, producing, 49; playing
slowly to feel quill plucking string,
9; plucking, control of, 29, 49, 52;
214
Index
plucking harshly, quickly, effect, 48,

164n26; resistance against strings,
judging, 50; voicing of, 165n28
raised keys (accidentals), fingering for,
126130, 127129, 183nn40,44
Rameau, Jean-Philippe: about, 146; on
accidentals (raised keys), 130; on age
to begin lessons, 6; on aspiration and
suspension, 105, 105; on contraction
of hand, 131; on curvature of fingers,
3738; on elbow position, 23, 26,
29; on exercises, 4445; expertise
on harpsichord, 2; on finger movement, 50, 62; on finger weight, 79;
on grammar of music, 70; on hand
position, 3, 28, 131; on hand weight,
52; on legato playing, 82, 82; on little
finger position, 3738; on movement
of fingers, 14; on quilling for students,
89; on slurs, 8789, 89; on smaller
components guiding the larger, 29;
on thumb use, 3738, 82, 123124,
182n31; on wrist movement, 63; on
wrist position, 2829
rapid passages, 7374
rapid tempos, 72
recording: experiments, with tonotechnie,
106; of lessons, 154n49; of performances, 136
redoble, 58
registration, 9, 65, 151n6
Regole armoniche (Manfredini), 14
regulation, of tone, 35
relaxation: of body, 1823, 153n41;
comfort and, 22; and finger control,
21; of fingers, 38, 50, 9293, 136; and
graceful playing, 1; of hands, 33; in
legato, 80; mordents, in playing, 19; of
muscles, 15, 94; playing and, 1823;
and posture at keyboard, 17; relaxed
hand position visualization, 20, 31;
relaxed playing style, 28, 80; students
and, 19; of tendons, 15, 45, 125; touch

and, 1823; trills, in playing, 19, 94
Relaxation and Avoidance of Heaviness and Extra Movement (Cabezn,
H.), 20
release: and agogic accents, 107108;
appoggiaturas, release tone of, 96; and
cantabile playing, 100; curved lines
as notation, effect, 8485, 85; in fast
passages, 61; of keys, 35, 45, 48, 60
61, 65, 8687, 100, 107, 109, 164n26,
178n138; in legato, 61, 81, 8687; and
light and unrestrained finger motion,
71; of notes, 109; palms, release towards, 60; in running passages, 60; of
tension, 30, 40; towards the palm, 60
Rellstab, Johann Carl Friedrich, 69, 79,
109, 146
Remarques (Saint-Lambert), 123
repair, 152n17
repeated notes, 58, 91, 118119
rests: articulation of, 71; in diminutions,
48; extending of, 108; purpose of,
106; as silence generally (see silences)
retraction, 58
rhetoric, 70, 168n1, 169n20
rhythm, 70; cadence as, 177n129; dancelike rhythms, 180n9; dotted rhythms,
98; of hurdy-gurdy, 86; inaccurate, effect, 104; ingales and rhythmic alteration, 178n147; lombardic rhythms,
115, 178n147; long-short rhythm,
118; port de voix rhythmic application
of, 174n99; rhythmic variation, 71
Ricci, Francesco Pasquale, 25, 39, 146
Rigler, Franz Paul, 84
Ross, John, 3, 146
roughness: of playing, 20; of skin, avoiding, 21
roulements, 29, 123124, 182n32
round manner of playing, 8, 5961, 73,
78, 102, 112, 125
rounded fingers, 38
Index
rounded hands, 2829, 33, 34, 63, 131
Rousseau, Jean, 86, 94, 112, 146
Rousseau, Jean-Jacques, 22, 146
rubato, 94, 109, 178n147
rules, playing according to, 20
running passages, 29, 60, 81, 126, 135
Saint-Lambert, Michel de: about, 147;
on accidentals, 126127; on age to
begin lessons, 56; on agrments,
174n99; on appoggiaturas, 9697; on
artistic license, 9697; on aspiration,
105, 174n99; on cadence, 177n129; on
a calm hand, 6263; on care of the
hands, 21; on dtach, 105106; on
elbow, wrist position, 24; on finger
position, 22, 37; on fingering, 123,
126127; on harmony, filling out
of, 173n85; on legato playing, 82; on
playing scale passages, 4950; on port
de voix, 96, 174n99; on slurs, 8889,
89, 90; on students, vii; on teaching,
vii; on thumb use, 123, 126127; on
trills as exercise, 4344; on wrist
position, 28; writing about playing
harpsichord, 2
Samber, Johann Baptist, 13, 25, 37, 147
Sancta Maria, Toms de: about, 147; on
accidentals, 126; on contraction of
hand, 132, 132133; on elbow position, 23; on finger curvature, 3031;
and finger substitution, 171n62; on
fingering, 111, 116117, 120, 121,
126, 181n17; on hand motion, 62; on
hand position, 23, 3031, 159n115;
on monocordio (clavichord), 159n113;
on stroking the keys in playing mordents, 56, 58; on thumb use, 120, 121,
126; writing on playing other keyboard instruments, 23
scales: demarcation and connecting of
notes in, 74; finger motion for, 4950;
fingering for, 115, 118, 118119,
215
123124, 124, 127, 129; in legato

playing, 86; overlapping harmonies,
notes, effect, 75; playing, release of,
74; running scale passages, 29; and
stroking the keys, 60
Scarlatti, Alessandro, 118119, 118
119, 124, 147
Scarlatti, Domenico, 99100, 102, 118,
126, 147, 176n110
Scheibe, Johann Adolph, 147
Scheidt, Samuel, 87
Schlick, Arnolt, 147
Schnellen, 58, 58
Schubert, Franz, 101
schwer (heavy) style, 75
scratch technique, 5556, 58, 167n55
seat, seating, 1112, 17, 2526
semidetached manner of playing, 108
sensitivity, multiple keyboard study
and, 10
shading, dynamic, 6465
shoulders, 29
silences: articulation of, 104107; and
aspiration and suspension, 104106,
105, 174n99; as breathing, 106; in
detached playing, 170n31; length,
timing of, 108; and light and unrestrained finger motion, 71; in ordinary manner of playing, 78; purpose
of, 106; silences darticulation, 106
Silvains (Woodland nymphs) (Couperin,
F.), 81
Sinfonias (Bach, J. S.), 100
singing, 14, 99, 101, 154nn9,49
singing style, 69, 99101, 176nn110,116
single-manual keyboards, 7, 65, 151n6
sitting, at keyboard, 1013, 17, 2526,
2930, 153n31
Six Little Preludes for Beginners (Bach,
J. S.), 4243
Sixime Ordre (Couperin, F.), 103
skill: increasing, 41; supported by good
taste, 64
216
Index
skin, roughness of, avoiding, 21

slides, 92, 129
sliding action, 35, 38, 59
sliding technique. See stroking the keys
slow passages, stroking the keys, effect,
56
slow pieces, suspension in, 105
slow tempo, and semidetached playing,
78
slurred notes: in adagio movement, 72;
articulation of, 8790; in broken
chords, 88; compared to ordinary
manner of playing, 77; of hurdygurdy, 86; playing, 84
slurs: in appoggiaturas, 96; articulation
of, 8790, 88; compared to ordinary
manner of playing, 77; curved lines
as notation, effect, 8485, 85; demarcation and connecting of notes
in, 74; finger exercises for, 82, 8283;
German violinists and, 87; legato
playing of, 8690; liaisons, 84; overlapping notes and, 8788; playing,
8385; to represent string instruments, 73
small fingers: in arpeggios, 129; and
contraction of hand, 131, 133; drawn
inward, 3031, 34; fingering for,
114116, 126131, 133, 183nn40,44;
in leaps, 129; under palm, 30; placement on keys, 26, 28, 3738, 54; position of, 31, 3538, 117; raised keys,
for playing, 127129, 127130; in
tremblements (trills), 44
smooth playing, 30
snapped notes, 58
softness: of dynamics, 59, 73, 75; of
touch, 31, 48, 67
Solier, Mademoiselle Regnault de,
149n3
solo playing, 82, 112
Sonata BWV 1027 (Bach, J. S.), 95, 95
soul (lme), giving to harpsichord, 104
sound: beautiful sound, 85; brilliant

sound, 5960; created by stroking
the keys, 59; decaying tone of harpsichords, 87, 90, 97, 173n81, 179n148;
dynamics and, 6466; harpsichord
compared to plucked instruments,
52; legato and overlapping sounds,
8081; muddy sound, cause of, 75;
overlapping sounds, 75, 77, 8081,
9596; round sound, 5960, 102,
125; sustaining with arpeggiation,
9092
span, comfort, effect of thumb on, 125
Spanish keyboard tradition, 115116,
132, 132133
Spanish ornaments, 56, 58
sparkling effects, 55
speed: of articulation, 60; of attack, 47,
107; crescendo-diminuendo in trills,
97; on dropping finger on a key, 65;
evenness of movement and, 45; of
the hands, 20; of note release, 109; in
playing, 43; of release, 65, 107, 109,
178n138; and stroking and perpendicular motion, 55; of trills, 9798; in
warm-up exercises by Miller, 42
Speer, Daniel, 147
Speth, Johannes, 19
spine, 17, 153n41
spinets, 8, 20, 52, 5657, 151n11,
152n13
St. Cecilia, 157n101, 158n102
staccato: compared to ordinary manner
of playing, 7780; and detached playing, 101102; and good performance,
73; of J. S. Bach, 59; not part of basic
touch/articulation, 72; and note
length, 170n31; production of, articulation and, 71
staggered playing, articulation in, 9394
standing, at Flemish harpsichord, 12
stepwise passages, 72
sticky playing, 72, 79
Index
stiff fingers: avoiding, 1921, 82; technique using, 58, 103
stile cantabile, 99101
stool, for seating, 12, 17, 153n31
strength: of fingers, 9, 30, 53, 68, 98,
136; of hands, 29, 46
stretching: of fingers, 19, 35, 38, 40,
4546, 125, 129; general stretching
of body, 40
striking the keys, 1112, 20, 60; avoiding, 50; dryer tone when key struck
from height, 47; sound made by, effect, 48
strings: connection with, 9, 26, 47, 49,
65, 136, 174n94; decaying tone of,
87, 90, 97, 173n81, 179n148; dryer
tone when key struck from height, 47;
ghost sound, 49; legato and overlapping sounds, 8081; materials for, 7;
remaining on, for playing ornaments,
94, 174n94; and resonating length of
notes, 65; vibration, precise termination of, 109, 132
6162; and release of jack, 107
strong notes, 114120, 117120
students: on age to begin lessons, 56;
and balance point of fingers, 55;
calm hand position, training of, 50;
constitution of, effect, 46; ensuring
proper hand position, 33; feet, position of, 1213; grace notes, playing,
94; hands of, 78; harpsichords for
beginning students, 79; mordents,
playing, 94; playing on different keyboard instruments, 6669; quilling
for, 79, 19, 94; and relaxation, 19;
spinet, use by, 8, 151n11; trills, playing, 43, 94
Sturm und Drang, 15, 154n51
style: brilliant style, 51, 86, 103104,
113; broken style (style bris), 90, 92;
changes in, and fingering, 113; from
217
clavichord playing, 69; coulant style,

86 (see also legato); delicate style of
playing, 28; flowing style, 51, 83; individual sense of, 4; of music, expression
and, 64; relaxed style, 28, 80
style bris (broken style), 90, 92
suavity, 2
substitution, 46, 8485, 8586, 128,
171n62
subtlety: and fingering, 113; and suppleness of fingers, 120
Suite in A Minor (Purcell), 94
Sulzer, Johann Georg, 75, 102, 147
suppleness: of fingers, 7, 19, 120; of
hands, 19, 2122, 28, 31; of tendons,
5, 2122; of wrist, 28
suspension, 93, 104105, 105
Sweelinck, Jan Pieterszoon, 121
sweet harmony, 2
sweet playing, 3031
sweetness of touch, 2, 20, 110
La Sylva (Forqueray, A.), 93
Syntagma musicum (Praetorius), 111
syntax, articulation to follow, 74
synthesizer, touch progress affected by,
10
Tabulatura nova (Scheidt), 87
Tanker og Regler fra Grunden af om
Musiken (Thielo), 38
taste, good, 15, 64, 9495, 106, 122
tasteful playing, 112, 122
tastes, changes in, and fingering, 113
teachers: author as, 3, 9, 94; avoiding
grimaces and mannerisms, 1516,
18; and balance point of fingers, 55;
and exercises, 22, 46; finger contact
with keys, 50; good hand technique,
19; good posture, 12; individual sense
of style of, 4; introducing trills, 44,
94; and la douceur du toucher, 2, 4; as
pedagogues, 2, 4, 12, 69, 135; proper
hand position, vii, 33, 55, 63
218
Index
technique: agogic accents, 107108,

178n140; all keyboard instruments,
3; arpeggios, 9093; articulation and,
70110; in brilliant style, 51, 103
104, 113; cantabile playing, 99101;
clavichord, 23; composition, used to
convey meaning of, 71; conclusions on,
136; dtach, 103, 105106; detached
playing, 101104, 103; different keyboard instruments, 6669; energy
devoted to, 69; fingering, 111135;
good performance, 73; legato playing,
8087; light and unrestrained finger
motion, 71; mental preparedness
and, 40, 104; note lengths, timing of,
108110; ordinary manner of playing,
7779; ornaments, 56, 58, 9499;
performed gracefully, 2; portative
organs, 159n115; relaxation and, 23;
silences, 101107; slurs, 8790; speed
of, 47, 107; staggered playing, 9394;
tension in, effect, 20; for timing, 108
110. See also particular topics
tempo: changes in, performers sensitivity in, 74; clothing, effect of on, 113;
and differences in harpsichords, 113;
markings, 7376, 99100, 176n110;
over-legato use, effect on, 72; rapid
tempos, 72; and semidetached style
of playing, 78; slurs, considerations
when playing, 90
Tempo and Expression Marks (Fallows), 74
Ten. (hold). See tenuto
tender pieces, 105
tendons: effect of menial labor on, 6;
flexibility of, 6, 33, 46; of late started,
badly taught players, 19; leaps, effect
on, 4546, 125; relaxation of, 15, 45,
125; straight fingers, effect on, 35;
suppleness of, 5, 2122; tension, in,
effect, 18, 21, 35; wide stretches, effect on, 45, 125
tension: Alexander Technique and,

153n41; in body, 18, 20, 40; and
breathing, 18; elasticity and, 46; in
fingering, effect, 116; in fingers, avoiding, 19, 38, 75, 83; in hands, avoiding,
20, 75, 93, 125; necessary tension,
155n61; release of, 30, 40; straight
fingers, effect on, 35; in tendons, effect, 21, 35; trapped, 18; unnecessary,
avoiding, 23, 37, 125
tenuto, 75, 108
tessitura, changing of, effect, 178n140
text, articulation to follow, 74
Thielo, Carl August, 38, 147
thumbs: accidentals, for playing,
126130, 127129, 183nn40,44,48;
articulation affected by position of,
36; and contraction of hand, 131, 133;
curving into palms, 53; fingering and,
42, 42, 113, 120130; general use
of, 182n31; in legato playing, 83, 86;
under palm, 30, 124; passing in passages, 81; as pivot fingers, 126127,
130; placement on keys, 26, 28,
3539; in playing figured base, 82;
position of, 2223, 3031, 3438;
pressing on keys, 23, 53; raised keys,
for playing, 126130, 127129; and
span, comfort of, 125; in strong and
weak beats, 114118
tierce coul, 92, 123
tightness, 19, 21, 63
timing: articulation of, 108110;
dynamics produced by, 65; and
light and unrestrained finger motion, 71; note lengths, of, 108110,
178nn142,144,147, 179n148; regulating of, for expression, 64
toccata: adagio in, 91; arpeggiation in,
91; arpeggios in, 92; chords in, 91, 91;
fingering in, 118119, 118119; Italian, trill speed in, 98; notes, reiterating in, 91; performance styles, touches
Index
for, 74; playing of, 91; trills in, speed
of, 98
Toccata no. 1 in G Major (Scarlatti, A.),
118119, 118119
Toccatas (Frescobaldi), 178n147
tone: appoggiaturas, release tone of,
96; beautiful tone, 1, 4, 182n29;
clusters, 126; contraction of hand
and, 182n29; decay of, 87, 90, 97,
173n81, 179n148; detaching of, 75;
diminished when key struck from
height, 48, 164n26; dryer when key
struck from height, 47; dynamics
and, 6466; and expression, 64; flow
of, 127; good tone, 109; of Italian
harpsichords, 173n81; linking successive tones, effect, 64; loudness of,
73; management of, 64; overlapping
tone, 56; over-legato use, effect on,
72; passing nonharmonic tones, 92,
173n84; production of, 64; regulation
of, 35; round tone, 125; in schwer and
leicht styles, 75; and stroking the keys,
56, 60; sustaining of, 75; sweet tone
on harpsichord, 20; sweeter, producing, 20; when key struck too quickly,
harshly, 109
tonotechnie (performance reproducing
machine), 106
torso. See posture
touch: achieving proper touch with
fingers, 19; basic touch in playing,
72; beauty of, 20, 44; belle manire
du toucher (a beautiful manner of
playing), 166n38; delicacy of, 47;
23, 6669; la douceur du toucher, 2,
4, 47, 52, 71, 136; dynamics and,
6466; evenness in instrument, 10;
and expression, 64, 76; extremes of,
avoiding, 79; and good performance,
73; good touch, 85, 160n124; gravity and, 5253, 55; in leicht (light)
219
style, 75; less is more, 136; lifting of fingers, minimizing, 4749;

lightness of, 9, 28, 67; and meaning
of Italian terms, 76; and national
styles, 7576; in ordinary manner of
playing, 72, 7779; overlapping, on
keys, 79; perfection of, 44; posture
and, 19; progress affected by other
keyboard use, 10; refinement of on
fortepiano and harpsichord, 6869;
relaxation and, 1823; in schwer style,
75; scratch technique, 5556, 58,
167n55; simultaneous touch, 87; for
slurs, 87; and sticky playing, 72, 79;
6162; sweetness of touch, 2, 31, 110;
too light a touch, 79; too much force,
effect, 4849, 164n26; touching the
keys, 3, 4769, 54, 6162, 73; warmup exercises, 41
Trait de la viole (Rousseau, J.), 94
Trait de laccord de lespinette (Denis),
20
Trait de lharmonie (Rameau), 82
Il Transilvano (Diruta), 90, 97, 114
treatises: and arms and elbows, 23;
and articulation, 7172; and artistic
license, 133, 135; Baroque treatises,
12; and cats paw image, 31; on choosing instrument, 7; and contraction
of hand, 130, 132; and evolutions,
41; and fingering, 38, 112114, 117,
120123; French keyboard treatises,
2, 98; German treatises, 109, 115;
and hand position, 23, 28, 30, 32; and
legato, 84, 86; lessons in, 133; and motion of hands, wrists, 62; not limited
to harpsichord, 23; and note length,
108109; and ordinary manner, 77;
for organists, 11; and ornaments, 97
98; and relaxation, 18; and silences,
106; and slurs, 87, 90; and stroking
the keys, 58; and touching the keys,
220
Index
47, 52; and turning of torso and feet,

17; and unnecessary body movements,
14; and wrists, 28
tree imagery, 14
tremblements (trills), 44, 104
tremoli (trills), 97, 175n102
trills: appoggiaturas preceding, 98; appuy (prepared, supported trill), 99;
artistic license in fingering, 135;
cadence, 104, 177n129; crescendodiminuendo of, 97; dynamics in, 97;
expression and articulation of, 94; fingering for, 115, 182n29; playing, relaxation of muscles, 19, 94; practicing
of, 4344, 9798, 182n29; to sustain
harmonies, 97; tremblements (trills),
44, 104; tremoli (trills), 97, 175n102;
as warm-up exercises, 4344
Trk, Daniel Gottlob: about, 147; on
accidentals (raised keys), 128129,
183nn40,44; on agogic accents, 107;
on beautiful tone, 1; on care of the
hands, 21; on clavichord, 3, 9, 31,
150n9; on curvature of fingers, 35;
on elbow position, 25; on execution
of different types of pieces, 76; on
facial expressions, 16; on fingering,
112, 126, 183nn40,44; on grammar
of music, 7071; on hand position,
25; on note lengths, 108109; on ordinary manner of playing, 7779; on
ornaments, 99; on ornaments, trills
as warm-up exercises, 43; on playing
67; on playing over-legato, 8384; on
position at keyboard, 10, 12; on relaxation and finger control, 21; on schwer
and leicht styles, 75; on slurs, 88; on
thumb use, 3536, 126, 128129; on
touch and national styles, 7576
Unterricht im Klavierspielen (Wolf, G.),

28, 109
upper mordents, 56
unmeasured preludes, French, 8485,

85, 92
Die wahre Art das Pianoforte zu spielen

(Milchmeyer), 84
velocity, in playing, 43
Venegas de Henestrosa, Luis, 116,
147148, 181n17
venue, considerations when playing
slurs, 90
versatility, multiple keyboard study and,
10
Versuch einer Anweisung die Flte traversiere zu spielen (Quantz), 60
Versuch ber die wahre Art das Clavier
zu spielen (Bach, C. P. E.), 8, 34, 109,
112, 120, 167n55
vibrato (bebung), on clavichord, 68
violin, imitatio violistica, 87
violinists, German, 87
virginal, 26, 27, 157n101; Dutch virginal
school, 121; English virginal school,
115, 121, 123; legato in repertory for,
81; muselar, 113, 187n7; repertory for,
81, 113, 121; and thumb-under fingering, 113; trills played on, 98; types
of, 152n13
visualizations, 14, 20, 31
vocal music, 118; artistic license in, 98
99; emulating in playing, 100; tempo
and dynamics in, 74
voice leading, 82
voice lessons, 14, 99, 154n49
voicing: by builder, 152n17; key action
and, 165n28; maintenance, basic
skills, 50; of plectra, 50; of quills,
165n28
Vollkommene Kapellmeister (Mattheson),
16
volume, and good performance, 73
Vorschlge, 95, 95
Index
Walther, Johann Gottfried, 99
warm-up exercises, 4, 2223, 4046,
4142
weak notes, 114120, 117120
wedge marks, for agogic accents, 107
Wegweiser (Speth), 19, 155n64
weight: arm, hand weight not to affect
fingers, 5254, 54; finger weight, 3,
5253, 79
wide stretches, 45, 125, 129
wind instruments, tongued syllables for
playing, 71
Wolf, Ernst Wilhelm, 148
Wolf, Georg Friedrich, 28, 34, 69, 76,
84, 103, 109, 148
womens hands, 2122
221
wrists: agility of, 29; and contraction of

hand, 133; flexibility of, 29, 38, 50,
63, 117, 133; to follow hands, 29, 52;
height of, 29, 50; holding and moving, 2, 63; portative organs, position
for, 159n115; position at keyboard,
2329, 27; position when hands are in
motion, 6263; rotation when fingers
peel toward palm, 61; suppleness of,
28; tension and, 18; tree imagery and,
14
yema, 31
yoga, and posture at keyboard, 13
Zarlino, Gioseffo, 99, 148
Yonit Lea Kosovske holds a Doctor of Music degree in Early Music from
Indiana University Jacobs School of Music, where she studied harpsichord
and other historical keyboards with Elisabeth Wright. She has given master
classes in the United States and South America and has performed as a soloist
and chamber artist in major cities throughout the United States, Israel, Hong
Kong, Spain, and South America. She teaches harpsichord and piano in a
private studio and has taught at Indiana University. She has recorded several
CDs, the most recent of which are Keyboard Music of Girolamo Frescobaldi
(Focus, 2010) and La Gracieuse: French Chaconnes, Passacailles, and Preludes
(La Douceur, 2010). Upcoming recordings include a CD of Romantic Spanish music for voice, fortepiano, and guitar with Canto Romntico. For more
information, visit her website: www.yonitkosovske.com.

Historical Harpsichord Technique

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Historical Harpsichord Technique

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Kosovske

Yonit Lea Kosovske performs on

Front jacket illustration: The authors

Bloomington & Indianapolis